Home

MTS Temposonic II

1. THE ANALOG OUTPUT
2. PIN CONDUCTOR ASSIGNMENTS i WIRE PAIRS FROM P1 NEUTER TO P2 COMPANY HUSKY PART 687413 s WHITE 1 GROUND B SUBJECT TEMPOSONICS II REPLACEMENT CABLE BROWN FRAME NOTA RETROFITTING THE SRH NEMA GRAY 3 N C N C ENCLOSURE PINK 4 N C N C RED S VCC A REF RETROFIT CABLE FOR AOM S ae x 12 INCHES OR LESS SLACK 7 SET GND 3 VI
3. ANALOG DIGITAL SYSTEM CONFIGURATION WITH TEMPOSONICS II CONNECTIONS TO ANALOG TEMPOSONICS II TRANSDUCER OUTPUT MODULE AOM WITH STRAIN RELIEF CONNECTORS THE SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ILLUSTRATED BELOW TYPICALLY SUPPLIES A DIGITAL DISPLACEMENT OUTPUT AND AN ANALOG VELOCITY OUTPUT BUT AN 5 5 ANALOG DISPLACEMENT OUTPUT IS AVAILABLE SYSTEN COMPONENTS O REQUIRED ARE THE TRANSDUCER WITH BUILT IN DIGITAL PERSONALITY MODULE DPM TDC CONTROLLER AND AN ANOLOG OUTPUT MODULE AOM B8BBBBB MES TB3 1 BCISISISISSIS SISIS B IB CDS pte HE E FROM TEMPOSONICS II O O O PIN 1 WHITE BLUE STRIPE OR SOLID WHIT
4. mE Se rp 1 lem CALVERT MANUFACTURING MT STYLE CONNECTOR MTS 4370012 MS3112E 12 10P MATES TO RB STYLE MATING CONNECTOR MTS 4370013 MS3116F 12 108 GASKET MTS 4400231 L C Es or POTTING 112 1 TEMPOSONICS II TRANSDUCER WITH EXTERNAL INTERROGATION DPM woe PIN PIN OUT FOR COLOR FUNCTIONAL N ROM TEMPO II ITS 370012 CABLE ESCRIPTION dd 6 4 PIN 1 A WHITE DC GROUND PIN 2 J BROWN FRAME PIN 3 K GRAY CATE PIN G PINK GATE PIN 5 H RED 5 VDC PIN 6 B BLUE 15 VDC PIN 7 NOT USED BLACK NOT USED PIN 8 NOT USED VIOLET NOT USED PIN 9 E YELLOW 4 INTERROGATE PIN 10 D GREEN INTERROGATE MTS s Divisi A DRAWING NuMBER AAP 13 00 055 Ke Qo IVISIOD SITE Wl 1 aw J e 11 29 94 CARY NORTH CAROLINA SHEET 1 OF 1 REVISION A ORIGINATOR JAVE BAKER
5. PIN WIRE FUNCTION TO AOM TO AOM NO COLOR TERMINAL J2 6 PIN 1 BLUE GATE N C N C GREEN GATE TB2 C C 3 YELLOW INTERR TB1 G 9 4 ORANGE INTERR TB2 E D 5 RED VCC TB3 H A 6 BLACK DC GND TB2 B B 7 SHIELD FRAME GND TB2 B B AOM BOX AOM BOX STD SUPPLY 24VDC OPTION o O o b DISPLACEMENT OUT Oo m i RETURN x E EBEEBBE BBE BBEB TB1 rn TBl TR Sle PEPE sa EITHE SEN eR B SELLE EE ele O o O o 15 VDC 24 VDC 15 VDC DC GROUND DC GROUND NOTES 1 MAXIMUM LOAD ON 4 20 mA UNGROUNDED IS 400 OHMS 2 MAXIMUM LOAD ON 4 20 mA GROUNDED IS 500 OHMS 3 ON THE 4 20 mA GROUNDED THE SUPPLY GROUND IS USED AS THE RETURN DO NOT USE TB1 B AS YOUR RETURN 4 THE AOM M N MUST REFLECT LP STROKE 31XXXXXXXLPXXXX 5 THIS WIRING IS CORRECT AS OF 4 96 6 ADM IT COMPATIBLE WITH SE BASED LP SEE APPLICATIONS REV B CHANGED VELOCITY RMP 3 25 96
6. EAD PIN NO WIRE COLOR PAIR EUTER DPM WIRE COLOR R NE GREATER 4 GATE GATE WHITE SC 3 WHITE BLACK GATE GATE BLACK RE ING LESS THAN a H ON 9 amp 10 5 15VDC 15VDC RED 1 RED BLACK DC COMM DC COMM Bl Is D UST BE 6 m r 15VDC 15VDC Y E INTE BOTH FOR DUEL 2 YELLOW BLACK FRAME 1 FRAME 1 3 I ae E PO II WITH ET FOR 8 ven PULS NOT USED GRE D 7 GREEN BLACK USED NOT USED BLACK E 9 INT 4 INT 4 amp 5 BL 10 BLUE BLACK INT 4 INT 4 amp 5 B DED BY MPDC 0039 M PUTNAM 7 23 96 Rev B Delete incorrect Beldon cable FI S nm 2 z Y A A DATE s Sensors Division RAWIN LV JJ VI E SIZE DRAWING M MM 04 12 96 ggg CARY NORTH CAROLINA EET 1 OF 1 REVISION ORIGINATOR DAVE E ANALOG DIGITAL SYSTEM CONFIGURATION WITH TEMPOSONICS II TRANSDUCER TEMPOSONICS H CONNECTIONS TO ES ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE AOM
7. SUBJECT PLUG IN ANALOG OUTPUT CARD WITH LP TRANSDUCER OUTPUTS AVAILABLE TO 10 VDC DIFFERENTIAL 2 MAGNET TO AOM FROM LP WIRE PLUG IN CARD TRANSDUCER COLOR CONNECTIONS PIN PH BLUE N C DC GROUND p 2 GREEN P 14 2 NOT USED PIN 3 YELLOW PIN 7 O 9 VDC INPUT sa DINE 5 4 15 VDC INPUT PIN 5 ED PIN NOT 1 i BTACK SIN 6 NOT USED ANS 7 INTERROGATION PULSE TO LDT 8 NOT USED 9 NOT USED 10 GROUND 11 GROUND 12 ANALOG DISPLACE OUTPUT 3 NOT USED 4 GATE FROM SENSOR 5 INTERROGATION PULSE TO TRANSDUCER NOTE 1 SHIELD WIRE DRAIN CAN BE CONNECTED TO PIN 1 ON THE AOM CARD es PLUG IN CARD NOT COMPATIBLE WITH SE BASED LP SEE APPLICATIONS REV B ADDED NOTE 2 DRAWING NUMBER CHANGED FROM MPDC 0030 TO APD 0041 TEP 9 20 97 M E A VD Dn DATE M jj CAROLA Division SIZE DRAWING NUMBER A 1 9 26 97 T CARY NORTH CAROLINA SHEET 1 OF 1 REVISION 3 ORIGINATOR R M PUTNAM A of mi M i
8. 20 mA UNGROUNDED LOOP TB1 A a E CONTROLLER Si LA A e o EV TO wy 1 TO 8 VDC 00 So OHMS E TB1 B 100 ohms 7 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE 0 mA GROUNDED LOOP TB1 A Ca CA O V 250 EN TO V lt 1 TO 8 VDC 400 AX OHMS Y TB1 B vi Y 1 SELECTING THE GROUNDING SCHEME IS DEPENDENT UPON THE ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE CONTROLLER INTERFACE 2 THE CURRENT LOOP PATH MUST BE COMPLETED FOR THE SYSTEM TO OPERATE 3 THE UNGROUNDED VERSION IS NOT TRULY ISOLATED FROM GROUND ISOLATORS ARE REQUIRED IF THIS CONFIGURATION IS NEEDED BY THE CONTROLLER INTERFACE Leer A PITC 1 E i A 1 JATE S Sensors Division L DRAWING NUMBER A P 11 18 94 E SIZE CARY NORTH CAROLINA SHEET 1 OF 1 REVISION A ORIGINATOR JAVE BAKER Ge gt 7 9 UO 9 3 2 Se 8 0 RDUM WARNI NG 1 INTERROGATION PULS
9. pa SAE LOW THE SYSTEM TO WORK PROPERLY DRAWING NUMBER 5 A APD 0033 9 23 97 SENSORS DIVISION SIZE CARY NORTH CAROLINA SHEET 1 OF 1 REVISION B ORIGINATOR RSM e RETROFIT oss Reff Ap1 0012 OF LA C b BASED SENSORS DO FLOATING 1 MAGNET 09 amp 2 CAPTIVE SLIDE
10. Q _ SEE DETAIL F SEE DETAIL C INTERROGATION D 5 CONFIGURATION SEE TABLE 2 amp 6 A SEE SALES ORDER 1 00 0 03 4 b RN gt 3 e IC i AE INTERROGATIO i GI D 6 CONFIGURATION SEE TABLE 3 amp 6 a A Y T SEE TABLE 1 SEE DETAIL F SEE DETAIL C G S s 15 SEE DETAIL D DU t c D SEE NOTE 3 y 3 d E E 1 u Q S N T a c 8 picta v ITEM 11 4 CONFIGURATION WIRING FOR P1 THE SAME AS OTHER DASH NOS _ 41 00 IN 0 50 IN WIRES TOGETHER AT THIS LOCATION ANTI STATIC BAG SO CABLE BOTTOMS OUT IN BOTTOM OF BAG THREADED COUPLER RB OPTIONAL La A 2i A 2 SEE DETAIL E SEE TABLE 1 5 REF 8 SEE DETAIL F 1 00 0 03 9 3 SEE DETAIL C SC o F PI P2 Ff YER er l SC O i e d ecce m on 6 PIN INTERROGATION Wi 1 SZ GES 1 CONFIGURATION u SEE TABLE 2 amp 6 P A l SEE DETAIL E SEE DETAIL F SEE TABLE 1 5 REF B SEE DETAIL C s 3 PI A P2 EH ei m if Ch O 2 M imm St f
11. WITH STRAIN RELIEF CONNECTORS THE SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ILLUSTRATED BELOW TYPICALLY SUPPLIES A DIGITAL DISPLACEMENT OUTPUT AND AN ANALOG VELOCITY OUTPUT BUT AN ANALOG DISPLACEMENT OUTPUT IS ALSO AVAILABLE SYSTEM O O COMPONENTS REQUIRED ARE THE TRANSDUCER WITH BUILT IN DIGITAL O N PERSONALITY MODULE DPM COUNTER CARD AND AN ANALOG OUTPUT V P MODULE AOM FROM TEMPOSONICS II ET STRIPED COLOR SOILD COLOR M O PIN 1 WHITE BLUE STRIPE WHITE DC GROUND 2 PIN 2 BLUE WHITE STRIPE BROWN FRAME GROUND 9 PIN 10 GRAY WHITE STRIPE GREEN INT PULSE oe 2 We E PIN 4 ORANGE WHITE STRIPE PINK GATE 1 TB3 H 1B VDC PIN 6 GREEN WHITE STRIPE BLUE 15 VDC i PIN 9 W IITE GRAY STRIPE YELLOW INT PULSE v as RED IER i c TB1 A DISP OUT PIN 5 W HITE GREEN STRIPE RED T 15 VDC TB1 B DISP GND O C FROM TEMPOSONICS II gI DT r y T r PIN 1 STRIPED COLOR SOLID COLOR T 1 PIN 4 ORANGE WHITE STRIPE PINK GATE 0 VDC PIN 5 PIN 3 WHITE ORANGE STRIPE GRAY GATE PIN 4 PIN 2 2 5 VDC PIN 1 12345678 OTE O O NOTE O O THE GATE OUTPUT FROM THE TRANSDUCER MUST BE TERMINATED IN TWO LOCATIONS ONE IN THE AOM TERMINAL BLOCK TB2 C AND THE OTHER GOES TO THE COUNTER CARD 2 PIN 5 DC COMMON 5 VDC 1 2A gt 2 CIRCUIT OR REFERENCE GROUND IS ESTABLISHED BY CONNECTING THE POWER S
12. A AOM WIEXT VDC FOR VELOCITY AP 0154 8 31 1994 APD 0013 A MODIF 80 SERIES TSC TO 60 SERIES AP 0056 1 1 1995 SM APD 0014 A TEMPO II W DPM amp AOM amp TEC CARD I 1 1 1995 SM APD 0015 D TEMPO II ANA DIG WTDC amp AOM AP 0099 1 1 1995 SM APD 0016 B HUSKY RB TO SRH RETRO PULSE AP 0O109 2 20 1995 SM APD 0017 B HUSKY RB TO SRH RETRO PULSE AP 0108 2 20 1995 SM APD 0018 A WIRING LP TO AOM CARD 3 1 1995 DDB _APD 0019 A WIRING TEMPO I INTRINSI AOM 3 1 1995 DDB APD 0020 A AOM JUMPERS INTERROGATION 3 1 1995 DDB APD 0021 A MOOG AOM S PWM amp CONFORMAL 4 21 1996 BKT APD 0022 A EXT CABLE amp INT CABLE PIN OUT l 8 13 1996 BKT APD 0023 B MATING CONNECTOR PART NUMBERS AP1 0001 5 3 1995 DBB APD 0024 B SPECS FOR AOM DUEL CHANNEL AP1 0002 5 18 1995 DBB APD 0025 B DIFFERENCES OLD TCS NEW MK292 CARD AP1 0003 5 22 1995 DBB APD 00200 J B NOTE ON AB 1771 QB AND DPM AP1 0004 6 12 1995 DBB APD 0027 C SPECS FOR AOM DIF DIFFERENTIAL OUTPUTS AP1 0005 4 22 1996 DBB APD 0028 B SPECS FOR ANA DIG SYSTEMS TO ORDER AP1 0006 5 23 1995 DBB APD 0029 D WIRING OF LP TO AOM BOX AP1 0007 6 15 1995 DBB APD 0030 _ C DISPLACEMENT FLOAT i AP1 0008 5 1 1996 BKT APD 0031 C TEMPO III CAPTIVE SLIDE DUAL CHANNEL AP1 0009 8 8 1996 RSM APD 0032 _ C TEMPO IIIRH ROD STYLE DUAL CHANNEL AP1 0010 10 1 5 1996 RSM APD 0033 B RETROFITING NEW SE BA
13. RT 3 14 Required and Recommended Grounding Ve sw ew V WR S 3 16 Sample BCD Output Connection Table ST RUME SEER AEE te Setting DIP Switches Binary System cocoocoeoceceeceeesceecess Sat Setting DIP Switches BCD System eege eegne ge 3 29 Testing Counter Card Output 4 System Level Signal Timing 900000000009090909000009 4 6 List of Tables d Connections 2455556550042 20922c6955466 CELETTE ELETT S12 J2 Mating Connectors ee eeeeeteeeg eegene egene eegenegeege SMC Ji Connections secccccscccceces e0 e086000000900095000060009096 J Counter Card Output SE EC Mes e ge eck Counter Card Output 2 06606000000660600000 See ege kS Counter Card Output 4 b m aw o sss iss ISR WA 3 19 BCD Representation of Stroke o oo aoe es mE O BCD Output Connections 200290227 KEREN KC nomen dL EDIT vir Re KSE UON ION a Ct R ew sw oe MO iv Model Coding The system components transducer interface box and counter card are identified by a model coding system which identifies ail construction variables required to complete your system The following information is proviced to aid in proper wiring and operation of the system purchased Kindly keep this information in a safe place for future reference SALESORDER O DATE YSTEM SERIAL NUMBER 5 RESOLU
14. Cross Reff AP1 0017 WITH 7 INCH DEAD SPACE STANDARD TEMPO I W U Z DEAD SPACE NULL m 2 00 50 8mm T Stroke 3 75 95 25mm DARD TEMPO I WITH S INCH DEAD SPACE ll 1 STA DEAD SPACE 5 00 127mm Stroke 3 75 95 25mm 2 00 50 8mm WITH RB CONNECTOR TEMPO II DEAD SPACE 2 5 63 50mm Stroke NULL TH RB CONNECTOR DEAD SPACE B Stroke Re nd 2 5 63 50mm NULL 2 00 50 80mm 3 246 82 45mm 54mm L 0 10 2 RIES LH WITH RG CONNECTOR 7 Stroke DEAD SPACE 2 5 63 50mm NULL 2 00 50 80mm 3 52 89 41mm 3 20 81 28mm 0 10 2 54mm DEAD SPACE 2 5 63 50mm NULL 2 00 50 80mm 0 10 2 54mm 7 00 177 80mm A JRAWING NUMBER ou A AANO 1 H p x J A 3 yJ 4 DAT 9 24 97 4 SENSORS DIVISION CARY
15. gt J ID label constructed of DRAIN WIRE TWISTED WITH BROWN WIRE embossing tape approx 1 25 MAKING CONTACT TO THE ID OF THE MOLDED and heat shrink approx 2 CABLE CLAMP MS3101A14S 6P 370018 DSOLETE SUPERCEEDED BY MPDC 0037 NOTE TWIST THE SHIELD DRAIN WIRE AND THE FRAME WIRE TOGETHER THIS TWISTED PAIR MUST BE BETWEEN THE CABLE CLAMP AND THE BOOT AND NOT TERMINATED I M PUTNAM 7 23 96 Rev B Added Husky part to cable BKT 5 7 96 a gt T f W ff w M 5 Sensors Division A DRAWING NUMBER APD 0016 SIZE ld CARY NORTH CAROLINA SHEET 1 OF 1 REVISION B ORIGINATOR DAVE BAKER 3 13 95 PIN CONDUCTOR ASSIGNMENTS WIRE PAIRS FROM P1 EUTER TO P2 COMPANY HUSKY PART 697577 E E M WHITE 1 GROUND B SUBJECT TEMPOSONICS H REPLACEMENT CABLE BROWN 2 FRAME NOTE RETROFITTING THE SRH NEMA 4 GRAY 3 N C ENCLOSURE PINK 4 N C RED 5 SS F REF RETROFIT CABLE
16. 2 Q 2 19 95 OF 1 Qn WIRING CONFIGURATION FOR AN MODULE ERNAL FOR VELOCITY COLOR GROUND FRAME GND e 1 AMP GND RET PULSE 15 VDC INTERRO 12 VDC gt JIa SS TEMPOSONICS II CONNECTIONS TO ANALOG OUTPUT MODULA AOM WITH 6 amp 10 PIN MILITARY STYLE MS CONNECTORS CH JZ 6 PIN CONNECTOR MS3102A 148S 6P A 15 VDC TB3 H A B 15 VDC TB3 J C GROUND TB3 K D DISP OUT TB1 A E VELO OUT TB1 C J1 F 24 VDC TB1 F G 24 VDC TB1 E 10 PIN CONNECTOR MS3112E12 10P mpg DRAWIN TEMPOSONICS GREEN 12 TO 14 5 VDC BLACK DC COMMON GND BROWN OR ORANGE RET PULSE TB2 C 13 5 TO 15 5 VDC WHITE INTERROGATION PULSE 411 5 TO 12 VDC DR Q3 ubuntu TEMPOSONICS I CONNECTIONS TO ANALOG OUTPUT MODULA AOM WITH 6 amp 10 PIN MILITARY STYLE MS CONNECTORS 6 PIN CONNECTOR MS3102A 14S 6P A REVI ORIGINATOR Y Y NUMBER A A 15 VDC TB3 H 5 B 15 VDC TB3 J C GROUND TB3 K DISP OUT TB1 A E VELO OUT TB1 C F 24 VDC TB1 F G 24 VDC TB1 E J1 10 PIN CONNECTOR MS3112E12 10P
17. 2 250 in Minimum Dia 2 250 in Minimum Dia Specifies Surface B Specifies Surface B JA 0 005 in Dia FIM lt 0 875 in Dia 0 015 0 000 p gt mm 3 4 16 UNIF 3B Thread See Notes 3 And 4 3 4 16 UNJF 3B Thread See Notes 3 and 4 vn 40 015 1 40 015 0 094 in 0000 0 094 in 0 000 LZ rr 1 S 7 1 105 in Lp See Note 7 Yj 2 CU 7 See Detail C D see Detail C li E x 0 030 in 0 010 R 0 500 gt See Note 8 pia 0 094 in REF Key Ze zy dee Movement 45 x5 Pitch Diameter Blind Thread Design 0 020 in R ET Maximum Detail C NOTES 1 Dimensions and tolerances based on ANSI Y14 5 1982 2 MTS has extracted all pertinent information from MS33649 to Generate this document 3 PD must be square with surface B within 0 005 FIM across 2 250 dia minimum 4 PD must be concentric with 2 250 dia within 0 030 FIM and with 0 769 dia within 0 005 FIM 5 Surface texture ANSI B46 1 1978 6 Use o ring MTS part number 560315 for correct sealing 7 The thread design shall have sufficient threads to meet strength requirements of material used 8 Finish counter bore shall be free from longitudinal and spiral tool marks Annular tool marks up to 32 micro inches maximum will be permissible Figure 2 9 O ring Boss Detail 1 180 in Recommended Minimum Spotface Diameter See
18. PULSE DURATION OF 5 SHOUL us ONE INPUT MUST BE A SINGLE INTERROGAT GROUND D ON BOTH INPUTS MUST B ES E USE ES DUAL INTERROGATION ELLA USED FOR Un D ET FOR EXT FOR FOR A TEMPO I WITH A DPM ERNAL INTERROGATION PIN NUMBERING SOCKET SIDE VIEW FROM TOP OF TRANSDUCER STRIPED SOLID PIN g WIRE COLOR WIRE COLOR NEUTER WITH DPM WITH APM WITH RPM 1 WHITE BLUE WHITE DC GROUND DC GROUND DC GROUND DC GROUND 2 BLUE WHITE BROWN FRAME FRAME FRAME FR
19. gt Clock Flip Flop 1 5 KOhms gu 3 Installation Measuring and control technology as a component of modern production facilities are often surrounded by inter ference factors which can impair the function of the elec tronic system For this reason the measuring technology should be installed very carefully and attention paid to the following items see fig 3 3 1 Installing the Sensor The sensor has to be mounted to the machine in any po sition The measuring point is definated by the position magnet that has to be connected to the moving machine part and it slides over the transducer rod without wearing 15 5min Dess Spacer NN Position Magnet S 77 BS Z ss Ferromagnetic Material 30 Position Magnet S Nonferrous Material Fig 3 lt Error Input Voltage Error Output 825 Ohms Fig 2 For mechanical installation see the below figures illustra ting minimum clearances of transducer magnets and note following items for the very best function of the device Use non ferrous material screws supports etc Using ferromagnetic materials the magnet needs spaces between the surface of the magnet and material Long Sensors above 1000 mm measuring stroke may require mechanical supports Mounting examples Position Magnet Sensor Rod Nonferrous Guide pipe Position Magnet Sensor Rod Nonferrous Loop support
20. ZERO GRADIENT Figure 2 Front panel TDU Zero and Gradient Push buttons v 2 4 F J DEE I TERT I IE EE ka Printed Circuit Board e Di Figure 3 Rear View of TDU w Cover Removed 7 GRADIENT The Gradient is unique for each transducer manufactured It represents the inverse of the velocity of the return pulses that travel along the waveguide of the transducer measured in microseconds per inch Although this velocity is very consistent from transducer to transducer and is extremely repeatable for a particular transducer there are slight variances To compensate for these slight variances the TDU offers a Gradient Mode which allows you to precisely program the gradient of a particular transducer into the TDU The following steps define the procedure for setting the gradient The gradient will be displayed in us inch microseconds per inch if dip switches SW2 and SW3 are ON prior to entering the gradient mode Otherwise the gradient is displayed in m s meters per second Gradient conversion To convert gradient from microseconds per inch to meters per seconds the following formula applies 25400 gradient us in m s Example Gradient 9 050 us in 25400 9 05 2806 62 m s Ensure that Dip Switch 1 refer to Figure 3 for switch location is set to ON If Dip Switch 1 is set to OFF this function will be disabled Press and hold the right push button labeled Gradient
21. 0 001 0 004 0 000 0000 50 100 150 200 250 300 Sensor Stroke Length inches Sensor Stroke Length inches e Update Preferred Mode Update Time Resolution 0 004 0 009 0 003 0 008 0 002 Sg Z oo 2 8 cs 0 001 0 006 0 000 0 005 50 100 150 200 250 300 Sensor Stroke Length inches 50 100 150 200 250 300 Sensor Stroke Length inches 17 18 7 2 APM Programming Procedure CAUTION If the APM is being programmed for the first time the analog output at power up will be near zero volts The programming steps are the same in this case but the analog output will return to zero volts until valid infor mation is stored for both Set Point 1 and Set Point 2 When both Set Points have been programmed the transducer will enter normal operat ing mode and produce an analog output scaled according to the infor mation permanently stored in the APM s memory O O SW1 SW2 C Figure 7 2 APM Top View CAUTION IMPORTANT Before beginning the programming procedures supply power to the APM for a full 5 minutes This will allow all components to sta bilize and ensure set point accuracy The output range of the APM is determined by choosing two endpoints within the active stroke length of the transducer and using the two push buttons to assign a voltage to each point The two endpoints are called Set Point 1 SW1 and Set Point 2 SW2 Any voltage from 10 volts to 10 vol
22. aS z Q 12345678 a a GO HH Es 3 80 IN m J TO PO r D Serie Oy 44 9 90 IN Un Sal c E SUPERCEEDED BY MPDC 0040 SAW 0 125 FROM EACH SIDE OF THE COUNTER CARD AS INDICATED ABOVE TET 5 V J A 2 TAKING CAUTION NOT TO DAMAGE ANY LANDS M PUTNAM 7 23 96 SMOOTH THE TRIMMED EDGES TO MAINTAIN AESTHETIC QUALITY AND STRAIGHTNESS A were vO AT TI L MA f 6 4 Ji D S Sensors Division ot DRAWING NUMBER A H 3 E 5 SIZE NS ets ia 1 27 95 CARY NORTH CAROLINA SHEET 1 OF 1 REVISION A ORIGINATOR DAVE BAKER NTERROGATIO y A 7 3 A A d jM v 4 2 4 y A H V C Z J I CREO N TAN CA T C C A AR p VZ 1 a MIN IE TEMPO H MUST BE CONFIGURED FOR A DPM WITH EXTERNAL md TERROGATION RECIRCULATION MUST BE SET ACCORDING TO THE e iei p Palen cane PDATE TIME SEE THE TEC CHART THE AOM MUST BE SPECIFIED CREON
23. 3 2 Installing the Board The analog displacement board AK 288 has the European standard format 100 x 160 mm for mounting in 19 racks For mounting in control cabinets it is also possible to use standard card holders form C 32 pins a c row Over the terminal block the sensor interface can be wired di rectly to the sensor O MTS Temposonics AK 288 3 3 Cable Electrical faults are often caused by the long data lines with defective and incorrect cable laying The Start Stop pulse is transmitted as a differential signal Cable connection between sensor and card of 500 meters are possible Attention All connections are measuring cable and must be treated as such Do not lay cable near and parallel to sources of inter ference such as engine lines frequency converters valve lines or other lines with high switching inductivity Lay low impedance cable Avoid earth circuits Use twisted cable with a shield The shielding of the sensor feed should be matched to the overall concept of the control 3 4 Power Supply Power units can also cause interference to the measuring system This often happens in facilities on which joint power supplies are used which then transmit interference peaks from other components Only stabilized power supplies guarantee trouble free functioning of the Temposonics measuring device Please note the connected loads right Attention Do not connect other voltages That ca
24. Transducer Rod Figure 2 4 Loop Support NOTE When open magnets are used ensure the transducer rod remains within the inside diameter of the magnet throughout the length of the stroke If the transducer rod is allowed to enter the cut out area of an open magnet the transducer signal could attenuate or be lost See Figure 2 7 2 1 2 Channel Supports Channel supports being typically straight are normally used with rigid transducers A channel support consists of a straight channel with loop supports mounted at intervals The loop supports are required to keep the transducer within the channel Figure 2 5 shows a channel support Channel supports are available from various manufacturers or may be fabricated Magnet e Part No 201553 or e Part No 251416 Loop Support Figure 2 5 Channel Support 2 1 3 Guide Pipe Supports Guide pipe supports are normally used for flexible transducers A guide pipe support is construct ed of non ferrous material straight or bent to the desired shape As shown in Figure 2 6 both inside and outside dimensions of the pipe are critical e Because the transducer rod is installed inside the pipe the inside diameter of the pipe must be large enough to clear the rod Magnet e Part No 201553 or e Part No 251416 NC Guide Pipe Figure 2 6 Guide Pipe Support e The outside diameter of the pipe must be small enough to clear the magnet Refer to pipe manufact
25. 0 0124 mm for meu roren 2 lt 00046 0 mem for metric veros es 6 0 00015 mn 0 006 mem for metne tros ea J 0001 on 0 0 mm for metre yerok ea 9 Other or umiied Comult MTS Semon Orervon end spetly reolub n veoaratery New Features and Design Changes Tero preset by OF qortcihes Can be reyet n the heidi dewred Latch Pwb t offered as Mardard at 0 charge on 14 Latch puhe now offered on gn 3 formerty on on 24 Mullsmeter resolution n ow Mandard for tros es YO he dn mllmeten Card wath ic 4 1 2 m formevir 4 1 4m Section Introduction Product Improvements This edition of the Installabon and Instruction Manual covers both Series 60 Digital Counter Cards the older version and Series 80 Digital Counter Cards released in June 1988 Before installation you must determine which type of card you are using in your application Use the following table to identify your card Type Width Color Zero preset Senes 60 former Series 80 June 1988 4 1 4 n 4 1 2 in Tan Green by fixed jumpers in US by DIP switches 1 and 2 Both versions have the same pattern of mounting holes for surface mounting and both are rack mountable Notice also that Digital Interface Boxes shipped after March 1 1988 are supplied with the capability for driving A transducer cable up to 100 feet long Refer to Section 3 for cable recommendations The Temposonics brand Linear Displacement Measurement System
26. 9 U Stroke as specified Fitting Do not loosen Transducer Flexible Rod Imperial Eastman Impolene Tubing 66 PP 3 8 or similar DeadZone 8 in minimum or as specified SM G623 2A Figure 3 8 Flexible Transducer Take the following steps to install a flexible transducer l 2 CAUTION DO NOT loosen or mount the transducer using the polypropylene fitting near the transducer head This will cause damage to the transducer Transducers supplied with a 1 inch O D head flange require a U bolt flange collar or similar clamping device to keep the transducer head stationary Transducers with a threaded hex can be mounted using the threads If the transducer must be rotated to engage the threads ensure the flexible rod can rotate freely If the rod binds or cannot be rotated a bracket or threaded flange should be used hold the transducer stationary and rotate the bracket or flange to engage the threads Install the permanent magnet over the LDT rod The permanent magnet is mounted to the movable device from which displacement is to be measured To minimize the effect of magnetic materials on the magnetic field of the permanent magnet ensure the minimum spacing requirements are met as shown in Figure 3 2 Only nonmagnetic materials can be in direct contact with the permanent magnet 3 8 3 Mount the digital interface box in a location within reach of the LDT cable Older systems allow the box to
27. Press and release the SW2 button to enter the Set Point 2 setup mode The APM will acknowledge by producing an output voltage of 2 1 volts At this point you can use the SW1 and SW2 buttons to choose the voltage to assign to Set Point 2 Pressing and holding the SW1 button causes the output voltage to move in the positive direction pressing and holding the SW2 button causes the output voltage to move in the negative direction If either button is held for more than five seconds the output voltage will begin to change more quickly Release the button when the desired output voltage is displayed on the digital volt meter For testing purposes this step may be skipped completely To complete the setup for Set Point 2 press and release both buttons simultaneously Move magnet while looking at the output voltage If output voltage changes program has been locked in suc cessfully If output voltage does not change put magnet back to the setpoint position and press both buttons simultaneously If the transducer was previously programmed it will resume operation with the new voltage assigned to Set Point 2 8 Installing the Analog Output Module AOM Dimensions of the AOM are shown below in Figure 8 1 The mounting hole dimensions shown are also stamped on the back of the module Mount the AOM as shown using two socket head cap screws P Shown with Cover Removed TB1 MEMANEN sa EREERE Reger 0 24 in 6 1 mm el M3
28. 1 GND BROWN NAN 2 J FRAME FARTH FARTH FARTH BROWN Zi 2 FRAME GRAY 3 CATE OUT GATE OUT GATE OUT GRAY 3 CATE OUI PINK NAN 4 G GATE OUT GATE OUT GATE OUT PINK Tus 4 GATE OUT RED 5 H vec 15V VCC 15V VCC 15V VCC 15V RED XX 3 XGA av BLUE NS 6 B VEE 15V VEE 15V VEE 15V VEE 15V BLUE 6 VEE 15V BLACK 7 A AMP RETURN E AMP RET GND BLACK 7 AMP RETURN KK Jott eC SE VIOLET 8 F AMP OUTPUT i AMP OUTPUT YELLOW 9 INTRG YELLOW _ 9 E INTRG INTRG INTRG GREEN lt N 10 INTRG GREEN ANAA 10 D INTRG INTRG INTRG DETAII DRAIN WIRE SHIELD WRE Y DRAIN WIRE SHIELD WIRE J EARTH EARTH EARTH STRIPPING AND DRESSING FOR 1 AND 2 CONFIGURATIONS UNDER NO CONDITION WILL AND INTERROGATION BE CONNECTED AT THE SAME TIME THE UNUSED INTERROGATION LEAD MUST BE CONNECTED TO DC GROUND TABLE 6 C 6 PIN 1 2 5 6 CABLE CONFIGURATIONS FROM TO WAVEGUIDE APM NPM TWIST LOCK COUPLER RC I WIRE PAIRS p p DRV AMP BD INT MODE EXT MODE OPTIONAL P1 P2 P2 1 WHITE B GND CHE ENG A 8 13 96 BKT ABSORBED 250733 INTO APD SYSTEM H BROWN gt 2 B FRAME EARTH EARTH REV DATE BY DESCRIPTION GRAY 3 B GATE OUT DISPL RET GND REVISIONS b lgl PINK aa 4 A GATE OUT DISPL OUT MATERIAL DRAWN DATE RED Ay 5 F VCC 15V VCC 15V VCC 15
29. AE DEAD w ZONE ra AGNET 1 AGNE 2 9 POSITION 2 POSITION 1 STROKE 1 NULL 4i CHANNEL 1 di CHANNEL 1 MAGNET 1 1 IN IN NULL 1 STROKE 1 2 OUTPUT TO VDC OR mA POSITION 1 POSITION 2 CHANNEL 2 MAGNET 2 1 IN IN NULL 2 STROKE 2 2 OUTPUT TO VDC OR mA POSITION 1 POSITION 2 LIMITATIONS 1 A minimum of 3 inc 2 Output limits are 0 reverse acting O to 3 Both outputs must be of common typy eit o 10 VDC reverse acti Z0 mA grounded reve rse acting her VDC or mA ng 4 to 20 mA grounded es of spacing must be mainained between magnets MIS SENSORS DIVISION CARY NORTH CAROLINA A DRAWING NUMBER DATE SIZE APD 0031 9 23 97 SHEET 1 OF 1 REVISION C RIGINATOR SM Cross Reff AP1 0010 DUAL CHANNEL SYSTEM TEMPO III RH ROD STYLE P POSITION A POSIT
30. AVE BAKER SUBJECT WIRING CONFIGURATION FOR WITH EXTERNAL FOR VELOCITY KI XY A Tei ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE VOLTAGE REQUIREMENTS PIN 2 PIN 7 PIN 8 PIN 6 PIN 9 PIN 5 DO pm SPECIFICATIONS ENCLOSURE STYL t 6 amp 10 PIN MS CONNECTORS DISPLACEMENT 0 TO 10 VDC VELOCITY OUTP OUTPUT UT ES C 1 596 VDC MINIMUM 1 S MAXIMUN 10 SEC 15 96 VDC FORWARD ACTING POWER REQUIREMENTS FI 4 VDC 15 VDC amp 2 CUSTOMER SUPPLIED TON E K CARY NORTH CAROLINA SHEET 1 OF 1 BLU WHI RED a yY at BON TA CH e D sensors Division ET FROM TEMPOS STRIPED COLOR PIN 1 WHITE BLUE STRIPE 2 BLUE WHITE STRIPE WHITE BROWN STRIP BROWN WHITE STRIP GREEN WHITE STRIP WHITE GRAT STRIPE WHITE GREEN STRIPE GRE BLACK DC COMMON GND BROWN OR ORANGE RET ONICS H SOLID COLOR WHITE GROUND BROWN FRAME GN BLACK AMP GND VIOLET RET PULSE BLUE 15 VDC YELLOW INTERRO RED 12 VDC gt WI e O TEMPOSONICS II CONNECTIONS TO ANALOG OUTPUT MODULA AOM WITH 6 amp 10 PIN MILITARY STYLE MS CONNECTORS F 6 PIN CONNECTOR MS3102A 14S 6P A 15 VDC TB3 H B 15 VDC TB3 J C GROUND TB3 K D DISP OUT TB1 A
31. MTS m MTS Temposonics Linear Position Sensors Archive Manuals 1010101010101010 05208 801001010 1099 1010 10810 0 103 010001 ATE gree E00 10 0 Td SEL tf w 05 o UM bo4d e NUNG Wm ee L L L LU Lg ma mw L Lo LU L L L L L L L Weg Mgr me L L L LU L is Ey Lo 0 LI 8 e emm L n L Uu A LLL Ls RR m 1 DAD L_ LOLK Z AIBKIK eee 4 LAB e MTS maa Temposonics II Position Sensors Installation amp Instruction Manual 11 98 550055 Revision E GENERAL INFORMATION MTS PHONE NUMBERS Application questions 000 633 7609 Repair Service 000 248 0532 Fax 919 677 0200 SHIPPING ADDRESS MTS Systems Corporation sensors Division 3001 Sheldon Drive Cary North Carolina 27513 HOURS M onday Thursday 7 30 a m to 6 30 p m EST EDT Friday 7 30 a m to 5 00 p m EST EDT TABLE OF CONTENTS Section Page 1 INTRODUCTION 1 1 1 Theory of Operation Magnetostriction 1 1 2 Temposonics Il LDT Specifications for Sensors lt 180 inches 2 1 3 Temposonics Il LDT Specifications for Sensors gt 200 inches 2 2 TEMPOSONICS II LDT INSTALLATION 3 2 1 Types of Transducer Supports 5 2 1 1 Loop Supports 5 2 1 2 Channel Supports 6 2 4 3 Guide Pipe Supports
32. J VAS e J ko SIZE x 03 10 95 Z Ne RY NORTH CAROLINA SHEET 1 OF 1 REVISION A ORIGINATOR DAVE BAKER PIN CONDUCTOR ASSIGNMENTS WIRE PAIRS FROM P1 NEUT TO P COMPANY HUSKY PART 697576 WIRE PAIRS FROM P1 NEUTER TO P2 WHITE 1 GROUND B SUBJECT TEMPOSONICS II REPLACEMENT CABLE BROWN lt FRAME NOTE RETROFITTING THE SRH NEMA GRAY 3 N C N C ENCLOSURE PINK 1 N C N C RED B ICC F REF RETROFIT CABLE FOR AOM S BLUE 6 VEE 12 INCHES OR LESS BLACK 7 RET GND B VIOLET 8 RET OUT C ELLOW 9 NT B GREEN 10 INT p 2 00 IN 6 00 IN vq 5 20 IN FAN f Kee O Cex 697576 E
33. l l I a _ _ _ _ _ H 6 PIN INTERROGATION Ri ZC 2 CONFIGURATION SEE TABLE 3 amp 6 A Lg SEE DETAIL F 1 SEE TABLE 1 SEE DETAIL C 2 E Or P2 1 i T Of H E cu I ii o 1 E A E B E S _ L eH 5 10 PIN Q9 3 CONFIGURATION SEE TABLE 5 A NN in SEE SALES ORDER a 5 SEE DETAIL F 1 00 0 03 gt SEE DETAIL B SEE DETAIL C P2 TABLE 1 d CABLE CUT LENGTH E pe TABLE 1 LENGTH DEFINITIONS CABLE CABLE CUT LENGTH TL DASH NO INTERROGATION i 0 50 LENGTH A CABLE TERMINATION CABLE TERMINATION STYLE SEE DETAIL B PE
34. 1001 1001 1001 21 A second Digital Counter Card is required for all values requiring 18 bits or more 29 30 Table 61 below can be used to determine connections for Digital Counter Cards with BCD output To determine the applicable connections you must know the stroke length and resolution Subtract the resolution from the stroke length to obtain a maximum reading column 1 Refer to column 7 to deter mine the decimal equivalent of each digit knowing the desired decimal position An example is worked out on the following page Table 61 BCD Output Connections 1 2 3 5 6 7 Max No of Active Pin Connectors Binary Digit Check Appropriate Reading Active Bits Digits Weight Column Resolution CardA Card B other 8 1 1 7 2 LSD 14 4 0 000 0 001 0 01 1 T3 8 1 12 1 2 11 2 18 4 0 001 0 01 0 1 2 17 8 16 1 3 15 2 20 4 0 01 0 1 1 ggg 12 3 21 8 1999 13 3 1 4 22 1 4 3999 14 31 2 19 2 7999 15 3 3 4 zo 4 0 1 1 10 9999 16 4 25 8 19999 17 41 4 g 8 1 D 39999 18 41 2 7 2 79999 19 43 4 14 4 1 10 100 99999 20 5 13 8 199999 21 5 1 4 12 1 6 399999 22 5 1 2 11 2 MSD 799999 23 5 3 4 18 4 10 100 1000 999999 24 6 17 8 NOTES 1 LSD Least Significant Digit 2 MSD Most Significant Digit 3 Used ONLY with 4 1 4 digits For 4 1 2 digits or more a second Digital Counter Card is required 5th digit is on second card Example Stroke 200 in Resolution 0 001 in Results e Maximum Reading 199 99
35. 40to 180 F regardless of stroke Specifications are subject to change without notice Contact MTS for verification of specifications critical to your needs 2 1 General Section Il Service The Temposonics Brand Linear Displacement Measurement System does not require service under normal use The system is non contacting solid state and performance does not degrade age or drift over time Digital systems have a zero adjustment only They do not have any field adjustments for scale purposes The output is factory set during final calibration by selection of the counter card crystal frequency and zero pre set If a system configuration change requires a new resolution the system must be returned to the factory to perform the changes Alternatively receiver device software may be reprogrammed to adjust to the new settings in some cases If a system performance check is desired use the calibration procedure in Subsection 3 4 Section Ill Installation This section describes general installation procedures for the Digital Linear Displacement Transducer measurement system Specific installation procedures depend on the application The installation involves environmental considerations mechanical installation and electronic connections 3 1 Environmental Considerations The location of components is determined by the application requirements The following describe the environments suitable for the component configuration E
36. BY ECO DESCRIPTION UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED MATERIAL XX 01 MTS XXX 005 REESE ANGULAR 1 SYSTEMS CORPORATION REMOVE BURRS AND SHARP SENSORS DIVISION EDGES 015 MAX DIM LIMITS HELD AFTER PLATING OR CONVERSION COATING DRILL DEPTHS ARE TO FULL DIAMETER ELCON INC MB4 2 18 DC SUPPLY 31 8 1039 00955 35 NOTES 1 FACTORY MUTUAL RESEARCH CORPORATION APPROVED FOR INTRINSICALLY SAFE CLASS 1 DIVISION 1 GROUPS A B C D USE GENERAL PURPOSE ENCLOSURES MEETING THE REQUIREMENTS OF ANSI IS 82 IN A HAZARDOUS OR CLASS 1 DIVISION 2 GROUPS A B C AND D HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS USE FMRC APPROVED OR NRTL LISTED DUST IGNITION PROOF ENCLOSURE FOR ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION IN CLASS Il DMSON 2 GROUPS E F AND G AND CLASS Ill DMSON HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS 2 ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT CONNECTED TO ASSOCIATED APPARATUS MUST NOT USE OR GENERATE MORE THAN 250 VOLTS RMS CABLE SETS THAT ARE RUN TOGETHER MUST HAVE SUFFICIENT INSULATION TO WITHSTAND 250 VRMS BETWEEN SETS 3 INSTALLATION DRAWING SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE ANSI IS 70 ARTICLE 504 4 THE INTRINSICALLY SAFE FIELD WIRING SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE ANSI IS 70 AND LOCAL CODES 5 RECEIVE TRANSMIT CABLES CONNECTED TO THE BARRIERS SHALL BE LOW CAPACITY CABLES OF 14 pF OR LESS FOOT REFERENCE BELDEN 9730 UL 2493 FOR LENGTHS OF 40 TO 200 FEET WIRE GAUGE SHALL BE 24 AWG OR HEAMER 6 WH
37. Cables up to 20 ft 6 meters can be fabricated with any high quality multiconductor cable with an overall shield Belden equivalent The recommended cable for 20 ft 6 meters to 100 ft 30 meters is Belden 9931 or Belden 83506 teflon or equivalents Cable lengths of 50 to 100 ft 15 to 30 meters may need impedance matching Consult the Sensors Division of MTS if operational problems are encountered The recommended cable for 100 to 250 ft 30 to 75 meters is Belden 9730 or equivalent The transducer assembly mus include the optional cable driver for this cable range NOTE The blue cover of the transducer assembly is at circuit ground and should not be grounded locally Wiring Take the following steps to connect J2 NS Interrogation Pulse te E 11 5 VDC to 12 VDC Red F 15 VDC Green A DC COMMON Black B Return Pulse Orange Brown CG It is recommended that you apply an earth ground to the transducer rod This is typically accomplished by mounting the transducer head to a bracket or machine Strain Rellef Only If necessary fabricate the J2 cable and prepare the cable as described earlier Identify the connections to TB2 Refer to Figure 4 4 for the J2 connections NOTE Ensure the solder connections are clean and free of excessive solder Use heat shrink over the solder connections to prevent the pins from shorting MS Connector Only If necessary fabricate the J2 cable
38. Cross Reff AP1 0005 FU D DN UPTA RENTIA Ji 300 0 OUTPUT MTS ER MINI MAXIMUM DIFF MAX MUM 10VDC UM ENTIAL MIN Ww Ad ter use Start THE SPECIFICATIONS 1 ORDERING DIFFERENTI EN OP KZ A TION 1 AT 2 9 8 SPACE IN INCHES OVDC Q4 Stop ERENTIAL out of transduc ev NULL DEAD SPACE MIN DIFF IN I MAX DIFF IN I IN INCHES NCHES NCHES OUTPUT RANGES VOLTAGE ON fix m if using AOM Wolk CG ry Al La U L H J NOTES 1 MINIMUM AND MAXIMUM DII ACTIVE STROKE OF THE TRA ENTIAL CAN OC UCER 2 MINIMUM AND MAXIMUM DIFFEREN CUR ANYWHERE TIAL ARE ADJUSTABLE APP ID ROXIMATELY ALONG THE 276 Rev B Corrected spelling added set to 2 5 dead space amp note 1 amp AOM to output MBER DRAWING NU SENSORS DIVISION CARY NORTH CAROLINA SIZE SHEE JATE a 59 9 23 97 ORIGINATOR DDI Cross Reff AP1 0006 ORDERING PARAMETERS FOR ANALOG DIGITAL SYSTEMS KING USED IN SYSTEM CJ CHECK O
39. DRAIN WIRE SHIELD WIRE gt JUNCTION 00 x CUT BRAID SHIELD AT ITEM 10 1 50 LONG WIRE JUNCTION P2 B _ THIS LOCATION ee 5 00 NOTE FOR WIRING OF NON RETROFIT CABLES THE POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGES ARE NOMINALLY 12V TO 15V 0 25 4 i ABLE 3 R2 C2 Ne 2 CONFIGURATION 6 PIN NEGATIVE INTERROGATION AOM DIB RETROFIT WIRING DRAIN WIRE WAVEGUIDE npn DIMENSIONS FOR DETAIL EF DETAIL D WIRE PAIRS amp WIRES FROM TO DRV AMP BD o L 0 06 M 0 03 P1 STRIPPING FOR 4 CONFIGURATION WHITE SN P1 1 JUNCTION 1 00 0 25 GND BROWN a P1 2 JUNCTION 1 00 0 25 FRAME GRAY Bos UNASSIGNED 1 00 P1 7 00 CUT BRAID SHIELD AT L PINK 4 UNASSIGNED THIS LOCATION RED d Rn P1 5 P2 F 1 00 0 25 VCC 12V BLUE P1 6 P2 D 1 00 0 25 VEE 15V BLACK s lt Pic JUNCTION 1 00 0 25 AMP RETURN VIOLET NAN P1 8 P2 C 1 00 0 25 AMP OUTPUT YELLOW P1 9 JUNCTION 1 00 0 25 INTRG GREEN gt Pi 10 P2 E 1 00 0 25 INTRG A E ES E x DRAIN WIRE SHIELD WIRE i JUNCTION 00 ITEM 10 1 50 LONG WIRE JUNCTION P2 B m JUNCTION NOTE FOR WIRING OF NON RFTROFIT CABLES THE POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGES ARE NOMINALLY 12V TO 15V SEE NOTE 2 TABLE 3B RS SOS REF O PIN TABLE 4 RO PO 3 CABLE CONFIGURATIONS WIRE PAIRS ROM TO DRV AMP BD EXT MODE INT MODE EXT MODE FROM WAVEGUIDE TO P1 P2 P1 P2 P2 P2 uL p1 EO ee WHITE 1 A GND GND GND GND WHTE
40. Digital Interface Box DIB wassw C C OO CI LI TRANSDUCER Frese degets Of transducer code As fit voc and JFF to IT Stanaaedi 44 lt till VG pd 40 to 1807 4 e z 1 voc and 407 to 18077 43 s Int ke PCE 41 Unwell t 1 VOC 46 s Unewersal interface PCB aja tilvecand JSF to 1507 XX owa MAXIMUM UPOATE TIME MSEC 0 s 13 1223 1 90 e 35 4210 INTERROGATION Q e internal Standard 1 External RECRCULATIONS el 122 1 4 Jet ENVIRONMENTAL 0 e Standard I Ac rb Bew ert 2 Conformal Coat Digital Counter Card Series 60 Mose JL O O DUU TRANSDUCER fora B Git of tramducer code OUTPUT FORMAT 60 Natural brary 1200 CO J dps 12 ts 6 Natura brary 13 bt TT ae BCO din 4 ot 62 Natura rary 14 bp 7 UCO 4 deti 16 3 two cores Gur 1 6 lt Matura nary 1 Pap 7 BCD 4 d grty 18 0 twO carm requred Gi Natura brary 16 xG 74 HD 5 hqrty 20 xt two core r equered 65 Matura brary 17 bp Ju lt 8CO MTS to comoiete code 6 Mature nnwr 18 Pen NX Other Comit MTI Semors Ov von 67 Matur M lpnwY 19 bia two mh rw ur d amp X mw Matura racy MTS to comosete code ORIENTATION D lt forward count Standard I Aeverve court DATA VALIDATION Q Mxrosecone latch pulse 3taedaed I 12 Mecrosecord latch puhe Latch wayt nout Cs loroa Comet MTS temon Oron RESOLUTION SC
41. Displacement Output TB1 A Displacement Output The connections to TB3 represent wiring for a typical system configuration i e 15 Vdc power supply and strain relief connectors If the AOM is configured with other options i e 24 Vdc power supply velocity output MS connectors refer to sections 10 3 and 10 4 for proper wiring Figure 10 5 AOM J1 and J2 Connections Table 10J AOM J2 Connections J2 Connection TB 2 A F or J2 Pin A F Pin Connection Terminal Block Connection Wire Color Code Wire Color Code Function J2 Pin A TB2 A Not Used Not Used No Connection J2 Pin B TB2 B White Blue Stripe White DC Common GND Blue White Stripe Brown Frame White Brown Stripe Black Gray White Stripe Green J2 Pin e TB2 C Brown White Stripe Violet Output Pulse J2 Pin D TB2 D Green White Stripe Blue 15 Vdc 13 5 to 14 5 Vdc J2 Pin E TB2 E White Gray Stripe Yellow Interrogation Pulse J2 Pin F see note 1 TB2 F White Green Stripe Red 112 Vdc Verify if the cable has striped or solid color leads and make connections accordingly NOTES 1 Connect to TB2 Pin A if the stoke length exceeds 180 inches 4 Strain Relief Only Connect the cable to the TB2 terminals on the AOM and to the transducer 5 MS Connector Only Connect the cable to the J2 connector on the AOM and to the transducer 6 Apply power and check the displacement readings at the system electronics 30 Table 10K Retrofit Connections T
42. Figure 2 6 Guide Pipe Support e The outside diameter of the pipe must be small enough to clear the magnet Refer to pipe manufacturers specifications and dimensions schedule 10 40 etc to select the appropriate size pipe Guide pipe is typically supported at each end of the pipe 2 2 Open Magnets When using an open magnet make sure the rod is positioned at all times within the active zone of the magnet The transducer cannot operate properly unless the entire stroke of the transducer rod is located within this zone The active zone as shown in Figure 2 7 lies within the inside diameter of the magnet Figure 2 7 Active Zone for Open Magnets 2 3 Spring Loading or Tensioning The transducer rod flexible or rigid can be spring loaded or tensioned using a stationary weight Attach a spring mechanism or weight to the dead zone of the transducer rod with a clamping device which will not deform the transducer rod The maximum weight or spring tension is 5 to 7 lbs 2 4 Cylinder Installation lt Dead Zone 7 2 50 in 63 5 mm Null as specified for stroke lengths Minimum 2 in 50mm up to 179 9 in Active Stroke __________ _ gt 3 in 76 2 mm for stroke lengths gt 180 in Minimum 5 in 127 mm v gt gt gt s gt gt s NE O ring MS 28778 8 or equivalent 2 Part No 560315 Nylok Insert 6 an NON ferrous Spacer Part No 400633 Mag
43. Figure 9 1 next page shows the location of position adjustments and terminal boards on the AOM NOTE Null adjustment has an overall effect on total scale adjustment However scale adjustment has no effect on null adjustment 9 2 Null and Full Scale Adjustments The following procedures calibrate the null position and the full scale position to the required output levels Refer to Figure 9 1 for the adjustment locations NOTE The following procedure assumes the standard full scale O to 10 Vdc output is supplied When other output signals are supplied use the appropriate signal levels and test equipment for the following adjustments Null Adjustment R20 Scale Adjustment R24 Figure 9 1 Location of Null amp Scale Adjustments and Terminal Boards on tbe AOM 1 Disconnect all power from the system Loosen the four screws securing the AOM cover and remove the cover 2 Note the location of terminal board TB1 on the AOM Refer to Figure 9 1 Connect a DVM digital voltmeter across pins A and B of terminal board TB1 to monitor the displacement signal Apply power to the system 3 Position the permanent magnet at the specified null position The null position is specified when the LDT assembly is ordered typically 2 inches from the transducer head 4 Use a screwdriver to adjust the null potentiometer R20 to increase or decrease the value until you obtain a DVM reading of 0 000 Vdc
44. Ground Pin 1 DC Common Pin 2 4 5 Vdc Pin 3 Latch Pulse COUNTER CARD Pin 4 Gate Pulse Pin 5 Gate Pulse Pin 6 No Connection Pin 7 Pin 8 Pin 9 Pin 10 Pin 24 Latch Inhibit gt Pin 25 NOTES t is common practice to apply earth ground to power supply terminals near power supply Jumpers W 20 and W 22 make P1 Pin 24 inhibit and P1 Pin 3 latch pulse Jumpers W 21 and W 23 make P1 Pin 24 latch pulse and P1 Pin 3 inhibit Figure D 5 Signal and Power Wiring Digital Systems 55 IMPORTANT NOTE The MTS Customer Service Department should be consulted before attempting any repairs in the field Failure to con sult MTS will void the warranty D 5 Digital Interface Box DIB 1 56 Turn power OFF Disconnect transducer from DIB Turn power ON Check the following voltages on Pin B Gnd on J2 6 pin of the DIB Pin A 12 to 15 Vdc Pin D 13 5 to 15 Vdc Pin F 11 5 to 12 Vdc If any voltage is missing or is not within specification send the DIB to the factory for repair If voltages are correct go to Step 4 With power on use an oscilloscope to check the interrogation signal to the transducer on J2 Pin E on the DIB If no signal is present send the box to the factory for repair If the signal looks like the exam ple below go to step 5 lus Ay 5 Positive Pulse Transducer Negative Pulse Transducer IT Figure D 4 Interrogation Sign
45. Lm formula to convert inches to millimeters Circulation Count N Inches x 25 4 1 Hold the programming switch in Position 2 until the ZERO LED begins to flash 3 sec SETUP The MK292 is now ready to accept the next parameter Null Adjust CZERO 19 20 7 6 ZERO Null Adjust Green LED ded Null adjust allows you to set the mechanical ZERO position anywhere within the active measuring range of the position sensor Move the sensor magnet to the desired ZERO position and proceed as follows 1 Hold the programming switch in Position 2 until the ZERO LED begins to flash 3 sec ADJUST The displacement output indicates position without the offset calculation 2 Set switches S1 S6 to ZERO position 1 Hold the programming switch in Position 2 to restart programming sequence 3 sec SET UP NOTE If a set value is overwritten the programming mode has to be set again by repeatedly tapping the dip switch to position 1 ZERO Offset As an alternative to the ZERO NULL adjust a ZERO NULL offset can be programmed within a range of 49 9999 to 49 9999 inches The value depends on the pre set reso lution of the position sensor The offset is set by using S6 only Positive Offset Negative Offset 0 0 5 0 1241 6 2 42 7 2 3 43 8 3 4 44 9 4 Forward Acting Positive offset counts down when magnet is moved to the head and counts up when moved to the tip Rev
46. Pin No Color Code Color Code Neuter DPM Option RPM Option Striped Leads Solid Leads 1 White Blue Stripe White DC Ground DC Ground DC Ground 7 Blue White Stripe Brown Frame Frame Frame 3 White Orange Stripe Gray Gate Start Stop Pulse 4 Orange White Stripe Pink Gate Start Stop Pulse B White Green Stripe Red VCC VCC VCC 6 Green White Stripe Blue VEE VEE VEE 7 White Brown Stripe Black Not Used Not Used Not Used 9 Brown White Stripe Violet Not Used Not Used Not Used 9 White Gray Stripe Yellow Interrogation Interrogation Interrogation Note 3 Notes 4 5 Note 5 10 Gray White Stripe Green Interrogation Interrogation Interrogation Note 3 Notes 4 5 Note 5 Notes 1 Verify if the cable has striped or solid color leads and make connections accordingly 2 Cable Belden YR8105 or equivalent 3 IMPORTANT Connect the unused interrogation lead to ground 4 Connect both positive and negative interrogation leads to ground when using a DPM programmed for internal interrogation 5 When using external interrogation connect both the positive and negative interrogation leads to provide differential interrogation Use Table 6B below when 1 Replacing an original Temposonics transducer connected to a Digital Interface Box with a Temposonics II transducer 2 Replacing an original Temposonics transducer and a Digital Interface Box with a Temposonics II trans ducer and integrated D
47. Umin 2 5 2 20 01086 4 1 064 ms c he programming table shows that the closest update time greater than or equal to Umin corresponding to N 4 is 2 00 ms and SW3 1 d Verifying the update time from Step 2 the exact update time is Update Time 4 1 1 1 0 2 ms 2 ms Switch Settings Table 1 L 1 Resolution vs Recirculations w 27 28 MHz Crystal l Resolution Recirculation L 0 004 I EJ oun 0 002 2 0 001 4 EJ SW2 0 0005 8 EJ 0 00025 16 0 000125 32 SW3 Figure 3 Switch Locations Table 2 Recirculation Switch Settings Internal Interrogation External Interrogation SW2 SW1 Recirculation SW2 SW1 0 1 1 8 1 0 2 2 8 2 0 4 4 8 4 0 8 8 8 8 1 0 16 9 0 2 0 27 A 0 4 0 64 C 0 7 F 127 F F a MTS SYSTEMS CORPORATION MTS sensors Division 3001 Sheldon Drive Cary North Carolina 27513 Phone 800 633 7609 Fax 919 677 0200 05 94 550093 REVISION B 5 PAGES 3 S x pOuduidp wdp shid o C esl NIN Ol ololojofon AALS A mmp CD Ti Ti 3 D ech wesch C IN cO N Ig REE sist sal e o ololo olo olo o NIN IN NISN IN cO co O Co AJIN MIO olo O o sesch L L L sul Z 6AWS L N 2 w ololo lwolol lolol lwo oleoloo I lolo oOo No RI oloo jojo ojo Jjolo d o Pl L G
48. if used Reading in Decimal From BCD Indicator if used C Complement Subtract B from 9 Converted to BCD Convert C to BCD If a second Counter Card is provided required for 5 or 6 digit BCD use the following table in addition to the table above Digit Bit Pin No A Reading in BCD B Reading in Decimal C Complement D Converted to BCD CLOSED OPEN CLOSED OPEN COUNTER Figure 6 5 Setting DIP Switches BCD System 6 6 2 Scaling Digital Counter Cards 1 Scaling is not normally required for digital counter cards because most digital systems are sup plied as scaled systems Refer to the earlier Subsection 6 4 1 page 18 for a discussion of scaling Scaling is required for systems supplied as unscaled systems or if the counter card is not matched to the transducer serial number Scaled systems will have a discrete scale factor such as 0 001 inches per count and do not require scale factor determination To determine the scale factor or to check system performance move the magnet to a known measured position on the transducer near full stroke Observe the output and record it The scale factor is determined by dividing the measurement by the observed number of counts or the observed output in BCD As an example Measurem
49. 3 HOW TO ORDER SYSTEM COMPONENTS 3 1 Temposonics Intrinsically Safe Position Sensor 16 T LILILILI Enclosure Style 1 Standard dust tight similar to NEMA 1 2 Ruggedized dust tight similar to NEMA 1 3 Ruggedized splash proof similar to NEMA 4 Stroke Length Units U U S Customary inches and tenth xxx x inches M Metric millimeters Stroke Length The value to enter depends on stroke length units indicated above For example 0120 212 0 inches or 120 mm 1200 120 0 inches or 1200 mm Null Dead Space 5 5 in dead space 2 in null standard for strokes up to 200 inches 7 7 in dead space 2 in null standard for strokes over 200 inches 9 Special must be specified at time of order Cable Connector See IMPORTANT NOTE below 1 5 ft cable with standard 6 pin connector for use with Enclosure Style 1 2 5 ft cable with pigtail connection for use with Enclosure Style 1 3 No cable extension cable required connector attached directly to head assembly for use with Enclosure Styles 2 or 3 4 25 ft cable with standard 6 pin connector for use with Enclosure Style 1 IMPORTANT NOTE Consult Applications Engineering for any installation with cable lengths that exceed 200 feet of total distance between the position sensor and the external conditioning module analog or digital 3 2 Extension Cables Cable Type rsLI LI L E S Standard Belden 9931 H
50. Connector Pin Belden 9931 Belden 9730 Functional standard heavy duty Description A Red Red 26 V H Black Black Common twisted with Red wire Brown Green Return Pulse Blue Black Common twisted with Green wire E White White Interrogation Pulse F Green Black Common twisted with White wire 3 3 Analog Output Module for Intrinsically Safe Systems Position Sensor Code Enclosure Style e 31 Standard Strain relief Connectors 32 5 amp 6 Pin MS Style Connectors 35 Plug in Card rack mountable Note Style 35 requires a 15 pin edge connector P N 370034 or card holder P N 370170 Displacement Output Voltage Outputs 10 0 to 10 Vdc 20 0 to 10 Vdc reverse acting 50 10 to 10 Vdc 60 10 to 10 Vdc reverse acting 01 0 to 10 Vdc 02 0 to 10 Vdc reverse acting Intrinsically Safe Sensor Current Outputs 03 4 to 20 mA ungrounded 04 4 to 20 mA ungrounded reverse acting 05 4 to 20 mA grounded 06 4 to 20 mA grounded reverse acting Style 1 Standard dust tight similar to NEMA 1 2 Ruggedized dust tight similar to NEMA 1 3 Ruggedized splashproof similar to NEMA 4 Unit of Measurement U US Customary inches and tenths M Metric millimeters Special Outputs 09 Dual Channel 90 Differential Output Stroke Length DC Power Supply Requirement y onini _ Stoke Length 0 15 V
51. Gradientinput Available on front of panel Whichever i5 greater 3 INSTALLATION KIT Each TDU Model TDU100 is provided with an installation kit for mounting Installation kits includes Mounting brackets and screws Part No 560488 Front panel gasket Part No 560496 The TDU comes complete with mounting brackets screws and gasket these items may also be ordered separately Accessories that can be ordered separately at additional cost are as follows NEMA 4 Environmental Enclosure Part No 251188 20 Vdc Power Supply Part No 380045 15 Vdc Power Supply Part No 380017 4 SCALING THE OUTPUT The output is selectable via dip switch settings to provide an output scaled for inches millimeters centimeters or meters There are four dip switches positioned as indicated in Figure 1 To gain access to these switches you must pull off the J and J2 terminal blocks and remove the rear cover that is held in place by 4 screws Position the switches as indicated in the table below to set the desired scaling Replace the rear cover and the J and J2 terminal blocks immediately after setting scaling to prevent any foreign debris from entering the enclosure and potentially interfering with the performance of the TDU Inches default When SW is OFF the Gradient Mode and Zero functions are disabled SW4 is reserved for future use 5 WIRING Wiring from the transducer terminates at the TDU on termin
52. INSTALLING AN ANALOG PERSONALITY MODULE APM CAUTION The APM is a static sensitive device and should be treated as such MTS recommends a static wrist wrap be worn during installation and that these procedures are conducted in a clean environment 1 Place the transducer hex in a vise 2 Unscrew the cover using hand pressure only Note that cover has right hand threads A specially designed cover wrench is available from MTS CAUTION Hands must be clean Ensure that no foreign NEN material contacts the inside components To assure full coverage under warranty and error free future replication orders install this label as instructed in Step 9 3 Once the cover is removed clean the inner threads of the cover and bracket with a lint free cloth Spray ONLY the cover threads with Sherwin Williams number 00217 Teflon spray 4 Remove APM from the static sensitive bag by holding the module by its edges being careful that the plastic does not contact the transducer mechanism The old coil block design has a key that can interfere with a new APM If an APM is being installed on a transducer with the old coil block design be sure to cut off the key before installing the new APM as indicated in the drawing below Refer to the programming procedures on the next page if the APM needs to be reprogrammed Figure 1 Key to be cut off 2 KN E Man E Exacto knife or side cutting wire cutters ane Le Th
53. If these signals are not present go to the next step 10 Disconnect power and isolate J2 pin C return pulse from the DIB Connect the oscilloscope to pin C on the transducer side and restore the power The signals should look like Figure D 5 If not send the transducer to MTS Sensors for repair D 5 Counter Card Digital Output Test Procedure The Counter Card output 14 18 bits typical is a true high TTL level signal nominal 0 to 5 volts DC The receiver device must be selected to interface with the TTL level signal of the Counter Card Most devices offer a TTL input option or a specific model selection designed for TTL only If the user suspects an improperly selected or malfunctioning receiver device the Counter Card output may be tested using LEDs Perform the following procedure 1 Disconnect the receiver device from the binary output of the Counter Card This is usually performed at the receiver device input terminals 2 Connect 4 or more LEDs rated for 3 5 Vdc 50 mA maximum between the binary output and power supply ground as shown in Figure 9 1 Select the bits or digit which will give a reading which is easi ly interpreted Four of the middle bits for natural binary tenths or units place for BCD The LEDs light when the bit is high Note that output voltage will drop under load refer to a TTL data book for details 3 With the above test set up procedure some of the LEDs should light imme
54. J1 Connections Strain Relief Velocity Output C Velocity Output B Displacement Output A Displacement Output Figure 4 3 J1 Connections Velocity Output Strain Relief Wiring Table 4 1 Votage Output J1 Connections MS Connector Description 15 Vdc 15 Vde DC Common Displacement Optional output signals Ise width modulated signal as second output Table 4 2 Ungrounded 4 20 mA Current Output J1 Connections MS Connector A B C D E Do not ground or damage may result Maximum load resistance 400 Q 15 Vde 15 Vdc DC Common Current Output source Current Output return Table 4 3 Grounded 4 20 mA Current Output J1 Connections MS Connector 15 Vdc 15 Vdc DC Common and Current return Current source not connected Maximum load resistance 500 1 Wiring The input to the receiver electronics should be a passive resistive device to prevent damage to the AOM 6 First make sure there is no voltage present on the receiving device input connections Then complete the cable connections to the receiving device NOTE Do not route the J1 cable near high voltage sources J2 Connections Strain Relief Only Connect the cable to the TB1 and TB3 terminals on the AOM MS Connector Only Connect the cable to the J1 connector on the AOM The J2 cable provides connections between the AOM and the Iransducer assembly
55. Ju i P L k Null CN 3 gt Cl Z E S 33 T C or Smrm 0 1 or 5mm crements increments actr CCl S cal CQ one di inches second check one second Notes Engineeri 2 7 IO a I5 TS nce yr or MIS Personnel Only Null Additiona Magnet Dead Additiona Total Tube Stroke Zone Dead Zone engtn s J cO DRAWING NUMBER DATE AP D 00427 SHEE 4 ON SN x Ns ERIS REVISION PY KLP J d LVAD YK VAL 1 d H EEARCH TRIANGLE PARK NOR to WSS TS oo E 60 J utilizing dual magnet J J NAA CT lO ust Y f om q lt z with Tempo VV IL Magnet SYSTEM Magnet N j al o oc S Eye P ra Null 2 _ 2 d tpoint net IC vag ss il S i y CO F lO N Y H hM f ff Ff J A f JIN S S 7 LM LU IXI UU IVA IIULIN N SO Y f r C VO UZ RS SEARCH TRIANGLE DIVISIO a PARK NOR CAROLINA V IcT a 27709 All null and stroke measurements must be in increments of 0 1 or 5mm Stroke L Dead o SS 7 2 6 For onger D Zones please contact A
56. MK 292 lo 62 19 Rack Mountable Module o 170 mm 30 2 mm pe MK 292 19 Card Figure 3 4 MK 292 Module Dimensions 4 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION 4 1 Installing a Temposonics Position Sensor Before beginning installation be sure you know the following dimensions as illustrated in Figures 4 1 to 4 3 e Null Space e Stroke e Dead Zone R uggedized Enclosure Styles 2 and 3 1 75 in Hex across flats 34 l6Thread 300 D Stainless Steel Rod Z End Pg 2 5 in Standard Enclosure 0 44 in O D 63 4 mm Style 1 J P Dead 3 875 in 98 42 mm Null Active Stroke Zone 6 25 in 158 8 mm Length specified by customer Figure 4 1 lemposonics Intrinsically Safe Position Sensor Dimension 1 Use the 3 4 inch 19 mm 16 UNF thread of the position sensor to mount it at the selected location Leave room to access the hex head If a pressure or moisture seal is required install an O ring type MS 28778 8 is recommended in the special groove Use the hex head to tighten the position sensor assembly 2 Install the permanent magnet over the sensor rod Mount the permanent magnet to the movable device whose displacement will be measured To minimize the effect of magnetic materials i e iron steel etc on the magnetic field of the permanent magnet ensure the minimum spacing requirements are met as sh
57. NULL Null length in inches STROKE Stroke length in inches 1 to 300 inches N Number of recirculations 1 Select from Table 3B the switch setting for SW3 that yields the closest update time greater or equal to Umin 2 Verify the exact update time of the transducer with the following formula FORMULA 2 U N 1 x SW3 1 x 0 2 ms where N Number of recirculations SW3 Switch setting in decimal B 3 Example Given e Null 2 in e Stroke Length 20 in e Resolution 0 001 in Solution 1 From Table 1B the corresponding resolution to number of recirculations is N 4 2 The minimum required update time using Formula 1 previous page is Umin 2 5 2 20 x 01086 x 4 1 064 ms 3 Table 3B shows that the closest update time greater or equal to Umin corresponding to N 4 is 2 00 ms therefore SW3 z 1 4 The exact update time using Formula 2 previous page Is U 4 1 x 141 x 2ms 2ms 4 Table 3B SW 3 Setting Update Time as a Function of Stroke and Recirculation Internal Interrogation Only Recirculations SW3 Setting according to stroke length in inches 1 32 32 1 65 65 1 102 102 1 135 135 1 175 175 1 215 215 1 250 250 1 290 290 1 300 1 0 1 2 3 4 B 6 7 8 2 1 2 3 8 6 I d A B 4 1 3 4 6 d J B C E 8 1 3 9 6 8 A C E F 16 1 3 5 d B D F F 32 1 J 0 g B E F F 64 1 5 7 g B D F F 127 1 9 D 7 d B D F F APPENDIX C Modifications to the Digital I
58. Pin No co oo o J O1 5 Cc5o 0 NOTES 1 2 3 4 Verify if the cable has striped or solid color leads and make connections accordingly Temposonics ll Integrated or Extension Cable see Note 1 Wire Color Code White Blue Stripe Blue White Stripe White Orange Stripe Orange White Stripe White Green Stripe Green White Stripe White Brown Stripe Brown White Stripe White Gray Stripe Gray White Stripe Wire Color Code White Brown Gray Pink Red Blue Black Violet Yellow Green 1 to 4 microseconds maximum pulse duration WARNING Under no condition should both the positive and negative interrogation leads be connected at the same time when using the NEUTER version Temposonics II transducer The unused interrogation lead must be connected to DC ground Temposonics Il w APM requires 13 5 to 15 Vdc All others require 12 Vdc to 15 Vdc Table 3B Connections Original Temposonics Transducer Original Temposonics Wire Color Code Temposonics Il Configurations e Neuter No Personality Module e APM Analog Personality Module Neuter DC Ground Frame Not Used Not Used VOC Vde Output Pulse Return Output Pulse Interrogation Notes 2 3 Interrogation Notes 2 3 Temposonics II 10 Pin Connector connections styles RB or RC Signal Function Connector Pin Number A mim J o Green or Gray 15 Vdc Black DC Ground Orange or Brown R
59. REC MR ZERO e SC BCD Switches l5 y x ET Programming Switch Figure 5 2 Figure 5 3 Front Panel of MK292 Module BCD Switch e LEDs There are six LEDs one red and five green which give visual indication of the operating condition and programming mode of the MK292 RED continuous light System in operation mode RED flashing light Transition to programming mode GREEN continuous light Indication of selected parameter GREEN flashing light Programming mode is activated parameter settings can be changed via BCD switches S1 S6 5 GREEN fast flashing light Input error Oo NO HR 13 6 Short Form Programming Procedure e Programming Mode Hold the programming switch in Position 1 see Fig 6 1 until the RUN LED begins to flash 3 sec Programming Mode is set up e Selection of System Parameters To select desired parameter momentarily toggle the programming switch to Position 1 and release an LED will light Repeat until the LED is lit next to desired parameter NOTE You may cycle through and check the parameters by observing the controller display as you repeatedly put the programming switch in Position 1 To change a parameter Select desired parameter then simply hold the programming switch in Position 2 until the LED flashes 3 sec Change parameter using the BCD switches e Parameter Adjustment Enter desired values using BCD switches S1 S6 S1 represe
60. T RECTION LSE WI TH ER TRROGATI AT FACT N ENTS ICER CARD RY FOR N AND MODULATION Is SET TO RY FOR A UNITS ARE BUILT AS SYSTEMS AND CANNOT BE SUBSTITUTED IN ANY W MK 292 CARD NEW MK 292 CARD p Sl JPPLY RE UIREMENTS 24 VDC FOR CAR D AND TI 9 TO 24 VDC FOR ADJUS HE INPUT LEVEL APPL HE OUTPUT LEV Eme EVEL OUTPUT T SPECIFIC STROKE LENGTH MEASURING DIRECTION UNIT CAN USE PULSE 1 INTERROGATION ONLY HITHER A RANSDUCER IBLE OUTPUTS ED DETERMINES BL EXAMPLE AN INPUT FP 5 VDC YOU WILL RECI HE CUSTOMER PROGRAMS THE UNIT VE A 5 VDC TIL FOR RESOLUTION AND START STOP OR l VIDTH MODULATION SET TO t AL COD SE CA WAY WIRING BY THE CUSTOMER DETERMINES THE OUTPUTS OF BINARY BDC OR GRAY CODE WIRING FOR BOTH UNITS IS TOTALLY DIFFERENT MOUNTING TA AND HARDWARE ARE NOT DIRECTLY COMPATIBLE Mis A APD 00 9 22 97 ENSORS DIVISION SIZE I ARY NORTH CAROLINA SHEET 1 OF 1 REVISION B ORIGINATOR DDB Cross Reff AP1 0004 page 1 of 1 DRAWING NO A 2007 revB APPLICATION NOTE ORIGINATOR LLJ MTS SENSORS DIVISION 3001 SHELDON DR CARY NORTH CAROLINA 27313 Subject ALLEN BRADLEY SERIES A REVISION D 0771 08 Ref Linear hydraulic Positioning Module e Allen Bradley 1771 QB module is a dua
61. dead zone Review the following considerations Each flexible transducer is custom manufactured for a specific application and installation The specific requirements which are determined before ordering include specific curvatures and straight sections at specific distances from the transducer head A flexible transducer should not be subjected to temperatures above 130 F 54 C unless specified The temperature of the transducer rod should n l vary more than 30 F 16 C unless specified A flexible transducer should not be subjected to pressures above atmospheric pressure A flexible transducer can be flexed or curved to a standard diameter of 36 in 91 cm during installation Consult MTS for specific applications A flexible transducer requires supports or anchonng to maintain the designed shape Transducer supports are described later in this section Some long transducers are ordered as flexible units to facilitate shipping and handling only even though they are for straight applications DO NOT attempt to install a flexible transducer without knowing the design installation dimensions Failure to follow the design dimensions can result in improper operation or transducer damage Mounting 1 in O D flange Install clamp here 1 in O D polypropylene fitting DO NOT LOOSEN Null Space as specified 3 in minimum 76 mm Stroke as specified Dead Zone 8 in minimum 203 m
62. is invalid and there is something WRONG with the Table 2 Maximum Allowable Trim Resistor Value Electrical Stroke Length Maximum Allowable Value in OHMS 180 4572mm to 300 7620mm E S N A 8 Turn the power to the transducer OFF Solder a trim resistor with a value that is within 5 of the value noted in step above into the Waveguide Driver Amplifier PCB Reference Fig 6 N K 3 ZO Es P e gc x p g N E e jah ue d LI amp 1 52 X ON amp s kA Lil 53 CHE KE N qm O La NZ Xo wt AR S l A dM ND p pee V Ge A C P 1 p lt X p IA Sire H Ee iI I m sd I1 Ki I I Li F 6 Mfg Inst No APD 0046 Rev A Doc Owner Mike O Gorman Effective Date 07 07 00 Page 5 of 6 9 10 Turn the power to the transducer ON Move the test magnet along the entire length of the waveguide Verify that the return signal is still compliant to spec Note it is normal for the return signal to go above the Vpeak MAX level when the magnet is moved toward the HEX BE SURE NOT to exceed the Vpeak MAX Along Stroke If the transducer meets all the requ
63. resistor or helical potentiometer at R32 6 Read the resistance value off or measure the poten tiometer value and connect as fixed resistor for R32 7 Check the output by approaching the start point from both sides several times and correct where necessary using N 8 Bring the position magnet to the End Position SP1 or SP2 and determine the fixed resistance for R34 in the same manner as described for R32 9 Check the output by approaching the end point from both sides several times and correct where necessary using S 10 If there is only 1 decimal resistor or 1 helical potentio meter before R 32 is set R 34 must be provided with a 10 KOhms fixed resistor Bal Lat aal 600106 uoioJodzoO sues SIM 06861 O Bump Af 0128uu0 puo Voi0JOdJO 6u2016 S Sip IG WUGUuU0DDI PASGA O 02 SOLLIE g 2iv06O dus veormueurnd y dusi rut Hs rsrs sjususJinbasy 9 2u0J03 lqo9 2012 uuoo s3tuosoduuJ Seid Owe w DO 6r vi vO B amp Q05 abaa u Vis g 2rvotOdus 4012 uu0 IY JO Bi POPISU PP uw 2r0 0duu8 QuwessY 02 0128u005 sy Da papom Wie FQwotodwey puaq ge puo uoisueuu i souosodws ELEM 550 90 ww Gree UI GL L gt H posuj Si GIN non Jo posu yC JN0 91 ww Sr W SEV uw coer west ww u erz Naina Sca ww 0909 lt ww 0Z 9 ww 9 0 v O O u 961 u QOf w OT a OST HON ujbus1 eras 3002 pos Q uo vpmgugung odu uu
64. upward Figure 3 14 Setting DIP Switches BCD System 3 29 3 4 2 Re zeroing the Series 60 Digital Counter Card former design The Series 60 Counter Card does not contain any internal adjustment for zero setting in the field Re zeroing this card can only be done by mechanical offset or software programming These procedures are described earlier in Subsection 3 4 1 3 4 3 Scaling Series 60 and Series 80 Digital Counter Cards l Scaling is not normally required for Digital Counter Cards because most digital systems are supplied as scaled systems Refer to the earlier Subsection 1 3 1 for a discussion of scaling Scaling is required for systems supplied as unscaled systems or if the counter card is not matched to the transducer serial number Scaled systems will have a discrete scale factor such as 0 001 inches per count and do not require scale factor determination To determine the scale factor or to check system performance move the magnet to a known measured position on the transducer near full stroke Observe the output and record it The scale factor is determined by dividing the measurement by the observed number of counts or the observed output in BCD As an example Measurement 36 000 inches Reading 35 420 counts or 35 420 in BCD Scale Factor 36 0 0010163 inches per count 35 420 inches per inch in BCD For systems that will be used for only one or more discrete positions move the magnet
65. weight to the dead zone of the transducer rod with a clamping device which will not deform the transducer rod The maximum weight or spring tension is 5 to 7 Ibs Spring loading or tensioning is recommended for vertical transducer installations Mounting Cylinder Installation Magnet type SR 12 129in OD other options available Non lerrous spacer _ space Dead zone Stroke as specified 5 or 7 in std 2 in std A a a a a a a at 4 EAS E 2 ms h cua a sen wx e S e mo VAS SEX ir f CX a ir e mm Y em e w mm ADM en em eg S Z DULL A SS lt p Paw wa Ov mge a GESEEREX o F a n 7 P Piston head and rod assembly o Chamfered rod bushing e e Nylok insert O ring user supplied MS28778 8 or equivalent Figure 3 9 Typical Cylinder Installation Mounting The ngid transducer installation procedure can be used as a guide for cylinder installations Figure 3 9 shows a typical cylinder installation Review the following before attempting this type of installation Use a non ferrous plastic brass teflon etc spacer 1 to provide 1 8 inch 32 mm minimum space between the magnet and the piston An O ring groove 2 is provided at the base of the transducer hex head for pressure sealing MTS uses mil standard MS33514 for th
66. 1 3 4 System Component Changes The following general rules apply when interchanging system components or ordering spare parts l Use system components with matched serial numbers whenever possible 2 Use the crystal Yl or U4 on the counter card with the transducer that is matched to it 3 Use the zero pre set U5 on the counter card with the transducer and crystal that is matched to it The zero pre set is a removable 18 pin jumpered DIP socket on Series 60 cards or two DIP switches on Series 80 cards 4 Whenever system components are not matched or a non matched crystal or counter card is used a system calibration refer to Subsection 3 4 should be performed 5 If interface boxes are interchanged it is preferable that they be of the same stroke and recirculation setting refer to Subsection 1 3 2 1 3 5 Spare Parts and Inventory Considerations If ordering a spare transducer a matched crystal and zero pre set should be ordered for Series 60 cards only to avoid system calibration upon replacement For Series 80 cards the zero can be set using DIP switches A universal type spare interface box or counter card can be used as a common spare However a system calibration should be performed after any system component change 1 3 6 Receiver Electronics without Scaling Feature Use of the Temposonics Linear Displacement Measurement system with receiver electronics which does not permit field scaling requires
67. 2 TEMPOSONICS II LDT INSTALLATION 4 2 1 Types of Transducer Supports 6 2 1 1 Loop Supports 6 2 1 2 Channel Supports 7 2 4 3 Guide Pipe Supports 7 22 Open Magnets 8 23 Spring Loading and Tensioning 8 2 4 Cylinder Installation 8 25 Installing Magnets 11 GROUNDING 12 DIGITAL SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS 13 41 Specifications of Digital System Components 14 42 Digital Personality Module 15 4 2 1 Synchronous External Interrogating Mode 15 422 Asynchronous Internal Interrogating Mode 16 4 2 3 Operation During Loss of Signal 16 43 RS422 Personality Module 17 44 Digital Counter Card 18 441 Scaling 19 442 Spare Parts Inventory Considerations 19 DIGITAL SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS 20 ELECTRONIC CONNECTIONS 21 61 General 21 62 Transducer Connections 27 6 3 Digital Counter Card Connections 24 6 3 1 Latch Pulse 29 6 3 2 Protocol 25 6 3 3 Latch Inhibit Input 25 6 4 Counter Cards Natural Binary Output 26 65 Counter Cards BCD Output 29 6 6 System Calibration 32 6 6 1 Re zeroing the Digital Counter Card 32 6 6 2 Scaling the Digital Counter Card 37 APPENDICES A How to Specify Systems with Digital Output 38 B Digital Personality Module DPM Programming Procedure Asynchronous Mode 45 C Modification to the Digital Interface Box 49 D Troubleshooting 91 1 Introduction to the Temposonics II Linear Displacement Transducer LDT The Temposonics II LDT precisely senses the position of an external magnet to measure d
68. 4 below Table A 1 TB1 Pins Output Option Signal Description Terminal Color Code Displacement Only Displacement Output A Voltage or Current Displacement Output LI Displacement and Velocity Voltage or Current Displacement Output Displacement Output Velocity Output Velocity Output Dual Channel Voltage Channel A Displacement Output 4 Channel A Displacement Output Channel B Displacement Output 4 Channel B Displacement Output Displacement Output Displacement Output not connected not connected Potentiometer Top fully CW end Potentiometer Wiper Potentiometer Bottom fully CCW end Displacement Only with External Null or Scale Adjustment Displacement Output Displacement and Velocity Displacement Output LI with External Null or Scale Velocity Output 4 Adjustment Velocity Output Potentiometer Top fully CW end Potentiometer Wiper Potentiometer Bottom fully CCW end Normally at ground potential except for ungrounded current output options Ji Options ON en B Displacement Output A Displacement Output Figure A 1 J1 Connections Displacement Only 24 Volt Option E EN DO DDD D Velocity Output 0 C Laera Aa b Displacemen t A ident Output M Figure A 2 J1 Connections Velocity and Displacement 24 V Option VITS MTS SYSTEMS CORPORATION SENSORS DIVISION BOx 1
69. 6 22 Open Magnets 2 3 Spring Loading and Tensioning 7 2 4 Cylinder Installation 7 25 Installing Magnets 10 TEMPOSONICS Il WIRING 11 GROUNDING 13 1 Introduction to the Temposonics Il Linear Displacement Transducer LDT The Temposonics II Linear Displacement Transducer precisely senses the position of an external magnet to mea sure displacement with a high degree of resolution The system measures the time interval between an interroga tion pulse and a return pulse The interrogation pulse is transmitted through the transducer waveguide and the return pulse is generated by a movable permanent magnet representing the displacement to be measured 1 1 Theory of Operation Magnetostriction The interrogation pulse travels the length of the transducer by a conducting wire threaded through the hollow waveguide The waveguide is spring loaded within the transducer rod and exhibits the physical property of magnetostriction When the magnetic field of the interrogation pulse interacts with the station ary magnetic field of the external magnet a torsional strain pulse or twist is produced in the waveguide This strain pulse travels in both directions away from the magnet At the end of the rod the strain pulse is damped within the dead zone At the head of the transducer two magnetically coupled sensing coils are attached to strain sensitive tapes The tapes translate the strain pulse through coils to an electrical retur
70. An additional analog Sub print is required The analog output option functions in two operational modes 1 Normal NORM 2 Programmable Adjustment PROG WARNING W hen powering down during analog operation switch must remain in programming mode or all parameters will be lost Operation mode is selected with the switch on the analog sub print board see Fig 8 1 Ir min It HI Analog Ae Subprint module NORM 10 to 10 Vdc 0 Vdc Figure 8 1 8 1 Operation Mode 1 Normal Analog Sub print Switch S1 NORM The analog output configuration is defined by the zero position and measuring range of the sensor The three possible configurations are illustrated in Fig 8 2 Null Set Up Null Set Up Null Set Up 10V 0V 5 V 0V 0V 10 V 5V No 1 No 2 No 3 Figure 8 2 23 24 If the magnet leaves the defined measuring range of the sensor the system will indi cate the following outputs 1 If the magnet leaves the measuring range moving towards the end of the sensor rod the output voltage will be NEGATIVE 2 If the magnet leaves the measuring range moving toward the electronics head of the sensor the output will be a constant 10V 8 2 Operation Mode 2 Programmable Adjustment The analog output configuration can be set up by defining the desired output range of the sensor with two set points SP1 and SP2 IMPORTANT NOTES SP1 and SP2 must be within the valid measuring range SP1
71. Bits Maximum Count Maximum Stroke in Maximum Stroke in w 0 001 in Resolution w 0 0005 in Resolution 14 16 383 16 8 15 32 167 2 16 16 65 535 65 32 17 131 071 131 65 18 262 143 262 124 18 924 287 924 262 20 1 048 575 Table 2A Circulations vs Resolutions Resolution Circulations N 0 004 1 0 002 0 001 4 0 0005 8 0 00025 16 0 000125 32 NOTE Values in Table 2A are based on 27 28 MHz clock Example 1 25 ms N 16 Given 15 ms e Stroke 48 in us i 75 e Resolution 0 001 in i ms e Maximum Update Time 3 milliseconds 48 0 001 48000 counts From Table 1A this requires 16 bits SES From Table A 2 N 4 e ms N 4 3 The graph Figure A 1 indicates an update time of approxi nee mately 2 3 milliseconds which is acceptable 4 ms Repeat Steps 1 to 3 for half the resolution 0 0005 in to pro vide increased stability for the 0 001 in least significant bit sms Notice that for 0 0005 in resolution N 8 and the update time Se exceeds the specified maximum of 3 ms Therefore specify 2ms N 4 and 0 001 inch resolution 1ms Specify 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 9 100 Number of bits required 16 STROKE LENGTH inches Resolution 0 001 in Figure A 1 Update Times external interrogation Re circulations 4 Update Time less than 3 ms 39 40 PROCEDURE II System Si
72. CARD Figure 6 4 Setting DIP Switches Binary System OPEN b BCD Output Take the following steps Refer to Figure 6 5 next page 1 Before changing any DIP switch positions record the factory set positions for reference Move the magnet to the desired null position Clamp it in place to prevent movement Reset all switch segments to the LO closed position taking note of alignment marks on the board If a CRT or other readout device indicates a decimal value Gn inches mm or other units con vert this value from decimal to BCD binary and record it in row B of the diagram in Figure 6 5 next page Alternatively read each active bit on the counter card output and record this BCD number in row A of the Diagram Then convert row A to decimal and record it in row B Subtract each digit in row B from 9 and record the result in row C Convert row C into BCD binary and record the result in row D Use the number from row C to mark the columns E and F If the corresponding bit from C is 1 mark an X in column F open or HD If the corresponding bit is 0 mark an X in column E closed or LO Turn off power then set each switch segment to the value HI or LO indicated by the Xs in columns E and F Apply power to the system and check that the output is now zero 35 36 Edge Card Connector Digit Not Used Pin No Bit 10 A Reading in BCD from LEDs
73. CONNECTOR USED AS AN ENVIRONMENTAL SUBSTITUTE FOR 370017 370013 AMPHENOL 10 PIN FEMALE CABLE CONNECTOR M83116F 12 105 MATES WITH DIB J1 CONNECTOR OR WITH 370160 TO BYPASS DIB OR AOM BOX SEE 370160 370160 AMPHENOL 10 PIN ENVIRONMENTAL MALE MS CONNECTOR M S3111F 12 10P USED MOST COMMONLY FOR TEMPO IIS WITH PERSONALITY MODULES R3 amp C3 MATES WITH 370013 TO BYPASS A DIB BOX WHEN INSTALLING A TEMPO IIWITH PERSONALITY MODULE 400755 3 CONNECTOR KIT FOR FABRICATING CABLES THAT MATE DIRECTLY WITH AN RB OR RC TRANSDUCER HEAD CONNECTOR THIS IS NOT A MS CONNECTOR IT IS SPECIFICALLY FOR THE TEMPO II AND LH HEAD 201135 MATING CONNECTOR FOR USE WITH LP TRANSDUCER RAWING NUMBER WE MTS A DID ANSA DATE L APIJ O023 9 22 97 SENSORS DIVISION SIZE CARY NORTH CAROLINA SHEET 1 OF 1 REVISION B ORIGINATOR DDB Cross Reff AP1 0002 d TA CH A Tw TTA C VA Qr Ai DUAL CHANNEL SYSTEM POSITION A PO
74. Calibration 7 MTS Sensor Technologie MTS Systems Corporation MTS Sensors Technology GmbH amp Co KG Sensors Division Izumikan Gobancho P O Box 8130 3001 Sheldon Drive USA 12 11 Gobancho D 58489 L denscheid Germany Cary N C 27513 Chiyoda ku Tokyo 102 Japan Tel 02351 9587 0 Tel 919 677 0100 Tel 813 3239 3003 Fax 02351 56491 Fax 919 677 0200 Fax 813 3262 7780 eMail mtssensor t online eMail info mtssensors com http Awww mtssensor com http Awww mtssensors com 1 Introduction The absolute and linear TEMPOSONICS Position Sen sing system is an analog measuring device with highest resolution Consisting of a sensor TEMPOSONICS II with built in R Module in the sensor head and the sepa rate evaluation interface AK 288 The TEMPOSONICS system measures the time interval between a Start and a Stop signal In the sensor a torsio nal strain pulse is induced in a specially designed magne tostrictive waveguide by the interaction of two magnetic fields under the positioning head The running time proportional to the displacement will be converted into an analog voltage or current output Fig 1 Analog Board AK 288 2 Analog Board AK 288 2 1 Design and Operations The AK 288 card in Europe format 100 x 160 mm is suitable for installation in a 19 sub rack for 32 pin insert card blocks of structural shape C DIN 41612 or Snap in card housing The board consists of the following function units Control Logic and Sta
75. Connections w Standard 15 Vdc P S w Optional 24 Vdc P S TB3 H A 15 Vdc 24 Vdc TB3 B 15Vdc TB3 K DC Common DC Common TB3 A D Displacement Output Displacement Output TB1 B E Optional velocity output Optional velocity output Table 10H Ungrounded 4 20 mA Current Output Terminal Block Pin Connection J 1 Function 1 Function 2 Connections w Standard 15 Vdc P S w Optional 24 Vdc P S TB3 H A 15 Vde 24 Vdc TB3 J B 15 Vdc TB3 K C DC Common DC Common TB1 A D Current Output source Current Output source DO NOT ground or damage may result DO NOT ground or damage may result M aximum load resistance 4009 M aximum load resistance 40022 TB1 B E Current Output return Current Output return Table 101 Grounded 4 20 mA Current Output Terminal Block Pin Connection J 1 Function 1 Function 2 Connections w Standard 15 Vdc P S w Optional 24 Vdc P S TB3 H A 15 Vde 24 Vdc TB3 J B 15 Vdc TB3 K C DC Common DC Common TB1 A D Current Output source Current Output source E Not Used Not used Maximum load resistance 50062 Maximum load resistance 50002 Terminal blocks are located inside the AOM housing and are accessed via strain relief connectors 1 and J 2 on the face of the AOM 10 5 J2 Connections The J2 cable provides connections between the AOM and the transducer assembly Cables up to 250 feet 76 meters can be
76. E VELO OUT TB1 C LI F 24 VDC TB1 F 24 VDC TB1 E J1 10 PIN CONNECTOR MS3112E12 10P BSOLETE S OM TEMPOSONICS H EN 12 TO 14 5 VDC E 13 5 TO 15 5 VDC E INTERROGATION PULSE 11 5 TO 12 VDC 5 A d A SIZE 1 x M Putnam O PULSE A B C D TEMPOSONICS I CONNECTIONS TO ANALOG OUTPUT MODULA AOM WITH 6 amp 10 PIN MILITARY STYLE MS CONNECTORS I F 6 PIN CONNECTOR MS3102A 14S 6P A 15 VDC TB3 H L B 15 VDC TB3 J C GROUND TB3 K D DISP OUT TB1 A E VELO OUT TB1 C F 24 VDC TB1 F G 24 VDC TB1 E Ji 10 PIN CONNECTOR MS3112E12 10P rir DATE 1 16 95 A Th 4 W d i ksaq ICH HAS A WI Y re 99 ARD 4 25 TH OF PROC T D d hb TO MODIFY THE 80 SERIES COUNTER CARD HE DEMENSION OF THE 60 SERIES COUNTER bes de C2 6 25 IN gt PIN 1 i CRYSTAL IN O
77. E TB3 H A J B K C Displacement Output Displacement Output Return ground 15 Vdc 15 Vdc DC Common Function Displacement Output Displacement Output Return ground Velocity Output Velocity Output Return ground 15 Vdc 15 Vdc DC Common 2 28 Table 10C J1 Connections w 24 V Power Supply Option Strain Relief Connection MS Connector Pin J 1 Function TB1 A D Displacement Output B E Displacement Output TB3 H A 24 Vdc J No Connection N A K C DC Common Table 10D J1 Connections w 24 V Power Supply amp Velocity Output Options Strain Relief Connection MS Connector Pin J 1 Function TB1 A D Displacement Output B Displacement Output C E Velocity Output D Velocity Output TB3 H A 24 Vdc J No Connection N A K C DC Common Table 10E AOM J1 Connections w Dual Channel Option Strain Relief Connection MS Connector Pin J 1 Function TB1 A D Channel 1 Displacement Output E E Channel 2 Displacement Output TB3 H A 15 Vde J B 15 Vdc K DC Common Table 10F J1 Connections w Dual Channel amp 24 V Power Supply Options Strain Relief Connection MS Connector Pin J 1 Function IEN A D Channel 1 Displacement Output E E Channel 2 Displacement Output TB3 H A 24 Vdc J No Connection N A K C DC Common 10 4 J1 Connection to AOM with MS Connectors Table 10G Voltage Output Terminal Block Pin Connection J 1 Function 1 Function 2
78. JNO ONI un O31NnOM S UIINOSNvYL uni HOIHM NO 1N3MdinO3 JO 3uj ONY ONNOYD A iay E c 9 Mat W3MOd N33 138 NOUDINNOD v 3Q ISNAN z 9 3g3H QNnOND 20 ONNOYI AlddNS W3MOd OL 1 91 Q3193NNOD 38 ISNAN u3on SMwul A0 3rmii i DOOR 301 TIIN AUS OISNIMINI 19345 Aen NOILYJOI SIHL Ni S39NYHO ANY omg gnos9 FAG T egen ROL SNOGUYZVH NON NOI1Y201 SnOOgYZYH Figure 5 la Intrinsically Safe System with MTL Safety Barriers 5 NONHAZARDOUS LOCATION OR APPROVED HAZARDOUS LOCATION MTS DEE EE E ANY CHANGES IN THIS LOCATION MAY AFFECT INTRINSIC SAFETY _APPROVED FOR MODELS DI be ROLE ee e SE i1 16 2 Gs l6 3 FRAME OF TRANSDUCER MUST BE CONNECTED TO POWER SUPPLY GROUND DC GROUND THERE MUST BE A CONNECTION BETWEEN POWER SUPPLY GROUND AND FRAME OF EQUIPMENT ON WHICH TRANSDUCER IS MOUNTED ONE CENTRAL GROUND IS IS DESIRABLE RESISTANCE BETWEEN THE FRAME OF THE EQUIPMENT ON WHICH THIS TRANSDUCER IS MOUNTED AND TRANSDUCER SHALL BE 0 1 OHM BARRIER ELCON INSTRUMENTS MTL INC R STAHL INC MANUFACTURERS 5834 PEACHTREE CORNERS EAST 8576 WELLINGTON RD 150 NEW BOSTON ST NORCROSS ATLANTA GA 30092 P 0 BOX 1690 WOBURN MA 01801 MANASSAS VA 22110 800 253 5266 703 361 0111 800 782 4357 BARRIER BARRIER MODEL NUMBER FUNCTION Voc VOLTS Isc mA Ca MAX CLASS DIVISION 1 GROUPS A B C D La MAX CLASS DMSON 1 GROUP A B C D THIS CONNECTION MUST BE MADE TO
79. MK 292 Module MTS aa TEMPOSONICS PRODUCT S P EC 1 F l G ATI Features e Zero Reset along entire stroke e Scaled Outputs Inches Millimeters Centimeters Meters e Compatible with Temposonics II amp Temposonics LP e Large 5 1 4 digit LED characters Temposonics Display Unit TDU Model TDU 100 The Temposonics Display Unit TDU provides a large clear LED readout of accurate measurement data The TDU is ideal for use in applications where immedi ate visual verification of position is required such as plastic and woodworking applications Temposonics TDU TEH The TDU is designed to work with both the Temposonics II and Temposonics LP transduc ers with Start Stop output Together the TDU and Temposonics transducers provide a highly accurate reliable and easy to use position display system Gradient Ls If you want to find out more about the TDU or any of the other Temposonics products please call MTS Sensors Division at 800 633 7609 specifications Temposonics Display Unit Model TDU 100 Parameter Supply Voltage Specifications e w Temposonics Il 15 Vdc e w Temposonics LP 20 to 24 Vdc Sensor Product Life e Active Sensing Element 4 x 106 MTBF Display Electronics Enclosure e Drip dust and rust resistant Non Linearity transducer e Temposonics Il lt 0 05 F S or 0 0001 inch 20 0025 mm e
80. Minimum Spotface Diameter See Note 1 0 004 90 813 in 0 002 in i g 0 008 in 0 004 in 0 094 in Max A 0 125 uin em n Y R0 015 in P 1 100 in 1250 in Max t 45 4 59 SSES See Note 3 4 See Note 4 15 TA Pitch Dia NOTES 1 If face of port is on a machined surface dimensions 1 180 and 0 094 need not apply as long as R0 008 0 004 is maintained to avoid damage to the O ring during installation 2 Measure perpendicularity to A at this diameter 3 his dimension applies when tap drill cannot pass through entire boss 4 This dimension does not conform to SAE J1926 1 3 4 16 UNF 2B Thread 90 500 in Ref ef See Note 4 Figure 2 10 Port Detail SAE J1926 1 2 5 Installing Magnets Figure 2 11 below shows the standard magnet types and dimensions The circular magnet with an outside diameter of 1 29 inches and 0 53 inch inside diameter Part No 201542 is the most common and is suit able for most applications Larger magnets with an outside diameter of 2 5 inches are typically only used with Temposonics transducers that exceed 180 inches in stroke length Magnets with a 90 degree cut out are used in applications that require intermediate supports along the transducer rod If upon installation the null adjustment is inadequate you can design a coupler with adjustments to mount the magnet to the measured member Part No 201553 Part No 201554 1 of 2 h
81. N 8 recirculations stroke up to 131 inches For 0 001 inches N 4 recirculations stroke up to 262 inches For 0 002 inches N 2 recirculations stroke up to 524 inches For 0 004 inches N 1 recirculations Table 3 4 Counter Card Output 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 131 071 262 143 EEN MSB determined by dividing stroke by resolution and comparing to maximum counts For example 25 inches 0 001 25 000 This requires a maximum count of 32 767 yielding an MSB at pin 22 3 17 Table 3 5 is based upon a counter card with 2 divider factory set A single card is capable of 17 bits natural binary output maximum For the 27 28 MHz crystal the resulting resolution and recirculations vs stroke are as follows l For 0 000125 inches N 64 recirculations stroke up to 16 inches 2 For 0 00025 inches N 32 recirculations stroke up to 32 inches 3 For 0 0005 inches N 16 recirculations stroke up to 65 inches 4 For 0 001 inches N 8 recirculations stroke up to 131 inches 5 For 0 002 inches N 4 recirculations stroke up to 262 inches 6 For 0 004 inches N 2 recirculations stroke up to 524 inches 7 For 0 008 inches N 1 or none recirculations Table 3 5 Counter Card Output 2 Bit Decimal Maximum Counts Weight Value vs Numb
82. NORTH CAROLINA B REVISION ORIGINATOR RSM Cross Reff AP1 001 L Series with MS connector 3 760 95 50mm 4 94 125 48mm NULL DEAD SPACE Stroke n 2 00 50 8mm L Series with RO cable NULL Stroke DEAD SPACE 2 5 63 50mm 2 00 50 8mm 798 2 5 63 50mm VIDT A DRAWING NUMBER DATE A ADDy ODALTO 9 24 97 SENSORS DIVISION SIZE 7 P 0040 E CARY NORTH CAROLINA SHEET 1 OF REVISION B ORIGINATOR RSM
83. Note 1 0 004 lt 90 813 in 0 002 in i g 0 008 in 0 004 in 0 094 in Max 4 0 125 uin em n Y R0 015 in P 1 100 in 1 250 in Max t 45 4 59 Been uten See Note 3 4 See Note 4 15 STI Pitch Dia NOTES 1 If face of port is on a machined surface dimensions 1 180 and 0 094 need not apply as long as R0 008 0 004 is maintained to avoid damage to the O ring during installation 2 Measure perpendicularity to A at this diameter 3 his dimension applies when tap drill cannot pass through entire boss 4 This dimension does not conform to SAE J1926 1 3 4 16 UNF 2B Thread 90 500 in Ref ef See Note 4 Figure 2 10 Port Detail SAE J1926 1 2 5 Installing Magnets Figure 2 11 below shows the standard magnet types and dimensions The circular magnet with an outside diameter of 1 29 inches and 0 53 inch inside diameter Part No 201542 is the most common and is suit able for most applications Larger magnets with an outside diameter of 2 5 inches are typically only used with Temposonics transducers that exceed 180 inches in stroke length Magnets with a 90 degree cut out are used in applications that require intermediate supports along the transducer rod If upon installation the null adjustment is inadequate you can design a coupler with adjustments to mount the magnet to the measured member Part No 201553 1 of 2 holes 0 177 in dia 4 5 mm 120 apart on 1 6
84. Ph deum ud FLUID POWEA Ar uar oes Part Number 10 00 550409 Revision C MTS maaan INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS Installing an Digital Personality Module DPM DIGITAL PERSONALITY MODULE ATTENTION Attach an updated label to this document before shipment to customer CAUTION The DPM is a static sensitive device and should be treated as such MTS recommends a static wrist wrap be worn during installation and that these procedures are conducted in a clean environment 1 Place the transducer hex in a vise 2 Unscrew the cover using hand pressure only Note that cover has right hand TEES threads A specially designed cover wrench is available from MTS warranty and error free future replication orders install this label as instructed in Step 9 CAUTION Hands must be clean Ensure that no foreign material contacts the inside components 3 Once the cover is removed clean the inner threads of the cover and bracket with a lint free cloth Spray ONLY the cover threads with Sherwin Williams 00217 Teflon spray 4 Remove DPM from the static sensitive bag by holding the module by its edges being careful that the plastic does not contact the transducer mechanism The old coil block design has a key that can interfere with a new DPM Gf a DPM is being installed on a transducer with the old coil block design be sure to cut off the key before installing the new DPM as indicated in the drawing bel
85. Pin 19 2 28 Table 6G is based upon a counter card with 4 divider factory set A single card is capable of 16 bits natural binary output maximum For the 27 28 MHz crystal the resulting resolution and recirculations versus stroke are as follows Resolution Circulations Stroke Length 0 000125 125 Up to 8 inches 0 00025 64 Up to 16 inches 0 0005 32 Up to 32 inches 0 001 16 Up to 65 inches 0 002 8 Up to 131 inches 0 004 4 Up to 262 inches 0 008 2 Up to 300 inches 0 016 1 Up to 300 inches Table 6G Counter Card Output 4 Pin No Bit Weight Decimal Value Bit Maximum Counts vs Number of Bits 8 LSB 20 1 1 bit 7 2 3 2 bits 14 22 7 3 bits 13 23 15 4 bits 12 24 31 5 bits 11 29 63 6 bits 18 26 127 7 bits 17 27 255 8 bits 16 29 511 9 bits 15 29 1023 10 bits 20 210 2047 11 bits 21 21 4095 12 bits 72 212 8191 13 bits 19 213 16 383 14 bits 23 214 32 767 15 bits 15 MSB 219 65 535 16 bits 1 LSB Least Significant Bit 2 MSB Most Significant Bit MSB is determined by dividing the stroke length by the resolution and comparing to the maximum count For Example 25 in 0 001 25 000 this requires a maximum count of 32 767 thus yielding an MSB at Pin 15 6 5 Counter Card BCD Output The Digital Counter Card can be provided with Binary Coded Decimal BCD output BCD code is a bina ry me
86. REV C CORRECTED RED WIRE TO TB3 H BKT 4 30 96 REV D ADDED NOTE 6 AP1 0007 CHANGED TO APD 0029 TEP 9 23 97 A RAWING NUMBER LL U A D T NOODI p 4A APD 0029 9 23 97 SENSORS DIVISION SIZE CARY NORTH CAROLINA SHEET 1 OF 1 REVISION D ORIGINATOR DDB NOTE THE LETTERS NO MUST POINT TO THE TII HEAD DP TAS L f Cross Reff Qt gt GC ff F 2 f Rev B Add magnet amp dimension remove V kN A DRAWING NUMBER DNA J BAL Y A H Ne 1 A 31 IN 9 ic 3 AZ UVU U e2 S SENSORS DIVISION SIZE CARY NORTH CAROLINA SHEET 1 OF 1 REVISION C ORIGINATOR DUAL CHANNEL SYSTEM Cross Reff AP1 0009 FOR TEMPO III PA CAPTIVE SLIDE MAGNET 2 MAGNET 2 POSITION 2 POSITION 1 STROKE 2 NULL 2 MIN 3 jf CHANNEL 2 d
87. S A PLUG IN TYPE FOR THE OLD STYLE T HAS ALL OF THE FEATURES OF THE ANALOG OUTPUT NIFIT OF BEING ABLE TO BE RETROFITTED PHYSICAL PL F THE OLD STYLE CARD OUTPUTS VDC FORWARD amp REVERSE ACTING VDC FORWARD amp REVERSE ACTING 10 VDC FORWARD amp REVERSE ACTING FROM LP PLUG IN CARD TRANSDUCER N PIN PIN 1 BLUE 1 DC GROUND CURR RET FOR GND SYSTEMS PIN 2 GREE P 2 5 VDC INPUT OPTIONAL PIN 3 Y DT 3 15 VDC INPUT PIN 0 PI 4 12 VDC TO LDT DIN 5 OE me 5 15 VDC INPUT 24 VDC OPTIONAL SN G ap SIT 6 15 VDC INPUT TO LDT i e 7 INTERROGATION PULSE TO LDT 8 15 VDC TO TRANSDUCER 9 PWM OPTIONAL 0 VELOCITY CURR RET UNGND OPTIONAL 11 ANALOG VELOCITY OUTPUT OPTIONAL 12 ANALOG DISPLACE OUTPUT CURR SOURCE 13 OPTIONAL CURR RET FOR UNGND SYSTEM 4 RETURN PULSE FROM TRANSDUCER 15 INTERROGATION PULSE TO TRANSDUCER NOTE ECTED TO PIN Z1 ON THE AOM CARD VIT C D _ Nf ATE WEES Sensors Division DRAWING NUMBER A 00168 e eessen CARY NORTH CAROLINA E A ORIGINATOR JAVE BAKER H en T5 4 UJ D T T 2 V E D h ea o sy ee d e fe Q 26 V 5 XY j 3 Y CH MT 128 AVE J J Ca A ei BLACK LAW AX as MTL 1 1 p OR MTL 71 BLUE VHITE T wl fX NT H GND V
88. SYSTEM COMPONENTS MK292 Compatible Temposonics Position Sensors Temposonics Position Sensor with Start Stop Output Temposonics Position Sensor with Pulse Width Modulated Output Temposonics Position Sensor with Synchronous Operation CONNECTIONS Temposonics Il Position Sensors with DPM or RPM oE based Temposonics LP Position Sensors with Start Stop Output Temposonics L Series Position Sensors with Start Stop Output system Connections Functional Inputs Outputs Error Output Loss of Feedback Data Ready Output Latch Pulse Data Hold Input Latch Inhibit External Start Input Master Slave Input SYSTEM PARAMETERS SHORT FORM PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE DETAILED PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE RUN Programming Mode REC Pulse Duration SC Scale Factor RE Resolution MR Measuring Range ZERO Null Adjust ZERO Offset RUN Operation Mode OPTIONAL ANALOG OUTPUT FOR THE MK292 Operation Mode 1 Normal Operation Mode 2 Programmable Adjustment 1 Introduction to the MK292 Digital Output Module The MK292 Digital Output Module provides an interface between a Temposonics position sensor with a pulse width modulated or start stop output and a system controller A selection of outputs from the MK292 BCD binary or Gray Code gives this device nearly universal compatibility The MK292 is compatible with many Temposonics position sensors as follows Compatible Position Sensors e SE based Temposonics L
89. System Configuration 2 Specifications 2 1 MK292 Digital Output Module Specifications Parameter Specification Input Voltage 24 Vde 15 20 Ripple lt 5 NOTE An additional 5V power supply is required for the optional TTL level outputs dual power supply 24 5 Vdc is available from MTS P N 380066 Current Draw 250 mA maximum Input Requirement oE based Temposonics LP with start stop output Temposonics Il with PWM or start stop output Temposonics L Series with PWM or start stop output Output Format Selectable Up to 24 bit e BCD maximum stroke length with BCD output scaled in millimeters is 7500 mm When utilizing inches strokes may be up to 300 inches e Natural Binary e Gray Code Resolution 0 002 in 0 05 mm with start stop input 0 0002 in 0 005 mm with PWM input Update Frequency Stroke and resolution dependent Optional Analog Recorder Output Range 10 to 10 Vdc used for recording option board required must be specified upon initial order 12 bit resolution Dmv ripple Fully adjustable Programming Parameters Zero Resolution stroke Length Measuring Direction Analog Output used for recording option board required must be specified upon initial order Operating Temperature 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F Connection 64 pin edge connector DIN 41612 provided with circuit card Cable Requirements 8 x 24 AWG twisted
90. THE OLD SENSORS AND THE SE BASED SENSORS RAWING NUMBER A LL I AA PD 0035 9 23 91 i Ss mm Je e SENSORS DIVISION SIZE 44 e CARY NORTH CAROLINA SHEET 1 OF REVISION B ORIGINATOR RSM Cross Reff AP1 0014 TOP VIEW SCREW DOWN FOR 35 MOUNTING IN e CABINET 55 10 _SCREW MAY BE REMOVED TO ACCESS REAR PANEL ONE ON EACH SIDE TDU pep gg FRONT VIEW 2 1 E VII 3 m D 35 ej 39 an Nu L H W RAWING NUM A L DT DATE O0 9 23 97 SENSORS DIVISION CARY NORTH CAROLINA 1 OF REVISION B ORIGINATOR RSM APPLICATIONS DISPLACEMENT GROUP MTS SENSORS DIVISION i ES D Cross FORMED TRANSDUCER SPECIFICATION SHEET WE HAVE RECEIVED YOUR REQUEST FOR QUOTATION FOR A FORMED TRANSDUCER IN ORDER TO PROVIDE YOU WITH AN ACCURATE QUOTE WE NEED THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION PLEASE COMPLETE AND FAX TO M
91. This number is based on resolution and frequency You can use Table 1B to choose the number of recirculations based on resolution using a 27 28 MHz crystal 45 Hexadecimal numbers 01 to 7F for internal interrogation and 81 to FF for external interrogation are printed on the switches Choose the desired number of recirculations from Table 2B and set SW1 and SW2 to the corresponding hexadecimal numbers Table 1B Resolution vs Recirculations Resolution Recirculation 0 004 0 002 0 001 0 0005 0 00025 6 0 000125 32 Values are calculated using a 27 28 M Hz Crystal c AN Table 2B Recirculation Switch Settings Internal Interrogation Recirculations External Interrogation SW 2 SW 1 SW 2 SW 1 0 1 1 8 1 0 2 2 8 2 0 4 8 4 0 8 8 8 8 1 0 16 g 0 2 0 32 A 0 4 0 64 C 0 7 F 127 F F B 2 Setting Update Time Internal Interrogation SW3 is the programming switch that is used to set the update time for internal interrogation NOTE SW2 disables SW3 in external interroga tion That is setting SW2 to any bexa decimal number past 7 will disable SW3 SW3 is pre programmed for external interrogation from the factory Update time is programmed with SW3 using hexadecimal numbers 0 F Refer to Table 3B next page To find the minimum required update time Umin use the following procedure FORMULA 1 where U min 2 5 NULL STROKE x 01086 ms in x N
92. V inputs Data Ready op MK 292 1 Note 1 Master Start Dutput c Digital 2 9 5 Output 3 6 PWM or Start Sto 4 i 7 Module 7 1 Displacement Output Format T c12 2 8 Master Slave Input y c13 3 3 3 mm Inch c14 4 Output Logic gt c15 External Start Input p gt _c16 1 12 Data Hold Input gt _c17 2 13 Optional Analog Output c19 3 4 14 DC Common 4 Sensor Connections uU W ire color is sensor dependent 1 refer to Section 4 1 of this manual Z Ve 5 17 18 Output 2 Interrogation zm c24 4 gt E Interrogation LI c25 ip 1 ER 7 Inout 2 Gate or Start Stop Pulse c27 2 p Gate or Start Stop Pulse T c28 3 6 MSB 2 4 Output U E Vos TT 930ora30 C c31 or a31 DC Ground 032 or a32 NY Frame When high output is negative SS when low output is positive Output Logic GE bs onam Vin Unit of Measurement c1 oral TM 0V c14 Millimeter Vin c14 Inches Displacement Output Format c2 or a2 Parallel m Parallel oy choral Parallel c1 or al BCD Output Binary Output Cosi Gray Output Note 2 PWM or Start Stop gy lt 2 co starystop Vin 20882 Jon PWM Note 3 NOTES 1 Logic inputs and outputs are relative to voltage level connected to Vin Pin c3 For example set Vin to 5 Vdc for TTL or 24 Vdc for controller with 24 Vdc inputs outputs 2 The five digit BCD outputs are limited to stroke lengths 7500 mm when measuri
93. Wire Color Function G32 1 White DC Ground No Connection C28 3 Gray Gate Be 4 Pink Gate GZ 5 Red Power supplied by MK292 24 Vdc 6 No Connection 7 No Connection 8 No Connection C24 9 Yellow Interrogation C25 10 Green Interrogation Figure 4 5 RB Connector Mating Connector P N 400755 3 Table 4 C 4 Connections Temposonics L Series Position Sensor with RO Integral Cable M K292 Connection Wire Color Function C28 Gray Gate C27 Pink Gate C24 Yellow Interrogation C25 Green Interrogation CZ Red or Brown Power supplied by MK292 24 Vdc C32 White DC Ground Table 4 C 5 Connections Temposonics L Series Position Sensor with HO Integral Cable M K292 Connection Wire Color Function C28 White Gate GZ Black twisted w white Gate C24 Blue Interrogation C25 Black twisted w blue Interrogation C2 Red Power supplied by MK292 24 Vdc 32 Black twisted w red DC Ground The HO Integral Cable maximum length 30 feet 9 14 m was not available at the time this manual was printed Please contact the factory for status 4 2 System Connections BCD Natural Binary gy _DC Common gy HL Common or Gray Code 24 V 24 V DC Common c1 or a 1 D Vin 24V Input to MK292 c2 or a 2 1 N 5 24V Input for TTL Output y c3 ora3 3 1 LSB 4 For 5 24 V input EXAMPLE f Error c5 3 IMPORTANT 5 V required for TTL Controller with 24
94. a D 2050503 EE IP tle Mi e TETRA 00 OH CH ot 1 ate ate Mk ll MOON 3 Bieta ete 1t sed ttu HOME 3 t iE del bed O Pt asf B sisten d itt ez Km ry hrO DCm sieht all D 2 ustment t DNE poses Cafe ee ee Cece ene Te g i affe 6 Se en LI t t ai zpsieee ts as EG R20 DOOOOQUg 1 it i HOS A HHH SP GH Bereet Yt GIE H Se Hack Lee wk G ff X Isa D i eters ais Ser EM 0009450 ss ge ML we we see eee ee ee ee ee ee ele tate Ze ais DEER SER 8 Scale Adjustment R24 Figure 2 1 Location of Position Adjustments and Termnal Boards on the AOM Adjustments NOTE The adjustment values specified in the following procedures depend on the system configuration The adjustment tolerances of these procedures during field calibration are dependent on system requirements and available test equipment Null and Full Scale Adjustments The following procedures calibrate the null position and the full scale position to the required output levels If the following adjustments are inadequate refer to Subsection 3 2 for possible mechanical adjustments Refer to Figure 2 1 for the adjustment locations NOTE The following procedure assumes the standard full scale 0 to 10 Vdc output is supplied When other output signals are supplied use the appropriate signal levels an
95. alone or with channel supports Figure 2 4 illustrates the fabrication of a loop support Front View Side View Transducer Rod Figure 2 4 Loop Support NOTE When open magnets are used ensure the transducer rod remains within the inside diameter of the magnet throughout the length of the stroke If the transducer rod is allowed to enter the cut out area of an open magnet the transducer signal could attenuate or be lost See Figure 2 7 2 1 2 Channel Supports Channel supports being typically straight are normally used with rigid transducers A channel support consists of a straight channel with loop supports mounted at intervals The loop supports are required to keep the transducer within the channel Figure 2 5 shows a channel support Channel supports are available from various manufacturers or may be fabricated Magnet e Part No 201553 or e Part No 251416 Loop Support Figure 2 5 Channel Support 2 1 3 Guide Pipe Supports Guide pipe supports are normally used for flexible transducers A guide pipe support is construct ed of non ferrous material straight or bent to the desired shape As shown in Figure 2 6 both inside and outside dimensions of the pipe are critical e Because the transducer rod is installed inside the pipe the inside diameter of the pipe must be large enough to clear the rod Magnet e Part No 201553 or e Part No 251416 K Guide Pipe Figure 2 6 Guide Pip
96. and E of J1 10 pin connector or E1 and E2 4 8 Modifying a DIB from EXTERNAL interrogation to INTERNAL Interrogation Consult drawings 650110 and 250068 1 Remove the 4 cover screws on the DIB 2 Remove cover with PCB connected Tum component side up with J1 to the left and J2 to the right as you face the board 4 9 Remove the 9637 IC from the top side of the 16 pin DIP socket position U1B pins 5 8 and 9 12 Install a 555 timer on the bottom side of the same 16 pin DIP socket position U1 pins 1 4 and 13 16 Install the proper value or next highest available value resistor in R1 location Use the following formula to determine the resistor value R1 KQ T msec x 14 43 1 Install R2 4999 C1 1uF and C13 01uF if R1 is not present IC 9637 is manufactured by Texas Instruments P N UA9637 ACP The 555 Timer is manufactured by RCA P N LM555CN 4 9 Changing Recirculations 1 2 Remove the 4 cover screws on the DIB Locate the jumper wire in the center of the PCB attached to 0 and some other number ranging from 1 to 8 There are 8 possible points Use the chart below to change from 0 to X to get N number of desired circulations Install U3 74161 for recirculations above 8 Jumper from 0 to X N 0 to 1 1 0 to 2 2 0 10 3 4 0 to 4 8 0 10 5 16 0 to 6 32 0 to 7 64 0 to 8 128 NOTE Any DIB having a high number of circulations can be changed to a lower n
97. applying power Voltages applied to the gate signal connector pins G or K or optional D E will damage interface box Turn on power to the power supplies and take voltage readings on the J1 female connector between the appropriate pins Check all other pins to ensure that no voltage is present Solder to the binary output on the digital counter card edge connector using ribbon cable or suitable wire harness Solder the 5 Vdc power supply to pins 1 and 2 on the counter card edge connector Apply heat shrink tubing to the connector terminals to protect from shorts to other terminals Connect the power supply common for the 15 V and 5 Vdc supplies together and ground them to earth ground Refer to Figure 3 10 Connect the counter card edge connector to the card Connect the MS connector to the interface box J1 connector Plug in the transducer cable into the J2 interface box connector 3 23 10 Apply power and observe readings at the receiver device while moving the magnet along the transducer rod If readings are satisfactory go to Subsection 3 4 system calibration 3 4 System Calibration There are no adjustments on the interface box or the transducer Instead the system is calibrated at the counter card or by external means The scaling inches per count is determined by a fixed frequency crystal oscillator while the zero point is determined resettable DIP switches on the counter card Generally the system com
98. at the proper null position e The piston head 4 shown in Figure 4 7 is typical For some installations depending on the clearances it may be desired to countersink the magnet e A chamfered rod bushing 5 should be considered for stokes over 5 feet 1 5 meters to prevent wear on the magnet as the piston retracts The bushing should be made from Teflon or similar material e A Nylok self locking insert 6 is provided on the threads An O ring groove is provided at the base of the hex head for pressure sealing e The recommended bore for the cylinder rod is 1 2 inch 13 mm The 0 375 in sensor rod includes a 0 44 in 12 mm end plug Use standard industry practices for machining and mounting of all components Consult the cylinder manufacturer for applicable SAE or military specifications 13 2 250 MINIMUM DIA 2 250 MINIMUM DIA SPECIFIES SURFACE B SPECIFIES SURFACE B 0 005 DIA FIM 0 005 DIA FIM 0 875 0 875 0 015 0 015 o 000 P 0 000214 E x 0 769 0 769 40 005 3 4 16 UNJF 3B THREAD 40 005 3 4 16 UNJF 3B THREAD 0 000 P SEE NOTES 3 AND 4 0 005 Ul SEE NOTES 3 AND 4 8 120 0 30 5 ds 120 0 30 fs 0 015 J 0 015 I 0 094 0 000 Al E Eege E SCH SN lt a E Y A SEE NOTE 7 VY 2 mE m ln SE THRU THREAD DESIGN 0 094 REF SEE NOTE amp 0 500 DIA BLIND
99. be mounted within 2 feet of the LDT assembly Newer systems with buffer driver allow the interface box to be mounted within 100 feet of the LDT assembly All units after 3 1 88 have this driver 4 Refer to Subsection 3 2 2 for information to install transducer supports Magnet Type SR 12 129 in O D options availabe Non Ferrous Spacer 1 Null Space i Stroke Dead Zone 2 i S or 7 in std sition Speciied Le 3 772 d l als CR CN NN az TE men as N fl kE Nu v IN x x AX Se SE Piston Head amp Rod Assembly 4 e Chamfered Rod Bushing 5 Nylok Insert 6 O Ring User supplied MS28778 8 or equal 2 SM C62 35 Figure 3 9 Typical Cylinder Installation Piston at Full Retraction 3 2 4 Cylinder Installation This subsection provides information for cylinder applications The rigid transducer installation procedure can be used as a guide for cylinder installations Figure 3 9 shows a typical cylinder installation Review the following before attempting a cylinder installation l Use a non ferrous plastic brass teflon etc spacer to provide 1 8 inch 32 mm minimum space between the magnet and the piston 3 9 2 An O ring
100. direct RS422 compatible start stop output Temposonics II position sensors require an RS422 Personality Module RPM installed in the sensor head to produce a start stop output 3 1 2 Temposonics Position Sensor with Pulse Width Modulated PWM Output Temposonics L Series position sensors provide a direct pulse width modulated output Temposonics II position sensors require a Digital Personality Module DPM to gener ate a pulse width modulated output The DPM is installed in the head of the sensor s electronics enclosure When using a Temposonics sensor with a PWM output external interrogation is required to interface with the MK292 External interrogation is an option selected at the time of order and is pre set at the factory 3 1 3 Temposonics Position Sensor with Synchronous Operation External Interrogating In synchronous operation an interrogation pulse is supplied to the position sensor from the MK292 module After supplying the interrogation pulse the MK292 waits for the sensor s return pulse then ends the cycle The time between the launching of the interrogation pulse and the receipt of the return pulse is proportional to the distance between the null or zero position and the movable magnet RS422 Compatible Start Stop Output Pulse Duration Output Stop Ie Distance between Start and Stop pulse To MK292 Module Pulse duration is To MK232 Module is proportional to magnet position proportional to position Tempo
101. external interrogation DPM 300 feet 90 meters using external interrogation Magnet Requirement Part Number 201554 or 201553 ONLY 2 Temposonics II LDT Installation Before beginning installation be sure you know the following dimensions as illustrated in Figures 2 1 to 2 3a c e Null Space e Stroke e Dead Zone Flange to Tip D N Standard Null Dead Zone 290i yg Stroke Length 2 0 in 50 mm 950 in AU specified by customer 63 50 mm lengths up to 1 36 in 179 9 in 34 54 mm f 0 03 in 0 76 mm 3 in 76 2 mm for strokes gt 180 in lt 0 38 in 9 65 mm 2 13 in 54 mm 0 38 in DIA Z 9 65 mm x 1 57 in dia 39 87 mm 1 75 in dia nd Plug 44 45 mm Flush 0 83 in 9 65 mm 3 4 16 UNF 3A Thread Hex 1 75 in 44 45 mm across flats Figure 2 1 Temposonics II Dimension in minimum clearance for connector and cable bend Temposonics Il with Molded Connector Cable Assembly Temposonics Il with Field Instalable Connector 1 25 in minimum Temposonics Il with Integral Cable Figure 2 2 Temposonics II Connector Cable Clearance Requirements 1 Use the 3 4 inch 19 mm 16 UNF thread of the transducer to mount it at the selected location Leave room to access the hex head If a pressure or moisture seal is required install an O ring type MS 28778 8 is recom mended
102. fabricated with any high quality multi conductor cable with an overall shield Belden equivalent Take the following steps to connect J2 1 It is recommended that you apply an earth ground to the transducer rod This is typically accom plished by mounting the transducer head to a bracket or machine 2 Strain Relief Only If necessary fabricate the J2 cable and prepare the cable as described earlier Identify the connections to TB2 Refer to Table 10J next page for the J2 connections NOTE Ensure the solder connections are clean and free of excessive solder Use heat shrink over the solder connections to pre vent the pins from shorting 29 3 MS Connector Only If necessary fabricate the J2 cable Be sure to use the recommended cable for the required length The color code refers to cables supplied with the system Solder the connections to the MS connector supplied with the AOM Use any cable capable of maintaining the signals for the required length Ensure the solder connections are clean and free of excessive solder Use heat shrink over the solder connections to prevent the pins from shorting AOM w MS Connectors Cable Ground connect at or near AOM No Connection TB2 A DC Common GRD TB2 B Return Pulse TB2 C 15 Vdc TB2 D Interrogation Pulse TB2 E 12 Vdc TB2 F L Jj J1 NOTE TB3 K DC Common TB3 J 15 Vdc TB3 H 15 Vdc Optional 24 Vdc Optional AOM outputs TB1 B
103. from affecting the system performance 5 Make sure the power supply is off Complete the cable connections at the power supply CAUTION The input to the receiver electronics should be a passive resistive device to prevent damage to the AOM First make sure there is no voltage present on the receiving device input connections Then complete the cable connections to the receiving device NOTE Do not route the J1 cable near high voltage sources Strain Relief Only Connect the cable to the TB1 and TB3 terminals on the AOM MS Connector Only Connect the cable to the J1 connector on the AOM 10 3 J1 Connections for AOM The AOM is provided with either a strain relief connector which accepts a pigtailed connection directly into terminals blocks located inside the AOM enclosure or a threaded MS connectors Tables 10A through 10F below indicate the appropriate connection to make for either configuration Make sure that you fol low the appropriate table for your specified options AOM w MS Connectors AOM w Strain Relief Connectors TB1 TB3 SHEEEEE TT ABCDEFG HJK Figure 10 2 AOM w Strain Relief and MS Connectors Table 10A Standard J1 Connections Strain Relief Connection MS Connector Pin Designation J 1 Function TB1 A D B E TB3 H A J B K C Table 10B J1 Connections w Velocity Output Option Strain Relief Connection MS Connector Pin Designation J 1 TB1 A D B C E D
104. groove is provided at the base of the transducer hex head for pressure sealing Temposonics uses MIL standard MS33514 for the O ring groove Refer to MIL standard MS33649 or SAE J514 for machining of mating surfaces Use O ring number MS28778 8 or equal 3 The nul space is customer specified at full retraction according to the installation design and cylinder dimensions Ensure the magnet can be mounted at the proper null position 4 The piston head shown in Figure 3 9 is typical For some installations depending on the clearances it may be desired to countersink the magnet 5 A chamfered rod bushing should be considered for strokes over 5 feet 1 5 meters to prevent wear on the magnet as the piston retracts The bushing should be made from teflon or similar material 6 A nylok self locking insert is provided on the transducer threads An O ring groove is provided at the base of the transducer hex head for pressure sealing 7 The recommended bore for the cylinder rod is 1 2 inch 13 mm The transducer rod includes a 0 44 inch 12 mm end plug a flush end plug is available Use standard industry practices for machining and mounting of all components Consult the cylinder manufacturer for applicable SAE or MIL specs CAUTION DO NOT attempt to loosen the end plug on the transducer If this plug is loosened or removed reseal it with Loctite and torque the plug until it is properly seated against the end of the pipe
105. is grounded Only one circuit earth ground should be used to prevent ground loops Refer to Figure 4 5 at the end of this section for a full system grounding diagram Straln Rellef Only Fabricate the J1 cable and prepare the cable as described earlier Identify the connections to TB1 and TB3 Refer to Figure 4 2 or 4 3 for velocity output to determine the appropriate J1 connections MS Connector Only Fabricate the J1 cable Refer to Tables 4 1 through 4 3 to determine the appropriate J1 connections Solder the connections to the type MS 3106 A 14S 5S connector supplied with the AOM Use any cable capable of maintaining the signals for the required length Ensure the solder connections are clean and free of excessive solder Use heat shrink over the solder connections to prevent the pins from shorting Identify the wires at the other end of cable for connections to the power supplies and the receiving device Test the cable for shorts NOTE Make sure that the power supply can provide 15 Vdc at 250 mA and 15 Vdc at 65 mA use a bipolar power supply The power supply should provide less than 1 ripple with 1 regulation The power supply should be dedicated to the transducer system to prevent noise and external loads from affecting the system performance Make sure the power supply is off Complete the cable connections at the power supply Wiring B Displacement Output A Displacement Output Figure 4 2
106. measures the position of a external magnet to a high degree of precision The system measures the time interval between an interrogation pulse and a return pulse The interrogation pulse is transmitted to the transducer The return pulse is created by the magnet which is located at the position to be measured The time difference between pulses is converted to a natural binary or BCD direct digital output signal The direct digital output system components include a linear displacement transducer LDT a digital interface box DIB and a digital counter card When supplied as a scaled system these system components are matched and factory calibrated to provide an exact discrete resolution ATL aii ka JL Digita Commer Caw a v Figure 1 1 Linear Displacement Measurement System Functional Description l 1 Temposonics normally supplies a full digital system consisting of all three system components If the counter card function is performed in a digital computer programmable controller or motion controller such as the MTS Motion Plus TDC series controller a half digital system is often supplied The half digital system consists of the LDT and digital interface electronics only with system variables factory set to customer specifications 1 1 Transducer LDT The interrogation pulse travels the length of the transducer by a conducting wire threaded through the hollow waveguide The waveguide is spring loa
107. modified for pulse buffering and extension cable can be used as described below NEMA 4 and 6 Ruggedized Transducers All ruggedized transducers require an extension cable with mating connection supplied by MTS Sensors or by the buyer If the factory supplied cable is 5 feet or longer the interface box has been modified for 100 foot drive capability and you may use a cable up to 100 feet long If the cable supplied is less than 5 feet long do not attempt to extend the cable further Extension Cable The extension cable is fabricated from Belden number 9931 9730 or optionally Belden 83506 teflon covered cable Substitutes are not acceptable The maximum cable length is 100 feet Construct the extension cable using the color codes shown in Table 3 1 or order from MTS Sensors Division 3 11 Table 3 1 J2 Connections Wire Color Code Integral Cable or Belden 9931 Belden 9730 83506 Extension Cables wire shield Black 8lue Interrogation pulse to transducer OC Common Ground L NER EZ cu l CONES ERR 70 Return pulse from transducer 1919 12WC eae ER Red Red Cable Grounds Cable shields are grounded at one end of cable only Integral cable shield is connected to circuit ground within transducer head Extension cable shield should be connected to ground at the electronics box connector only Apply ground by separate connection to earth ground or by connecting to pin B on the connect
108. must be located nearer the sensor head than SP2 SP1 and SP2 can have output values between 10 V and 10 V Switch S1 ON PROG SP1 Programming 1 Move the magnet to the desired SP1 position 2 Hold the programming switch in Position 1 until the RUN LED begins to flash 8 seconds Programming Mode is set up 3 Momentarily toggle the programming switch to Position 1 and release and repeat until ZERO SC become lit 4 Hold the programming switch in Position 2 until SC begins to flash 3 seconds ZERO is also lit 5 Enter the desired analog out at SP1 using the BCD switches S1 least significant bit S5 most significant bit 6 Hold the programming switch in Position 2 until SC is lit 3 seconds ZERO is also lit 7 The output value at SP1 is now stored NOTE Setting up a value outside the valid voltage range will be detected and SC will flash rapidly to indicate an error SP2 Programming 1 Move the magnet to the desired SP2 position 2 Hold the programming switch in Position 1 until the RE LED begins to flash 3 seconds ZERO is also lit 3 Enter the desired analog out at SP2 using the BCD switches S1 least significant bit S5 most significant bit 4 Hold the programming switch in Position 2 until SC is lit 3 seconds ZERO will no longer be lit 5 Hold the programming switch in Position 1 until the RUN LED is lit 3 s
109. on the front panel of the TDU for about 6 seconds The TDU will respond by displaying the current Gradient value 2 Release the Gradient push button 3 Use the right or left push buttons labeled Gradient and Zero respectively to increase or decrease the gradient value The Gradient for each Temposonics transducer is identified on the label attached to the transducer 4 To exit the Gradient Mode and to set the new Gradient value press both front panel push buttons simultaneously Release both push buttons as soon as the screen goes blank The TDU will respond by returning to its normal operating mode 8 OFFSET ADJUST MODE The Offset Adjust Mode allows you to enter an offset in the displayed output To enter this mode position the transducer s magnet at the desired location following the steps below l Press and hold the right push button labeled Gradient for approximately 6 seconds The TDU will respond by showing the gradient currently in use SW1 OFF disables this function While depressing the right push button Gradient press and release the left push button Zero The display will go blank Release the right push button Gradient The display will flash the magnet position This indicates the Offset Adjust Mode is active Use the right or left push button until the desired position value is displayed Note that if either push button is depressed for approximately 20 seconds a rapid val
110. output to read in inches millimeters etc The scale factor for unscaled systems is not a discrete number of inches per count but should be within 0 2 of the specified resolution for 27 28 MHz systems For example an unscaled system specified for 0 001 inches per count may have a scale factor of 0 00002 inches per count approximately Similarly an unscaled BCD output may have a scale factor of 1 002 inches per inch of reading This does not effect resolution but will vary the counts at any particular point on the stroke Interchanging system components which do not have the same serial number will also result in an unscaled output 4 4 2 Spare Parts and Inventory Considerations The zero can be set on the counter card using DIP switches An externally interrogated DPM or a counter card can be used as a common spare However a system calibration should be per formed after any system component change 19 5 Digital System Adjustments The Temposonics measurement systems do not require service or re calibration under normal use The systems sensing elements are non contacting and the components are solid state Performance will not degrade or drift over time Digital systems have a zero adjustment only They do not have field adjustments for scale purposes The output is factory set during final calibration by selection of the counter card crystal frequency and zero preset If a system configuration change requires a alternate res
111. position of an external magnet to measure displacement with a high degree of accuracy and resolution Using the principle of magnetostriction see Section 1 1 below the Temposonics II LDT measures the time interval between the initiation of an interrogation pulse and the detection of a return pulse A variety of interface devices use the data derived from these two pulses and generates an analog or digital output to represent position 1 1 Theory of Operation Magnetostriction The interrogation pulse travels the length of the transducer by a conducting wire threaded through a hol low waveguide The waveguide is spring loaded within the transducer rod and exhibits the physical prop erty of magnetostriction When the magnetic field of the interrogation pulse interacts with the stationary magnetic field of the external magnet a torsional strain pulse or twist is produced in the waveguide This strain pulse travels in both directions away from the magnet At the end of the rod the strain pulse is damped within the dead zone At the head of the transducer two magnetically coupled sensing coils are attached to strain sensitive tapes The tapes translate the strain pulse through coils to an electrical return pulse The coil voltage is then amplified in the head electronics before it is sent to various mea suring devices as the conditioned return pulse External reference magnet Reference magnetic field Strain
112. readjustment of the supports is recommended if the magnet contacts the transducer rod 3 Move the permanent magnet full scale to check that it moves freely and does not rub against the transducer If the magnet does not move freely you can correct this by mounting a support bracket to the end of the tranduc er Long transducers may need additional supports to be attached to the transducer rod Transducer supports are described later in this section 2 1 Types of Transducer Supports Long transducers 48 inches or longer may require supports to maintain proper alignment between the transducer rod and the permanent magnet When transducer rod supports are used special open ended permanent magnets are required Transducer supports attached to the active stroke length must be made of a non ferrous material thin enough to permit the permanent magnet to pass without obstruction Because the permanent magnet does not enter the dead zone supports connected within the dead zone may be made of any material The main types of supports are loop channel and guide pipe supports 2 1 1 Loop Supports Loop supports are fabricated from non ferrous materials thin enough to permit free movement of the magnet Loop supports are recommended for straight transducers and may be spaced apart approximately every three feet They may be used alone or with channel supports Figure 2 4 illustrates the fabrication of a loop support Front View Side View
113. tape Va Bias magnet Waveguide Sensing coil Conducting element Waveguide Interaction of magnetic fields causes waveguide to twist A Magnetic field from interrogation pulse bS Waveguide enclosure Figure 1 1 Waveguide Interaction 1 2 Temposonics II LDT Specifications for Sensors lt 180 Inches Parameter Specifications Input Voltage 12 to 15 Vdc Current Draw Transducer Only 15 Vde at 100 mA maximum 25 mA minimum current draw varies with magnet position maximum draw occurs when magnet is at 2 in 50 6 mm from the flange and minimum update time is being utilized Transducer with Analog Personality M 0dule APM 13 5 Vde to 15 Vde at 190 mA maximum 115 mA minimum Analog Output M odule AOM 15 Vde at 250 mA 15 Vde at 65 mA Displacement Up to 25 feet 7620 millimeters Dead Zone 2 5 inches 63 5 millimeters for stroke lengths up to 179 9 in Electronics Enclosure IP 67 Non linearity lt 0 0596 of full scale or 0 002 inch 0 05 mm whichever is greater Resolution 1 gradient x crystal freq mHz x circulation maximum resolution 0 006 mm or 0 00025 in Repeatability Fquals resolution Hysteresis 0 0008 inch 0 02 mm maximum Update Time Resolution and Stroke dependent Minimum Stroke specified in inches 3 x 9 1 us Operating Temperature Head Electronics 40 to 150 F 40 to 66 C Transducer Rod
114. the cylinder rod is 1 2 inch 13 mm The transducer rod includes a 0 375 inch flush 9 53 mm end plug Use standard industry practices for machining and mounting of all com ponents Consult the cylinder manufacturer for applicable SAE or military specifications 2 250 in Minimum Dia 2 250 in Minimum Dia Specifies Surface B Specifies Surface B O A 0 005 in Dia FIM lt 0 875 in Dia 0 0 3 4 16 UNIF 3B Thread See Notes 3 And 4 3 4 16 UNJF 3B Thread See Notes 3 and 4 2 125 uy R L 0 094 in S _ asch EM 0 030 in 0 010 R 0 500 gt See Note 8 0 094 in REF Key FIM Full Indicator Movement 459455 gt PD Pitch Diameter 0 020 in R Maximum Blind Thread Design Detail C NOTES 1 Dimensions and tolerances based on ANSI Y14 5 1982 2 MTS has extracted all pertinent information from MS33649 to Generate this document 3 PD must be square with surface B within 0 005 FIM across 2 250 dia minimum 4 PD must be concentric with 2 250 dia within 0 030 FIM and with 0 769 dia within 0 005 FIM 5 Surface texture ANSI B46 1 1978 6 Use o ring MTS part number 560315 for correct sealing 7 The thread design shall have sufficient threads to meet strength requirements of material used 8 Finish counter bore shall be free from longitudinal and spiral tool marks Annular tool marks up to 32 micro inch
115. the three perfor mance modes Continue to press and release the SW2 button until the voltage output indicates the voltage associated with the correct mode for your application Once the correct voltage is displayed press and release the SW1 button to accept the mode setting The APM acknowledges by producing an output voltage of approximately 4 2 volts Press and release the SW1 button to enter the Set Point 1 setup mode The APM will acknowledge by producing an output voltage of about 2 1 volts At this point you can use the SW1 and SW2 buttons to choose the voltage to assign to Set Point 1 Pressing and holding the SW1 button causes the output voltage to move in the positive direction pressing and holding the SW2 button causes the output voltage to move in the negative direction If either button is held for more than five seconds the output voltage will begin to change more quickly Release the button when the desired output voltage is displayed on the digital volt meter For testing purposes it is not necessary to perform this step It can be skipped entirely since it only assigns the final voltage to the Set Point To complete the setup for Set Point 1 press and release both buttons simultaneously Move magnet while looking at the output voltage If output voltage changes program has been locked in suc cessfully If output voltage does not change put magnet back to the setpoint position and press both but
116. this by mounting a support bracket to the end of the position sensor Long sensors may need additional supports to be attached to the sensor rod Transducer supports are described later in this section 4 2 Types of Sensor Supports Long sensors 48 inches or longer may require supports to maintain proper alignment between the sensor rod and the permanent magnet When sensor rod supports are used special open ended permanent magnets are required Transducer supports attached to the active stroke length must be made of a non ferrous material thin enough to permit the permanent magnet to pass without obstruction Because the permanent magnet does not enter the dead zone supports connected within the dead zone may be made of any material The main types of supports are loop channel and guide pipe supports 4 2 1 Loop Supports Front View Side View Loop supports are fabricated from non ferrous materials thin enough to permit free movement of the magnet Loop supports are recommended for straight position sensors They may be used alone or with channel supports Figure 4 3 illustrates the fabrication of a loop support NX Transducer Rod Figure 4 3 Loop Support 11 NOTE When open magnets are used ensure the sensor rod remains within the inside diameter of the magnet throughout the length of the stroke If the sensor rod is allowed to enter the cut out area of an open magnet the output signal could attenuate or be los
117. to provide the desired resolution counts per inch The leading edge of the pulse duration signal enables the counter registers and the trailing edge triggers a latch pulse to download the count into the output registers The latch pulse is normally available for the receiver device to interpret as a data valid signal normally low data valid TTL level high data invalid The latch pulse frequency is the same as the interrogation frequency and the duration is nominally 1 microsecond Refer to Figure 3 5 1 3 Scaling of the counter card is accomplished by matching the counter card crystal frequency to the gradient of the transducer to provide 0 001 inch 0 0005 inch etc per count Unscaled systems may require scaling within the receiver device depending upon desired accuracy W0831212E11 10 Pp de ea bei as E med lb Figure 1 3 Digital Electronics 1 4 1 3 1 Scaling In most cases the system supplied is a scaled system Scaling refers to the selection of system component variables so that the natural binary output represents a discrete number of inches per count such as 0 002 inch 0 001 inch or 0 0005 inch per count For BCD outputs scaling means that the output reads directly inches mm etc and need not be corrected mathematically The system variables that are matched include the transducer stroke the number of recirculations the null point and the counter card crystal oscillator clock The transduc
118. to the known measured positions that will be repeated during system operation Observe and record each reading Compare each observed reading to the measured reading and record results Use the observed readings in software programming as the set point or control points For greater system accuracy repeat this step and average the readings NOTE To obtain maximum system accuracy perform the above procedures at or near the actual system operating conditions 3 30 4 For systems that are used for continuous readings or variable set points apply the scale factor in Step 2 to software programming so that each reading is multiplied by the scale factor consult receiver device manual Continue to Step 5 Move the magnet to a known measured position at or near half of stroke Observe the reading and compare to the measurement If the reading varies by more than 0 05 full stroke repeat Step 2 using a different measurement near full stroke Check the new scale factor by performing Step 5 again NOTE To obtain maximum system accuracy several scale factors should be calculated using different measurements and the factors should be averaged Readings should be taken at or near actual system operation conditions If the readings do not relate to the stroke position or appear erratic refer to Section 4 for troubleshooting information 3 31 4 1 General 10 11 12 Will cause erratic or unstable
119. wu 09 2 voodoo SuueisKS Sin 86610 uOiD40d 0 SujoiS4 SI W JO xJDuu8pD4 peJj3js ba D JJO SjoSu9 sS gS2luosoduuol JINGOW C6Z AN 9 gt 9 9 6 9 9 9 6 9 9 9 G G G S GS S S S 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 S G IUUUUUUUUUUUUU LJLILILILIE JEJE JE LL L LILI OUOUUOOUOOO pe OZ0106 w ps VAIN ONY Mu DS tl mr mmo e wn us Sin 66610 Lust IteVgul wo9u0du07 tues SIM 10 x uepor PIPED Su SSUES e 2rvOSODUS BBLISZ N d SIN TOL 403 3d SO 1ON3 VW3N ercpcp ca w E St wi AKT wau it GP w IN E A E mI DRAW APD 0001 APD 0002 APD 0003 APD 0004 A D S REV Temposonics Technical Notes _AOM WIEST VDC FOR VELOCITY AP 0022 8 28 1994 Index DECRIPTION CROSSREF DATE NAME WIRING OF 4 20mA GND UNGND 12 8 1994 DDB TEMPO II PIN OUTS ALL VERSIONS 11 18 1994 DDB CALVERT MFG CABLE RB TO SRH 11 29 1994 DDB HUSKY RB TO SRH RETRO PULSE AP O109 11 23 4994 DDB HUSKY RB TO SRH RETRO PULSE AP 0108 12 1 1994 DDB COE CABLE WIRING TO DIB BOX 11 29 1994 DDB COE CABLE WIRING FOR NEUTER AP 0106 12 2 1994 X DDB TEMPO II ANALOG TO DIGITAL AP 0103 8 19 1994 DDB TEMPO ANA DIG AB 1771QB AP 0165 8 19 1994 SM
120. 0 T3 Counter Card Enabled Oscillator Pin 6 of U3 Counter Card Latch Pulse pin 24 Nominal 1 psec Optional F 12 psec Counter Card Output G Data Valid Conditions Data Invalid T3 9 05 psec inch x N x position 4 5inches approximate LA A1 7 Figure 4 2 System Level Signal Timing 9 Sensors Division Temposonics Brand Linear Displacement Transducer System with Direct Digital Output Supplement The following procedures were developed after the printing of the Temposonics Brand Linear Displacement Transducer System with Direct Digital Output manual This publication is designed to be used as a supplement to Section IV Troubleshooting NOTE The MTS Customer Service Department should be consulted before attempting any repairs in the field Failure to consult MTS will void the warranty 4 5 Power Supply Check 1 Disconnect DIB from 10 pin connector 2 Tum power supply on and check the following voltages on J1 10 pin mating connector with respect to pin A gnd pin H 15Vdc B 15Vdc C 5Vde 3 If voltages are correct turn power off and connect 10 pin back to DIB 4 6 Digital Interface Box DIB 1 With power off disconnect transducer from DIB 2 Turn power on Check the following voltages on pin B gnd on J2 6 pin of the DIB Pin A 12 to 15Vdc D 13 5 to 15Vdc F 11 5 to 12Vde 3 If any voltage is missing or is not within specification send the DIB to the f
121. 0 00503 mm C Operating Temperature Head Electronics 40 to 150 F 40 to 66 C Transducer Rod 40 to 185 F 40 to 85 C Operating Pressure 3000 psi continuous 8000 psi static Output Impedance 4702 Specifications are subject to change without notice Consult MTS for verification of specifications critical to your application 1 3 Temposonics II LDT Specifications for Sensors 180 Inches Below is a list of specifications that pertain to Temposonics II transducers with active stroke lengths of 180 inches 4572 mm to 300 inches 7620 mm The below specifications apply only to sensors 180 to 300 inches in length Specifications not listed below may be found in section 1 2 above Parameter Specifications Input Voltage e Maximum 15 Vdc 5 at 100 mA e Minimum 15 Vdc at 25 mA current draw varies with magnet position maximum draw occurs when magnet is 2 inches 50 8 mm from the flange and minimum update time is being used Dead Zone 3 in 76 2 mm Cable Length e Maximum cable length for neuter version transducer i e Temposonics Il without an integrated Personality Module which requires the use of external interface electronics Analog Output Module Digital Interface Box or other signal conditioners is 250 ft Magnet Requirement Part Numbers 201554 201553 251416 201542 2 Temposonics II LDT Installation Before beginning installation be sure you know the following dimension
122. 0 5 Red Power provided by MK292 15 10 C32 6 Black Ground No Connection 7 Drain shield Drain Wire No Connection 8 N A N A Figure 4 2a Figure 4 2b Integral Connector Hanging Connector Connection Type C Connection Type H or J External View External View 4 1 3 Temposonics L Series Position Sensors with Start Stop Output CAUTION W hen wiring Temposonics L Series sensors DO NOT connect DC ground to the cable shield or drain wire Table 4 C 1 Connections Temposonics L Series Position Sensor with RG Connector M K292 Connection Pin No Wire Color Function C28 1 Gray Gate C27 2 Pink Gate C24 3 Yellow Interrogation C25 4 Green Interrogation C2 S Red or Brown Power supplied by MK292 24 Vdc 37 6 White DC Ground No Connection NN Figure 4 3 RG Connector Table 4 C 2 Connections Temposonics L Series Position Sensor with MS Connector M K292 Connection Pin No Wire Color Function C32 A White DC Ground B No Connection C28 C Gray Gate C27 D Pink Gate GZ E Red Power supplied by MK292 24 Vdc f No Connection G No Connection H No Connection C24 J Yellow Interrogation C25 K Green Interrogation Figure 4 4 MS Connector Mating Connector P N 370013 Table 4 C 3 Connections Temposonics L Series Position Sensor with RB Connector M K292 Connection PinNo
123. 0 Inches 2 1 3 Temposonics Il LDT Specifications for Sensors 180 inches 2 2 TEMPOSONICS Il LDT INSTALLATION 3 2 1 Types of Transducer Supports 5 2 1 1 Loop Supports 5 2 1 2 Channel Supports 6 2 4 3 Guide Pipe Supports 6 22 Open Magnets 2 3 Spring Loading and Tensioning 7 2 4 Cylinder Installation 7 25 Installing Magnets 10 3 TEMPOSONICS Il WIRING 11 4 TROUBLESHOOTING THE LINEAR DISPLACEMENT TRANSDUCER 12 5 GROUNDING 13 6 INTRODUCTION TO ANALOG SYSTEMS 14 61 Specifications of Analog System Components 15 6 1a Analog Personality Module APM 15 6 16 Analog Output Module AOM and Analog Output Card 15 7 ANALOG PERSONALITY MODULE 16 Jl Performance Modes 16 7 2 APM Programming Procedure 18 INSTALLING THE ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE AOM 21 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE ADJUSTMENTS 22 9 1 Nominal Range of Adjustments 22 9 2 Null and Full Scale Adjustments 23 9 3 Velocity Null Adjustments 24 10 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE WIRING PROCEDURES 25 10 1 Preparing Cable for Connection to the AOM 25 10 2 J1 Installation Wiring 26 10 3 J1 Connections for AOM Gi 10 4 J1 Connection to AOM with MS Connectors 29 10 5 J1 Connections 29 11 TROUBLESHOOTING THE ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE 32 11 1 General 22 11 2 Power Supply Check 32 11 3 Grounding 33 11 4 Connections ES 11 5 LDT Signals 33 12 ANALOG OUTPUT CARD 36 1 Introduction to the Temposonics Il Linear Displacement Transducer LDT The Temposonics II LDT precisely senses the
124. 0 to 150 F 40 to 66 C AU to 185 F 40 to 85 C Operating Pressure 3000 psi continuous 8000 psi static Digital Outputs absolute TTL level nominal 0 and 5V true high parallel transmission Specifications are subject to change without notice Consult MTS for verification of specifications critical to your application 1 3 Specifications for Temposonics II LDTs over 180 Inches Below is a list of specifications that pertain to Temposonics II transducers with active stroke lengths of 180 inches 4572 mm to 300 inches 7620 mm Special versions of the Analog Output Modules AOM and Digital Interface Boxes DIB are required to interface with transducers over 180 inches in length Contact an MTS Applications Engineer for details before ordering Parameter Specifications Input Voltage e Maximum 15 Vdc 5 at 100 mA e Minimum 15 Vde at 25 mA current draw varies with magnet position maximum draw occurs when magnet is 2 inches 50 8 mm from the flange and minimum update time is being used Dead Space 3 in 76 2 mm Cable Length e Maximum cable length for neuter version transducer i e Temposonics Il without an integrated Personality Module which requires the use of external interface electronics Analog output Module Digital Interface Box or other signal conditioners is 250 ft e Maximum cable length for Temposonics ll transducers with Personality Modules RPM 1640 feet 500 meters using
125. 174 60 201 60 203 40 205 20 SW3 1 bk Q co co cO 2 C 18 00 32 00 160 00 162 00 CO 192 00 194 00 224 00 226 00 228 00 cO CO CO 2 ms 281 60 550093 B Page 5 of 5 O TIT TIT TIT T TI TI T n mimiz CO TH TI TT TI Tl 12 80 28 80 51 20 102 40 105 60 153 60 156 80 204 80 208 00 256 00 259 20 307 20 310 40 358 40 361 60 364 80 409 60 MTS Pe INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS KAUL D RS422 PERSONALITY MODULE Installing an RS422 Personality Module RP CAUTION The RPM is a static sensitive device and should be treated as such MTS recommends a static wrist wrap be worn during installation and that these procedures are conducted in a clean environment 1 Place the transducer hex in a vise 2 Unscrew the cover using hand pressure only Note that cover has right hand ges threads A specially designed cover wrench is available from MTS warranty and error free future replication orders install this label as instructed in Step 9 CAUTION Hands must be clean Ensure that no foreign material contacts the inside components 3 Once the cover is removed clean the inner threads of the cover and bracket with a lint free cloth Spray ONLY the cover threads with Sherwin Williams 00217 Seew Holes Teflon spray 4 Remove the RPM from the static sen
126. 2 u Ee ER E EE 1 ZA SD LOBO TENA ONN a yu u u u uu uQ an m y 12 A Cylinder IM OE uuu u 13 A GRSA EI LEE 14 5 CA CHIS d ER 15 51 Factory Mutuak Control DraWiN u u uuu u hi 15 5 2 Analog Systems Power Supply and Sensor Connections 17 5 2 1 Analog output Module Output Connections TB1 21 5 3 Digital Systems Power Supply and Sensor Connections 22 5 4 MK 292 Digital Output Module Connectons 23 GENERAL INFORMATION MTS PHONE NUMBERS To place orders Contact your local distributor or call 1 800 633 7609 or 919 677 0100 Application questions 1 800 633 7609 service 1 800 248 0532 Fax 919 677 0200 SHIPPING ADDRESS HOURS MTS SYSTEMS CORPORATION Monday Thursday sensors Division 8 00 a m to 6 30 p m EST or EDT 3001 Sheldon Drive Friday Cary North Carolina 27513 8 00 a m to 4 30 p m EST or EDT 1 INTRODUCTION Temposonics position sensors can be used in hazardous environments when connected to approved safety barriers Factory Mutual approval permits the use of intrinsically safe Temposonics position sensors in Class I Division 1 Groups A B C and D hazardous locations see Table 1A below Table 1A Hazardous Location Classifications Flammable Gases or Vapors May exist because of repair or maintenance operations or leakage e Release concentrati
127. 2 feet of the LDT assembly systems supplied after 3 1 88 within 100 feet 3 2 Yj Ki SS ww NN N ide in 7 1 8 in min n i mr i Figure 3 2 Ferromagnetic Material Mounting Specifications T TW 11 5 eem aT TY d gege 033 mw 6 amn 0 15 da 19 2 en 0 M in da 22 0 ml sa 15 4a om Model SRO 12 1 og Van 122 wer pn 201552 Model SR 12 pn_201542 ei 3 Megrem 93 mw Pt 7 9 eent 212 n sas L8 om 7 9 dom tech 06 177 da 4S mh m K3 m da 41 3 mj tof 4 Magnes Figure 3 3 Types of Magnets 6 Mount the digital counter card within 300 feet of the interface box The card may be mounted in a standard card cage or can be surface mounted using standoffs Allow at least one inch on each side of the counter card for proper spacing It is best to mount the card so that the edge connector is accessible for signal level testing NOTE The counter is matched to the transducer by serial number Do not interchange counter cards refer to System Component Matching Consult MTS Sensors Division for longer distances 3 2 2 Types of Transducer Supports Loop Type Support Long transducers more than 4 feet long may require supports to maintain proper alignment between the transducer rod and the permanent magnet All flexible transducers require supports to maintain the design shape When transducer rod supports are used special permanent magnets are required Transducer
128. 2 uj UMOUS uonosodog swejs S SIN 86610 uonoJodjo Swa s S SIW jO 4CuupPOJ D mipbai b am SjOSU9 goluOSOOuuo JINGOW LNdLNO JONY XOG 23 28211 7711910 Su EEE TL er C70 Ime y SI00 N d SL 0193NNOO 9NUYMW ZT 1004 N d SIN YOLDSNNOD 9NUYN If sam Samu ww Cal o Sz 0 op vw Z VO ww Zit ul reo TEE 10129uuo GOI SZISZLICSW d9 Srlveoicsn ooo oooo ooo dp ww Zi Ul 898 ww 9 1 UI gcc ww Cu w 90 0 T ww weit ww G vy t um S41 u0nD3 od209 u s S SIN 8661 uono40d 0 u3 amp S SIW jO WOWSPOI pi5 O ap sosuos gS2 UOSOduue XO8 3OV383LlNI WLISIG r gt 610106 e saa 31noon ZEZ xW ww BZ1 90 G P109 61 6 Z HIN L DCH sg apon ejQojunow 4204 EI ww v 8zi Z6Z YIN e 90 S ODOR OOOO MII ww O21 u L9 uodo tu3j 6 Sin 8661 Q vornosods0D Suj91S S SIN ID WOUWDPON pasaja ap S 0SUS 5oUOSOduuo JINGOW ZEZ AN ww soe ul 961 Daze Z ot se 610106 oz TINGON CEC HIN Auo ZEZHN VOIBIAA paoOQ vun SEN jO 49PIOH PJO QJn iaia wisi n Z6ZOLE N d SIN J9pioM pio9 0 n3 ZEZHW Sau og Ut GZL O 1OH bununow Z6Z WN jo dol b di j E III NL EI ww Q 8i1 MI G9 ww Orit UI Cp LCCH willl WALT civ HIT E icy D gt zeo ww 0 91 Wi gc 9 Gr k E ww Q Sgi ww 099 oe
129. 25 in dia 41 3 mm 0 44 in 11 2 mm opening 90 cut out D 0 625 in 15 9 mm O D 2 46 in 63 25 mm Thickness 0 375 in 9 5 mm Part No 201554 1 of 4 holes each 0 182 in dia 4 6 mm I D 0 75 in 19 05 mm oe 0 D 2 49 in 63 25 mm on 1 625 in dia 41 3 mm Thickness 0 375 in 9 5 mm Part No 251416 Part No 201542 1 of 2 holes 0 15 in dia 3 9 mm 120 apart 90 cut out on 0 94 in dia 23 9 mm iS LD 0 53 in 13 5 mm O D 1 29 in 32 8 mm 4 holes each 0 15 in dia 3 9 mm O O on 0 94 in dia 23 9 mm 1D 0 53 in 13 5 mm O D 1 29 in 32 8 mm Thickness 0 312 in 7 9 mm Thickness 0 312 in 7 9 mm Part No 400633 Q Q 4 Holes each 3 9 mm dia 0 15 in 90 apart on 23 9 mm dia O O 094in Magnet Spacer Part No 400533 Part No 401032 I D 0 532 in 13 5 mm O D 0 685 in 17 4 mm Thickness 0 312 in 7 9 mm ID 14 3 mm 0 563 in For use with stroke lengths OD 31 75 mm 1 25 in lt 60 in Thickness 3 175 mm 0 125 I D 0 53 in 13 5 mm O D 1 0 in 25 4 mm Thickness 0 312 in 7 9 mm Part No 251298 1 1 1 in Ref gt 0 75 in 0 30 in max gt R ef Aluminum Plate A 0 80 in bonded to s eech Ref Figure 2 11 Magnet Dimensions 10 3 Temposonics ll Wiring Table 3A Connections Temposonics II Transducer with Personality Modules Temp
130. 3 3 Electronic Connections General Electronic connections are made at connectors J2 and Jl of the interface box DIB and at pins 1 to 25 of the counter card edge connector To ensure system performance to published specifications wiring procedures and selection rules must be carefully followed 3 10 The following recommendations are supplied for full digital systems which include a Temposonics brand digital counter Card For systems which use a digital counting device in the receiver computer such as MTS Motion Plus control systems the counter card is not supplied Use the following procedures in conjunction with the receiver device manufacturer s recommendations 3 3 1 Transducer Connections The LDT is supplied with 5 feet standard of integral cable Ruggedized head designs are supplied with an extension cable It is recommended to keep the transducer cable as short as possible to avoid possible noise or temperature effects on accuracy If an extension cable is required the following guidelines must be followed NEMA 1 blue cover transducers If supplied with 2 feet of integral cable systems prior to 3 1 88 then unless extension cable is specified the digital interface box has not been modified to buffer pulse transmissions Do not attempt to extend the cable without factory modifications to the interface box If supplied with 5 feet or more of integral cable systems after 3 1 88 the interface box has been
131. 3 7609 for assistance 2 Consult Application Engineering for model number when requiring custom setpoints 3 Minimum magnet spacing between Magnets 1 and 2 is 3 Application Eng Initials gt MS CORPORATIO DRAWING NUMBER DATE EE SYSTEM RPORATION TATOY Y Tr qe gt IVITS SENSORS DIVISION AP D 004 gt 10 8 99 E SEARCH TRIANGLE PARK NORTH CAROLINA 27709 Se SHEEI bk REVISIUN A KLP MTS APD 0046 Sensors Division Title Tempo 2 Manual Trim Procedure 1 25mm to 300 7620mm E S Revision Notes A First Realease 07 07 00 Reviewed amp Approved By Mike O Gorman Tooling Requirements Oscilloscope with dual trace and delay sweep capabilities 35 MHz bandwidth Tempo 2 cable test set Flat smooth non magnetized surface 2 and 3 gauge block Resistor Decade Box Hand Held Calculator Felt Tip Pen and Resistor Lead Former CAUTION When the cover is OFF the Tempo 2 transducer is a static sensitive device and should be treated as such A Static Wrist Wrap or Heel Wrap must be worn during Testing Procedure 1 The Model Number will specify the configuration and electrical stroke of the transducer and output style Connect the transducer to the Trim Station using the correct Tempo 2 cable test set NOTE the connectors on the transducer are pinned and keyed to a certain pattern and will go on only one way 2 Connect the Decade box leads to the gain resistor hole on the Waveguid
132. 3218 RESEARCH TRIANGLE PARK NORTH CAROLINA 27709 TELEPHONE 919 677 0100 Fax 919 677 0200 550018 Promed an U A OCOPYRICAIT MTS SYSTEMS CORPORATION 1989 E ET MTS TEEPA Installation and Instruction Manual Temposonics Brand Linear Displacement Transducer System with Direct Digital Output D e a Ww Www rm D D D LJ Q LD i LA im gae gun Quo Qu Quo Quo Qu pss pss 3 1 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3 3 2 4 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 4 3 4 3 4 1 3 4 2 3 4 3 4 1 4 3 4 4 Table of Contents Introduction Transducer LDT 26 46 6 e086 KA KEE PV LET i Digital Interface Box DIB Weg Digital Counter Card OO A OE RE E EN Universal Interface Box or Card ER RI Universal Counter Card System Component Changes eS EE Spare Parts and Inventory Considerations Receiver Electronics without Scaling Feature Specifications Service Installation Environmental Considerations Mechanical Installation Types of Transducer Supports ccccccccccccccccccccccsccccccces Flexible Transducer Installation ceoocoeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeese Cylinder Installation Electronic Connections General oceeeeeeeeeoeeeee Transducer Connections e e e Digital Interface Box Connections s Digital Counter Card Connections ecccccccccococce Wiring Procedure System Calibration e eeeee
133. 40 to 185 F 40 to 85 C Operating Pressure 3000 psi continuous 8000 psi static Analog Outputs absolute Standard 0 to10 Vdc other voltage outputs are available Optional 4 20 mA AOM Specifications are subject to change without notice Consult M TS for verification of specifications critical to your application 1 3 Temposohics II LDT Specifications for Sensors 2180 Inches Below is a list of specifications that pertain to Temposonics II transducers with active stroke lengths of 180 inches 5083 mm to 300 inches 7620 mm The below specifications apply only to sensors 180 to 300 inches in length Specifications not listed below may be found in section 1 2 above Parameter Specifications Input Voltage e Maximum 15 Vdc 5 at 100 mA e Minimum 15 Vde at 25 mA current draw varies with magnet position maximum draw occurs when magnet is 2 inches 50 8 mm from the flange and minimum update time is being used Dead Zone 3 in 76 2 mm Cable Length e Maximum cable length for neuter version transducer i e Temposonics Il without an integrated Personality Module which requires the use of external interface electronics Analog Output Module Digital Interface Box or other signal conditioners is 250 ft e APM 150 ft AOM 250 ft Magnet Requirement Part Numbers 201554 201553 251416 201542 Specifications are subject to change without notice Consult M TS for verification of specifications
134. 5 Position the permanent magnet for full scale position typically 2 inches from the end of the LDT assembly 6 Use a screwdriver to adjust the scale potentiometer R24 to increase or decrease the value until you obtain a DVM reading of 10 000 Vdc 7 Repeat steps 3 to 6 to check the null and full scale settings Readjust as necessary 8 Disconnect the DVM and check overall system operation If no more adjustments are necessary replace the AOM cover 23 24 9 3 Velocity Null Adjustment The AOM can be provided with an optional velocity output For those units velocity zero and span adjustments are provided The velocity zero and velocity span adjustments are factory set and should not require readjustment A velocity output signal of 0 zero volts represents a static displacement no motion A velocity output of 10 volts represents a dynamic displacement or a customer specified maxi mum velocity maximum velocity must be specified at time of order The direction of motion is indicated by the polarity of the velocity signal a positive output signal typically indicates that the permanent mag net is moving away from the transducer head unless otherwise specified for this system A negative out put signal typically indicates that the permanent magnet is moving towards the transducer head Velocity Scale Adjustment R41 Velocity Null Adjustment R40 Factory Pre set Do Not Adjust Figure 9 2 Velocity
135. 5 integrated circuit timer and the required R C network for the desired time constant Optionally an external interrogation pulse input is provided on J 2 for user interrogation and synchronization with the selected receiver device Consult MTS Sensors Division for application notes The interrogating pulse turns on a flip flop which stays on until the return pulse switches the signal off The time length of the signal is directly proportional to magnet position and after buffering within the box the pulse is sent to the counter card as the pulse duration signal refer to Figure 1 1 NOTE The pulse duration output signal is absolute and should not be confused with frequency or pulse train type signals such as provided with encoders Pulse counting techniques cannot be used Most digital interface boxes use a technique termed recirculations to improve system resolution The recirculation number 2 4 8 16 32 etc is factory set within the electronics to provide a pulse duration signal multiplier equal to the number of recirculations The technique uses return pulses to trigger additional interrogation pulses The number of recirculation pulses is determined at the time of order and should not be changed without factory consultation 1 3 Digital Counter Card The digital counter card measures the on time of the interface box pulse duration signal This is accomplished by using a crystal oscillator with frequency selected
136. 86 150 10 Blue 4 2 Hazardous Area Safe Area Figure 5 2 Analog Output Module w Strain relief Connectors 17 SYSTEM e Temposonics Position Sensor e Analog Output Module w MS Style Connectors e 26 Vdc Power Supply e 15 Vdc Power Supply 15 Vdc Power Supply Temposonics Red 3 Common zm I I Intrinsically Safe MTL 728 or iti Stahl 9001 01 280 100 10 Position Sensor Black 4 White 3 MTL 710 or 1 Green Stahl 9001 01 086 150 10 4 2 Analog Output Module Brown or range MTL 710 or 1 with MS Connectors Stahl 9001 01 086 150 10 Blue 4 2 Hazardous Area Safe Area Figure 5 3 Analog Output Module w MS Style Connectors 18 SYSTEM e Temposonics Position Sensor e Analog Output Module w Strain relief Connector and 24 Vdc power supply option e 26 Vdc Power Supply Temposonics Fed 5 Intrinsically Safe Position Sensor Black MTL 728 or Stahl 9001 01 280 100 10 4 White 3 MTL 710 or Analog Output Module Green Stahl 9001 01 086 150 10 with Strain relief Connectors 4 2 Brown or Orange Blue Stahl 9001 01 086 150 10 TB1 Outputs 4 TB3 Hazardous Area Safe Area TB2 Pin B TB3PinK TB2 Pin C Ground TB3 Pin H 26 Vdc Figure 5 4 Analog Output Module w Strain relief Connectors and 24 V Power Supply Option 19 SYSTEM e Temposonics Position Sensor e Analog Output Module w MS Style Connectors and 24 Vdc power Supply opt
137. 88in 98 6 mm gt TM 435 in 110 5 mm 13 2 mm lt 3 31 in 84 1 mm lt 4 35 in 110 5 mm 2 25 in 57 1 mm with Cover 04 E 0 5625 in Socket Head Cap Screw 2 14 3 mm 10 32 UNF 2A thread x 3 4 in Ig Recommended Figure 8 1 AOM Dimensions 1 Mount the AOM in a location within reach of the LDT assembly cable Standard systems allow the AOM to be mounted 250 feet from the LDT assembly 2 Connect cable from AOM to the LDT assembly 3 Adjust the AOM null and full scale potentiometers as described in Section 9 to compensate for any offsets due to mechanical installation 21 9 Analog Output Module Adjustments 22 This section explains how to adjust and calibrate the Temposonics II LDT system using an AOM The AOM includes adjustments for null zero and full scale span The adjustments compensate for the following e Differences between transducer gradients e Small offsets in the magnet position due to mounting e Wear in the moving parts of the mechanical system to which the magnet is attached In cases where a coupler device is used for adjusting the magnet the coupler is used for coarse adjust ments of both null and scale while the AOM is used for fine adjustments 9 1 Nominal Range of Adjustment Null Minimum 3 8 in Maximum Up to 10 of total stroke or 2 inches whichever is smaller Full scale 2 of total stroke
138. 9 PIN CONDUCTOR ASSIGNMENTS WIRE PAIRS FROM Pi NEUTER TO P2 COMPANY HUSKY PART 687412 tb WHITE 1 GROUND B SUBJECT TEMPOSONICS H REPLACEMENT CABLE BROWN lt NM AAt RETROFITTING THE SRH NEMA 4 GRAY 3 N C N C ENCLOSURE PINK 4 N C N C RED 5 VCC A REF RETROFIT CABLE FOR AOM S BLUE 6 VES GREATER THAT 12 INCHES BLACK f RET GND VIOLET 8 RET OUT C YELLOW 9 INT GREEN 10 INT NI J 2 2 00IN A 6 00 IN de 220 IN D 68171412 ID label constructed of DRAIN WIRE TWISTED WITH BROWN WIRE embossing tape approx 1 25 MAKING CONTACT TO THE ID OF THE MOLDED and heat shrink approx 2 CABLE CLAMP MS3101A14S 6P 370018 OBSOLETE SUPERCEEDED BY MPDC 0036 NOTE TWIST THE SHIELD DRAIN WIRE AND THE FRAME WIRE TOGETHER THIS T
139. 9 999 100 1001 1001 1001 1001 1001 199 999 200 0001 1001 1001 1001 1001 1001 An additional counter card is used for this range 3 20 Table 3 8 can be used to determine connections for BCD output digital counter cards To determine the applicable connections you must know the stroke length and resolution Subtract the resolution from the stroke length to obtain a maximum reading column 1 Refer to column 7 to determine the decimal equivalent of each digit knowing the desired decimal position An example is worked out in Figure 3 12 Table 3 8 BCD Output Connections 7 Pin connections Check Appropriate Column wt SET gt XS e ES Least Significant A Used only with 4 1 4 digits For 4 1 2 or more digits Sth digit is on card B 3 21 Example Order Specification Stroke 200 inches Resolution 001 inches Result Maximum reading will be 199 999 inches 200 inches this yields 5 1 4 digits where the 1 is considered 1 4 of a digit Go to column 1 and find 199999 maxreading The connections will be per 4 where the Least Significant digit is pins 8 7 14 and 13 card A The Most Significant digit is pin 12 on card B The next LSD is pins 8 7 14 and 13 on card B Pin 9 is not used due to footnote Resolution for pin 12 is 100 place for the Sth digit is 10 place etc Refer to middle column 7 The following connection table is provided for BCD output digital c
140. 96 Hold the programming switch in Position 2 until the MR LED begins to flash 3 sec SETUP The MK292 is now ready to accept the next parameter Measuring Range MR 7 5 MR Measuring Range Green LED The measuring range or stroke length of the sensor must be set accurately to opti mize the interdependence of the other parameters This value is indicated on the sen sor label as stroke and will be in either inches or millimeters NOTE Pin c14 of the M K292 permits you to select the unit of measurement i e inches or millimeters and must be wired accordingly refer to section 4 2 1 Hold the programming switch in Position 2 until the MR LED begins to flash 3 sec ADJUST 2 Enter the measuring range using BCD switches S1 S6 Example INCHES MILLIMETERS Measuring Range 120 5 inches Measuring Range 1525 millimeters Switch in Setting Switch mm Setting S1 0 1 5 91 1 0 5 92 1 0 92 10 SJ 10 93 100 S4 100 S4 1000 S5 n a S5 n a 96 n a 96 n a NOTE W hen the measuring range is set the measuring fre quency and system update time is also set Refer to the tables below to see the relationship of measuring range frequency and update time Update Time Formula Tud Lm 120 mm 13 N 36 W here NOTE Update Time in milliseconds Tud When using inches use the following Length in mm
141. A MT2TRLAZ II Figure 4 Mfg Inst No APD 0046 Rev A Doc Owner Mike O Gorman Effective Date 07 07 00 Page 3 of 6 Vpeak MIN MAX see Table 1 Vpeak DROOP see Table 2 Vuigger 1 1V Vp pulse 0 7V Vnoise 0 35V Measure 15 uS ringing from here Important test voltages on return signal 6ignalbmp Vnoise 0 35V Vref 0 00 V Trigger Point 20 uS maximum Interval for measuring interrogation pulse ringing Gignalbmp mporzant test voltages on the interrogation signal Figure 5 Table 1 Version Vpeak MIN Vpeak MAX Vpeak DROOP Vpeak MAX along Stroke Doc No APD 0046 Rev A Doc Owner Mike O Gorman Effective Date 07 07 00 Page 4 of 6 1 25mm to 300 7620mm E S 6 Move the test magnet along the entire length of the waveguide so it comes to rest next to the 2 000 gauge block as shown in Figure 2 Verify that a the return signal does not drop below the Vpeak DROOP level b the Vnoise level does not exceed 0 70V after 15 usec from the Vtrigger point on the return signal c the Vnoise level does not exceed 0 70V after 20 usec from the trigger point on the interrogation signal T Read the display on the resistor decade box If the value displayed on the resistor decade box is greater than the values noted in TABLE 2 for the stroke length being trimmed then the value
142. A CARY NORTH CAROLINA SHEET 1 OF 1 REVISION B ORIGINATOR DAVE BAKER 3 13 95 PLUG IN ANALOG OUTPUT CARD WITH LP TRANSDUCER CARD WHICH IS A DIRECT REPLACEMENT SUBJECT IF
143. ALED 0 Q lu 2 3 mm a s 0 001 m 0 075 mmi i OOla 10 75 mm lt 00003 m 0125 mm 0 004 v 0 1 mem 000023 0 006 men J 0 001 00 mm X e Other Kent MTS Semon Oron Digital Counter Card Series 80 seasar J O O LI LILI TRANSDUCER Fiet B diia of tramducm code OUTPUT FORMAT 80 s Meturel Diary par diet trpemommason 12 Pr s CO Jets 12 Bets 999 mas rg 8 Matured benary parade trama 1 i 2 KD V1 ets 14900999 mas reading LI Natural onary paradiet ramen 14 PO 92 WCD 4 vits 16 0 9999 maq reading lt Matura Dpaary par Miet Wamrewon 13 it 1 OCD lt 1 4 argots 17 pt 17999 mas resting 64 e Natural nary par nile traemmeuon 16 Pr 4 OCO 4 2 dy 16 bts 09199 mas ttr lt Natural mnary par aded Uraemmyon 17 bt lt OCD cepts 20 609 99999 mas ceoo q B6 Natural enary par atlet U aemevon 18 bn Wx KD Aw MTS to comorete code 87 e Natural benary par sie tr beymewon 19 0 99 e HMD other than above LX e Natural Denge Ask MTS to compete code 89 lt Natural benary other than above ORIENTATION 9 e Forward count Standard werwe count DATA VALIDATION O Mecrosecond Latch pulse and latch mb mout Standard 1 lt 12 Mcrosecond Latch puhe and Latch ntist out X Other of sotoall Comult MTS Semon Oron RESOLUTION SCALED lt Qilin 2 mm for metne ytrok ex 4 a 000 0 O75 mm for metne rose 1200 0 25 mm for metric stron ens 00003
144. AME 3 WHITE ORANGE GRAY NOT USED GATE DISP GND START STOP 4 ORAT GE WHITE PINK NOT USED GATE ISP OUT START STOP 5 WHITE GREE RED 15VDC 15VDC 15VDC 15VDC 6 GREEN WHITE BLUE 15VDC 15VDC 15VDC 15VDC 7 WHITE BROW BLACK RET GROUND NOT USED NOT USED NOT USED 8 BROWN WHITE VIOLET RET PULSE NOT USED NOT USED NOT USED 9 WHITE GRAY ZLLOW INT 1 INT 1 amp 2 NOT USED INT 1 10 GRAY WHITE GREEN INT 1 INT 1 amp 2 NOT USED INT 1 00 VIT e Sensors Division A prawinc NUMBER P 1J O00 Z m SE SIZE 18 94 CARY NORTH CAROLINA SHEET 1 1 REVISION B ORIGINATOR AVE BAKER 1
145. Adjustments on the AOM 10 Analog Output Module Wiring Procedures This section describes wiring procedures for analog systems that use the Analog Output Module including e 0 to 10 V displacement forward and reverse acting e 10 to 10 V displacement forward and reverse acting e Ungrounded 4 to 20 mA displacement e Grounded 4 to 20 mA displacement e Velocity Outputs e Dual Channel Outputs Connections are made between the transducer assembly the AOM the customer supplied power supply and the customer supplied receiving device 10 1 Preparing Cable for Connection to the AOM The AOM is equipped with two strain relief or two MS mil spec connectors A strain relief is used for an un terminated cable Prepare the cable as shown in Figure 10 1 It is recom mended that you tin the exposed leads to ensure a good connection Mount the cable to the AOM ready to make connections to the terminal boards TB1 TB2 or TB3 inside Be AOM Enclosure 0 25 in B in 1 in n SI SUE SMS k Male Threaded Nipple d Strain Relief Do not remove 1 Split Ring Cable Clamp Cable Seal Figure 10 Cable Preparation for Strain Relief When the AOM box is used an optional MS connector can be used with the cable Cables are available in various len ths from inventory 25 26 10 2 Jl Installation Wiring The J1 cable provides the AOM voltage inputs from the DC power supply It also provides displ
146. B at pin 15 3 19 When ordered as BCD the counter card provides a BCD output BCD code is a binary method of representing decimal numbers The BCD code for a decimal number is a string of four bit binary numbers each of which represents one decimal digit Only the following binary groups are used Decimal Binary Decimal Bina 0 0000 5 0101 1 0001 6 0110 2 0010 7 0111 3 0011 8 1000 4 0100 9 1001 For example the decimal number 8 74 is encoded in BCD as a 12 bit binary number 8 e 7 4 1000 0111 0100 8 74 1000 01110100 In many cases the BCD code for a stroke length yields a range of BCD numbers where some bits never change value For example 19 999 inches is represented in BCD by the 20 bit number 00011001 100110011001 Notice that for all values from 0 up to 19 999 the first three bits will likewise be zero This means that the remaining 17 bits are sufficient to encode a stroke of 19 999 inches that is one 18 bit counter card is sufficient Table 3 7 lists the maximum stroke length versus number of significant bits for a resolution of 0 001 inch Table 3 7 BCD Representations of Stroke X maximum stroke length in inches Required Number of Bits BCD Value of X 7 999 or 8 0111 1001 1001 1001 9 999 10 1001 1001 1001 1001 19 999 20 0001 1001 1001 1001 1001 39 999 40 0011 1001 1001 1001 1001 79 999 80 0111 1001 1001 1001 1001 9
147. Check the Power supply board to displacement sensor 4 Check the START SIGNAL on the multipoint plug of the card with an oscilloscope Minimum 2 4 V Pin c 30 depends of cycle time START Pin a 30 Minimum 2 4 V A 5 Check the STOP SIGNAL on the card s multipoint plug v Minimum 2 V Pin c 26 depends of E magnet position STOP Pin a 26 Minimum 2 V 6 The following signals must be measured at the pins of the test socket BU 1 see fig 7 page 7 Hight about 3 5 V Pin 5 depends of cycle time Hight about 3 5 V Pin 7 depends of magnet position e Pin 9 Test Socket Component side Hight about 5 V depends of magnet position 7 At the 2 testpoints TP on the board frontpanel right the actual DISPLACEMENT VALUE can be measured as an analog voltage output Please use this signal output for testing only 5 System Calibration ATTENTION All Boards are factory adjusted Following detailed instructions are for scaling to altered local conditions only or for a new setting of a neutral spare part board 5 1 Sensor Length and Cycle Time 5 2 Noise Rejection 5 3 Measuring Direction 5 4 Output of Start and End Points are variable parameters For changements of the factory calibration note the adjustment items on following pages Position of calibration components you can find on the board component side below MTS Temp
148. DISTRIBUTION PANEL GROUND AND BE LESS THAN 1 OHM TO EARTH GROUND 9001 01 086 150 10 TRANSMT amp 6 1462 590 170 9110 01 086 150 10 RECEVE 8 6 1462 590 170 9001 01 280 100 10 DC SUPPLY 28 0 1000 0 14 360 110 OR 710 TRANSMT 100 200 300 095 110 OR 710 RECEVE 100 200 300 095 128 OR 728 DC SUPPLY 280 93 Los 402 LELCON INC 1660 oD AS FF TRANSMT 7 12 2885 i2 OS ELCON INC 1660 aD AS FF_ RECEIVE 7 12 2885 42 05 ELCON INC 1680 bs P FF DC SUPPLY 287 94 012 1 ELCON INC MB4 2 8ac OR MB4 4 8uc Bac TRANSMIT 122 247 13 os ELCON INC MB4 2 8ac OR MB4 4 8oc 8ac RECEVE 122 247 13 os NO REVISION SHALL BE MADE WITHOUT NOTIFICATION OF THIRD PARTY APPROVAL AGENCY IES K 8 95 WB 2911 REDRAWN COMBINED 2 SHTS INTO 1 ADD NEW VENDOR J 8 95 WB 2974 CHANGED MODEL NUMBERS INT F 0000 TO 16 INT H 0000 TO 16 3 INT R 0000 TO 16 2 INT S 0000 TO 16 1 H 7 94 RB 2721 ADDED G 8 92 CW 2330 ADDED RESISTANCE TO NOTE lt 0 1 OHMS F 2 91 RB 1982 CHG REVISION NOTE REVISED CABLE NOTES E 1 91 RB TREDRAWN ON CAD FORMERLY IS 1020 D 3 87 3 ADDED APPROVED FOR TABLE C 4 86 ADDED OPTIONAL MTL NUMBERS B 6 85 ADDED GROUP DIV AND CLASS NOTES A IADDED CABLE NOTES amp MISC NOTES REV DAE
149. E DC GROUND J PIN 4 ORANGE WHITE STRIPE OR SOILD PINK GATE MEET TB3 J 15VDC TB3 H 15VDC TB1 B DISP GND TB1 A DISP OUT CONNECTIONS TO TDC CONTROLLER TDC CONTROLLER TRANSDUCER STRIPED SOLID FUNCTIONAL CONNECTION PIN NUMBER WIRE COLOR WIRE COLOR DESCRIPTION TO TDC MS MHTIHN PLUS 1 WHITE BLUE STRIPE WHITE DC GROUND TEMPO GND et Toc 200 IJ 2 BLUE WHITE STRIPE BROWN FRAME TEMPO GND Sb u Ph Sel le 5 8 WHITE ORANGE STRIPE GRAY GATE GATE skel em 1 esl 4 ORANGE WHITE STRIPE PINK GATE GATE en ms SIS RUN MODE Wels 5 WHITE GREEN STRIPE RED VCC 15 VDC sk POM NS AE 6 GREEN WHITE STRIPE BLUE VEE 15 VDC Se RUN JE des Slol CIS 7 WHITE BROWN STRIPE BLACK NO CONN NO CONN EIE E ee s pus i E 8 BROWN WHITE STRIPE VIOLET NO CONN NO CONN E exe exime ll i S8 So 2 els 9 WHITE GRAY STRIPE YELLOW INTERR INTERR Oe SEHR 7 10 GRAY WHITE STRIPE GREEN INTERR INTERR 3 5 Ss 1 E 4 Clear y BE Se 1 2 IO lol E Du ole Sie fo E Ent E es SS Jes Sle 5 IS MIS NOTE 1 THE GATE OUTPUT FROM THE TRANSDUCER MUST BE TERMINATED IN TWO LOCATIONS AOM TERMINAL BLOCK TB2 C AND THE OTHER GOES TO THE TDC GATE X OR Y TERMINAL STRIP 2 CIRCUIT OR REFERENCE GROUND IS ESTABLISHED BY CONNECTING THE POWER SUPPLY COMMON S 115 Vac TO EARTH GROUND PLALA FI CY a A A ISI f y Y DATE x S Sensors Division DRAWING NUMBER
150. EN USING THE R STAHL RECEIVE TRANSMIT BARRIER 9001 01 086 150 10 THE RECEIVE TRANSMIT CABLE FOR CABLE LENGTHS OF 200 TO 500 FEET BELDEN 9182 UL 2602 TWIN AXIAL SHALL BE USED THE SHIELD MUST BE GROUNDED ON BOTH ENDS THE DC SUPPLY BARRIER R STAHL 9001 01 280 100 10 WILL HAVE 20 AWG TWISTED WIRES 7 WHEN USING THE MTL RECEIVE TRANSMIT BARRIERS MTL 110 MTL 710 THE RECEIVE TRANSMIT CABLE FOR CABLE LENGTHS OF 200 TO 100 FEET BELDEN 9182 UL 2602 TWIN AXIAL SHALL BE USED TWISTED WIRES SHIELD IS NOT REQUIRED THE SHIELD MUST BE GROUNDED ON BOTH ENDS THE DC SUPPLY BARRIER MTL 128 MTL 728 WILL HAVE 20 AWG TWISTED WIRES SHIELD IS NOT REQUIRED DRAWN DATE R BARR 7 15 94 D JOHNSON TEMTS TEMPOSONICS J H TEMPOSONICS TRANSDUCER AND SAFETY BARRIER SELECTION OS FETT es 650512 c RESEARCH TRIANGLE PARK NORTH CAROLINA 27709 DO NOT TAP DEPTHS ARE MINIMUM SCALE FULL THREADS DRAWING 5 2 Analog Systems Power Supply and Sensor Connections SYSTEM e Temposonics Position Sensor e Analog Output Module w Strain relief Connectors e 26 Vdc Power Supply e 15 Vdc Power Supply 26 Vdc 15 Vdc Power Power 4 Supply Supply Temposonics Red 3 MIT Common Common E ically Safe Black Stahl 00 10 osition Sensor 4 5 White 3 MTL 710 or 1 Green Stahl 9001 01 086 150 10 4 2 l Analog Output Module ENT MTL 710 or 1 with MS Connectors Stahl 9001 01 0
151. FF DEVICE S WITH AOM BOX DIB DPM CONTRO WHEN CONTROLLER IS USED IN SYSTEM THE MAKI AND UPDATE TIME IS REQUIRED LLER J MAKE UPDATE TIME CIRCULATIONS ARE REQUIRED ON ALL SYSTEMS CIRCULATIONS ENCLOSURE STYLE IS REQUIRED ON ALL SYSTEMS 31 STRAIN RELIEF 32 0 6 PIN MS CONN 30 PLUG IN CARD NOTE THE DIB OR DPM WILL ALWAYS BE IN EXTERNAL INTERROGATION MODE BKT Rev B Add Enclosure Style chg recirculation to circulation RAWING NUMBER DATE VITE 3 ER n 192 SENSORS DIVISION size A D 00208 9 23 97 CARY NORTH CAROLINA SHEET 1 OF 1 REVISION C ORIGINATOR DDB Cross Reff AP1 0007 WIRING OF LP IO AOM BO pu
152. FOR AOM S BL 6 Tr GREATER THAT 12 INCHES BLACK RET GND VIOLET 8 RET OUT C YELLOW 9 INT 3 GREEN 10 INT 200 IN 6 00 IN ie CeO IN y O 697577 ID label constructed of embossing tape approx DRAIN WIRE TWISTED WITH MAKING CONTACT TO THE ID BROWN WIRE OF THE MOLDED 1 25 and heat shrink CABLE CLAMP MS3101A14S 6GP approx 2 370018 NOTE TWIST THE SHIELD DRAIN WIRE AND THE FRAME WIRE TOGETHER OBSOLETE SUPERCZEDED BY MPDC 0038 THIS TWISTED PAIR MUST BE BETWEEN THE CABLE CLAMP AND THE BOOT TATA lt in NOT TERMINATED M PUTNAM 7 23 96 Rev B Added Husky part to cable BKT 5 7 96 VM S sensors Division A DRAWING NUMBER A d J A P SIZE
153. G G 9 9 9 Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z 08 OZ Oy 28 08 081 Gil EE E imi 1 09 SI 09 6Z 00 8Z 00 0 Co Co Co hD D ID 2 2 O O O O O OoOO D E QE L LN INS eNS O P CO JJ Z gt ol lolol lolol lo olooj e lziz Gelb m Io Co 2 D D D JJ l iN N olo C 8 O gt mk mk k mk eh esch 1 O Z gJ lt m lmlml Iinl nini II NISN ININ 5 O JJ gt lt z w loolo Iolo lolol ej lololeolool ml lolo N lole MI Je x hal N I gt D Oo lolo e ol e Pl Ill RI i el ol joo lala lglogl lol lalalala lolol lolol lolol lal lolololo CO o DH oi NN NN INT INITNININIS KG Go E O1 N N Q Ol lolo INIA OO Fe N h e le C IO oo bal INID E55 Sl l Table 3 b INTERNAL INTERROGATION DPM PROGRAMMING SW2 SW1 N SW3 Qo CO 00 CO CO NO g B N O CO Co OO Qo CO B cO Co CO CO OO O1 Co CO NO OO CO Co I NINN OD OD OD OI OOo IRAR OO Oo 00 PO PO NH O O O O O O O O F 127 8 Update time U N 1 cAprjsxdpmNdpmprg4 xls U 28 80 57 60 86 40 88 20 115 20 117 00 144 00 145 80 172 80
154. Heavy Duty Belden 9730 Length ft Examples 25 ft 025 100 ft 100 Maximum Length 200 ft Mating Connector 1 Standard PN 370018 For use with sensor Enclosure Style 1 2 Ruggedized P N 370011 For use with sensor Enclosure Style 2 refer to Section 3 1 above and Figure 3 1 on next page 3 Ruggedized P N 370062 For use with sensor Enclosure Style 3 refer to Section 3 1 above and Figure 3 1 on next page Also this connector is available with standard cable only not compatible with Heavy Duty cable Standard Intrinsically Safe Position Sensor Pigtal Connection or Connector P N 370015 Standard Intrinsically Safe Position Sensor Pigtail Connection to Safety Barriers NEM Cable 200 ft T Standard Belden 9931 Heavy Duty Belden 9730 Cable Belden 9931 standard or Ruggedized Belden 9730 heavy duty Intrinsically S afe Position Sensor Mating Connector P N 370011 EENEG MS 3102A145 6P Cable R uggedized Belden 9931 standard ONLY Intrinsically Safe BG Position Sensor Splashproof similar to NEMA 4 Mating Connector P N 370062 DT1H 10 6PN Figure 3 1 lemposonics Intrinsically Safe Position Sensor Configurations NOTES 1 Safety Barriers are hard wired using a pigtail connection 2 Maximum cable length between the Temposonics position sensor and the safety barrier is 200 feet Table 3A Position Sensor Cable Connections CABLE
155. ICS TEC CARD THE TIME OF ORDER WITH THE UPDATE TIME AND NUMBER OF JIRES 5 VDC AT ECIRCULATIONS ANY CHANGES TO THE TEC OR THE TEMPO II m SS s e A M DG WILL AFFECT THE AOM PERFORMANCE NAD MPS OO Un SET TEC CARD FOR RECIRCULATION DISPLACEMENT OUTPUT DISPLACEMENT RETURN MTS SE A sensors Division a NUMBER A P Canc c c d b 2 MAL l5 O 5 J i V LOAL Y QI E vi K d j VPN L d 2 f 3 WI Q 5 gt OLA V uU d MLS B CARY NORTH CAROLINA SHEET 1 OF 1 Rl VISION A ORIGINATOR DAVE BAKER
156. ION B NULL41 MAGNET 1 DEAD ZONE 1 Lem STROKE 1 lU MTS lu Huti 30 MIN MAGNET 2 DEAD ZONE 2 STROKEZ2 NULL POSITION A POSITION B MAGNET 1 1 NULL STROKE DEAD ZONE ROD LENGTH 2 OUTPUT TO VDC OR mA POSITION A POSITION B MAGNET 2 1 NULL STROKE DEAD ZONE ROD LENGTH 2 OUTPUT TO VDC OR mA POSITION A POSITION B LIMITATIONS 1 A MINIMUM OF 3 INCHES OF SPACING MUST BE MAINAINED BETWEEN MAGNETS 2 NULL MUST BE GREATER THAN 2 INCHES 3 OUTPUT LIMITS ARE 0 TO 10VDC REVERSE ACTING 4 TO 2W0mA REVERSE ACTING 0 TO 20mA REVERSE ACTING 4 BOTH OUTPUTS MUST BE COMMON EITHER VDC OR mA 9 ROD LENGTHS SHOULD BE EQUAL DRAWING NUMBER gt LIS Al IPN nnao DATE L APD 0032 09 23 97 SENSORS DIVISION SIZE i CARY NORTH CAROLINA SHEET 1 OF 1 REVISION D ORIGINATOR RSM Cross Reff P1 0011 RETROFITING NEW SE BASED LP INCREASE STROKE BY ONE INCH DUE TO THE MECHANICAL DIFFERENCES IN THE SE BASED LP AND THE EARLIER VERSION LP THE BLANKING PULSE IS NOT COMPATABLE WITH THE TDU AOM AND MKZ292 A SOLUTION TO THIS PROBLEM IS TO INCREASE THE STROKE LENGTH OF THE LP BY ONE INCH AND SLIDE THE LP BODY BACK ONE INCH THIS WILL EFFECTIVLY DUPLICATE THE BLANKING OF THE OLD LP AND A
157. Il w DPM external negative interrogation 9 DC Common Temposonics Il w DPM internal interrogation 10 DC Common Temposonics Il w APM all modes Note 1 It is recommended that both the positive and negative interrogation leads be connected when using a Temposonics Il with a DPM external interrogation ONLY This will provide a differential interrogation signal which is preferred over a single ended interrogation 6 3 Digital Counter Card Connections See Appendix A of this manual for an in depth explanation on how to specify systems with digital output Tables 6E 6F and 6G show the counter card output connection tables In order to select the proper table the following order variables must be known Stroke inches mm Resolution inches mm Recirculation 1 127 Output Format BCD or Natural Binary Output Latch Pulse standard 1us optional 12 us Input Latch Inhibit Standard NOTE The latch pulse is offered on Pin 3 and the latch inhibit is offered on Pin 24 but can be switched via jumpers on the board 6 3 1 Latch Pulse The latch pulse is a nominal 1us wide pulse that is used as a data valid signal Data is invalid when the signal is high Data is valid and can be read when the signal is low The standard latch pulse can be gated with a read type pulse generated at the receiver device The user performs the gating logic external of the counter card The latch pulse is available on pin 3 o
158. J23 Gat Be Shield J26 NotUsed 26 923 115Vdc Red J7 Notused J28 20to24Vdc pe 5 3 TDU w Temposonics II amp 15 Vdc Power Supply Pin Description Leads Leads GE X ree REECH Pa ee J1 2 15Vdc Customer Provided Customer Provided White Gray Stripe White Orange Stripe Gra Orange White Stripe Pink 2 ce ce Blue White Stripe Brown 15Vdc Green White Stripe Blue J2 7 15Vdc White Green Stripe Red SE U DEE K s gt NOTES 1 Customer Provided Cable 2 Your Temposonics Il transducer may have a cable with striped leads or with solid color leads Both cables are identified in the wiring chart and have identical performance specifications Solid color leads are now standard since February 1994 6 ZERO Press the left push button on the front panel of the TDU labeled Zero Figure 2 to set the display value to U Dip Switch 1 refer to Figure 3 for dip switch locations when set to OFF disables this function The default setting for Dip Switch 1 is ON a To enter a Permanent ZERO press and hold the left ZERO push button As soon as the display reads 0 000 press the right push button Release both push buttons b To enter a Relative ZERO press and release the left ZERO push button To recover the permanent zero setting press and release the ZERO push button once again Temposonics TDU
159. LINA SHEET 1 OF 1 REVISION A cn 7 CO N tO Ol ORIGINATOR DAVE BAKER TIO CH T T TAD IT C ATI X H x 4 LI lte Geld Ns AU T V d VA Lan OUTPUT RDS TO BE CONFORMALALLY COATED 1 ALL MOOG CONTROL AOM BOXES ALL MOOG CONTROL AOM BOXES A ZQ J gt Fr H d Qo po OO IS KCN ES SN ESL mi u im CHIP MAY BE MUCH SMALLER Ol ITP UT Ke A D A 2 if ax 2 JN T CO J OW ji T G1 Vi 5 X eN RH Eed lt lt lt s A F J AY CS Ry RY RQ Uu A ON AY Ee NL awe B A B C D IH J KI we lt CE A e A D 1 DATE MI sensors Division LA DRAWING NUMBER A 1 U SIZE d aram 04 21 96 CARY NORTH CAROLINA SHEET 1 OF 1 REVISION A ORIGINATOR BRIAN THOMPSON Ad ka NOTE 1 TOLERANCE FOR DIMENSION A 2 SOLDER ALL 6 JUNCTION 3 LOCATE
160. M The AOM generates the interrogating pulse senses the return pulse and develops an analog output signal ANALOG SYSTEM Analog Output Module Averaged DC Output 15 Vdc Input and de Output Cable Provided by Customer Interrogation pulse Rod Transducer return pulse Figure 1 1 Linear Displacement Transducer System Introduction Specifications 15 Vdc 42 at 250 mA with lt 1 ripple 15 Vdc 2 at 65 mA with lt 1 ripple Input voltage Displacement Up to 30 feet 9 meters Nonlinearity lt 0 05 of full scale or minimum 0 002 in 0 05 mm Repeatability lt 0 001 of full scale or 0 0001 in 0 0025 mm whichever is greater Frequency response Depends on length and type of filtering 200 Hz to 50 Hz is typical for lengths of 12 in 30 cm to 100 in 254 cm respectively Wider response is available Temperature coefficient Transducer 0 00018 inch F 0 00011 inch lt 12 inches stroke 3ppmv F inch stroke transducer 5ppmv F nominal for external electronics Analog Output Module 20 ppmveF Operating temperature Transducer 40 to 180 F 40 to 82 C Analog Output Module 35 to 150 F 2 to 66 C Standard until July 1 1990 40 to 180 F 40 to 82 C Standard after July 1 1990 Operating pressure transducer rating 3000 psi 21 MPa cyclical 5000 psig 34 Pa static Output 0 to 10 Vdc and a other voltages are optional Output
161. N30139 XY NL 38 TIVMS Zuang OLI UN OI G3193NNOD SINAVI WNIS 1334 0001 OL 1334 00 FVD YOs TION NEYI SNOILJNYISNI NOIIYTIYISNI n med EMY BT evzin occef N30138 SINAVI 338 1333 00Z HI9N3 FIV Ven 3 v3H YO OMY rZ 38 TivHS 390v9 JAM 1333 OF OHIO33OX3 SHINJI 804 43401 YO 145 19 Gi 40 EHI SES GR S318v2 AiIOYdy MO 38 TIWHS SH3ubjv8 out 1um OL 03123NNOD SJ18vO It 9 23Y12 ON NG y0S 319uBY OL YdIN ISNY E E SCH EL ZI 3003 2412313 TVNOIVN JHL HIM JONVONOIOV NI OITWISN 38 TIVHS ON Q GH SI JHI FTHHHOJ Ov ERIL 9 JION 33S Q3 32NvilDvdvO xvm 5JIOR TY USE JION HOISTS OR du AHN 1 329NYI2OQNE xv Ot1 Tin Qi ro 3ONYIIOVdYO Ven AH Z 3ORYIOTIONI ven gzi im Min Men MAUL mg Mun HAHN 1134vS 3H1 JO SIN3 340034 FHL 133 L t v3sv ShOOHvZvH NI Su3i3mivd je 513S N3314 138 310N 335 ONNOUD HiNY3 0 2 8 dnOWd VAG I SSY1 33YS ATWOISNIMINI HOS Q3 ONddv 7 xh S3 4 2N39v Tw OBddY AluYd Ount JO NOUVOUHON 1Q0HIU 32v 38 TivHS NOtS 3d ON I egen 30 z ozun SION SNvyl OL 3SWd ngNi 9 310N QNOg9 Hi ONnON9 20 z un pt pa meiden aa STITT SNYUL MOUS INdINO TvNoiS d i St aam s Si EI 0301 X xv Sng A OSZ JOVLWA LN ONnos9 20 d e vw o D E xi WNION 2Q 97 ss reo m JIGYI Q3ISIAL o SAHO tO 5 38 TWHS Mise eiu an E ND ONY d31NnOm S YFINISNVYL SIMI HOM NO 0691 XOG Od ng JHL JO JrYdJ JHL N33AI39 JONYISISJN LES wt eyus3 EI ONNOWD wwIN32
162. Number of Significant Bits X BCD Value Required maximum stroke reading of X Number of Bits 7 999 8 0111 1001 1001 1001 15 9 999 10 1001 1001 1001 1001 16 19 999 20 0001 1001 1001 1001 1001 17 39 999 40 0011 1001 1001 1001 1001 18 79 999 80 0111 1001 1001 1001 1001 19 99 999 100 1001 1001 1001 1001 1001 207 199 999 200 0001 1001 1001 1001 1001 1001 21 A second Digital Counter Card is required for all values requiring 18 bits or more PROCEDURE III System Sizing BCD Output Standard Resolutions Using a 27 28 MHz Clock Crystal A 27 28 MHz clock crystal can be used to generate 0 001 in and 0 1 mm resolutions satisfying the following resolution requirements 0 1 in 0 01 in 0 001 in 1 mm and 0 1 mm For other res olutions use procedure IV Take the following steps to determine the number of bits circulations update time and counter card divider 1 Select the circulation number N from Table 4A using the calculated values Begin by using the values in the first column for counter card divider D 2 Table 4A Recirculation Values for Selected Resolution Resolution R Recirculations N D 2 Dei Remarks 0 1 in N A N A Use 0 001 in resolution and discard the two least significant digits 0 01 in N A N A Use 0 001 in resolution and discard the least significant digit 0 001 in 8 4 1 mm N A N A Use 0 1 mm resolution and discard the least signi
163. OLET 8 RET OUT C YELLOW 9 NT B GREEN 10 INT E 2 0 O 2 20 K 200 TN ay 6 00 IN de 2 20 IN Ps N 2909 8 687413 A Ed J E D J Ji Z ID label constructed of DRAIN WIRE TWISTED WITH BROWN WIRE embossing tape approx MAKING CONTACT TO THE ID OF THE MOLDED 1 25 and heat shrink CABLE CLAMP Ms3101A14S 6P approx 1 25 370018 OBSOLETE SUPERCEEDED BY MPDC 0035 THs TWIST THE SHIELD DRAIN WIRE AND THE FRAME WIRE TOGETHER THIS TWISTED PAIR MUST BE BETWEEN THE CABLE CLAMP AND THE BOOT p TAY AND NOT TERMINATED M PUTNAM 7 23 96 B Added Husky part to cable BKT 5 7 96 W Fux N n I A A N ZA f f a Sensors Division A DRAWING NUMBER APD 0004 PENES y y 6 SIZE ARY NORTH CAROLINA SHEET 1 OF 1 REVISION B ORIGINATOR DAVE BAKER 11 23
164. P sensor with start stop output Temposonics II sensors with a pulse width modulated or start stop output e Temposonics L Series sensors with a pulse width modulated or start stop output In addition to position data the MK292 generates logic outputs DATA READY and ERROR and logic input DATA HOLD An optional sub board assembly provides an analog output for recording purpos es output range 0 to 10 Vdc or 10 to 0 Vdc The MK292 can be configured as either a rack mountable card or module that can be installed in a standard 19 inch mounting rack Figure 1 1 MK292 Module version left card version right Magnet 6 7 In 1 98 in 170 mm 50 4 mm RUN eeR REC eo ZER eeh MK 292 5 06 in Module 128 4 mm 6 7 in 1 19 in 170 mm 30 2 mm O MTS O Mk 292 RUN eeR REC e oE 128 4 mm Figure 1 2 MK292 Digital Output Module Dimensions 1 1 System Configuration Temposonics Sensor with Start Stop or PWM Output E E GE MK232 d Module 5 Vdc Required for 24 Vdc Power Suppy Required TTL Output iji A Selectable BCD Binary or Gray Code Displacement Output Optional Voltage Output 0 to 10 Vdc or 10 to 0 Vdc Start Stop Output for recording purposes only Max Resolution 0 002 in 0 05 mm NOTE BCD outputs are limited to a maximum 1 stroke length of 99 99 inches 2540 mm l PWM Output Max Resolution 0 0002 in 0 005 mm Figure 1 5 Typical
165. R MS3101E 14S 5P 370011 AMPHENOL 6 PIN FEMALE ENVIRONMENTAL CONNECTOR M 3106E 145 698 ATES TO TEMPO I HEAD CONNECTOR OF STYLE 02 SRH AND RUGGEDIZED STYLES RATED NEMA 4 USED FOR FIELD FABRICATION OF EXTENTION CABLES WHEN ORDERED WITH BOX OR MATCHING IODULE CONNECTOR ALSO SEE EXPLANATION FOR 370018 ALSO USED AS AN ENVIRONMENTAL VERSION OF 370015 PART 370062 MS3116F 10 6S IS AN ENVIRONMENTAL TWIST LOCK VERSION OF THIS CONNECTOR 370018 AMPHENOL 6 PIN MALE CABLE CONNECTOR M53101A 145 6P USED FOR FIELD CABLE EXTENSION FROM TEMPO I NEMA 4 SRH TRANSDUCERS OR THEIR TEMPO II RETROFITS MATES WITH 370011 CONNECTOR MUST BE WIRED FOR POSITIVE R4 amp C4 INTERROGATION PULSE OR NEGATIVE R5 amp C5 INTERROGATION PULS PARTE 370090 MS3101E 14S 6P IS AN ENVIRONMENTAL VERSION OF THIS CONNECTOR z gt ijt 370010 AMPHENOL 5 PIN FEMALE ENVIRONMENTAL CONNECTOR MS3106 14S 5S MATES WITH AOM BOX J1 MS
166. R DETAIL C PER DETAIL D S 1 6 PIN POSITIVE LENGTH SPECIFIED ON SALES ORDER 3 00 INCHES LENGTH SPECIFIED ON SALES ORDER CABLE TERMINATION 2 6 PIN NEGATIVE LENGTH SPECIFIED ON SALES ORDER 3 00 INCHES LENGTH SPECIFIED ON SALES ORDER PER HE E 3 10 PIN LENGTH SPECIFIED ON SALES ORDER 3 00 INCHES LENGTH SPECIFIED ON SALES ORDER 4 PIGTAIL amp LENGTH SPECIFIED ON SALES ORDER 6 00 INCHES LENGTH SPECIFIED ON SALES ORDER 5 6 PIN MALE POSITIVE LENGTH SPECIFIED ON SALES ORDER 6 00 INCHES LENGTH SPECIFIED ON SALES ORDER inm E D Lu 1 pomi I 6 6 PIN MALE NEGATIVE LENGTH SPECIFIED ON SALES ORDER 6 00 INCHES LENGTH SPECIFIED ON SALES ORDER 3 272 a DETAIL B i TARE 2 R1 C 1 CONFIGURATION 6 PIN POSITIVE INTERROGATION AOM DIB RETROFIT WIRING DIMENSIONS FOR DETAIL E _ WAVEGUIDE WIRE PAIRS amp WIRES FROM TO DRV AMP BD CUT BRAID SHIELD AND L 0 06 M 0 03 P1 0 75 0 03 DRAIN WIRE AT THIS WHITE SIAE P1 1 JUNCTION 00 0 25 GND LOCATION BROWN 01 2 JUNCTION 1 00 0 25 FRAME 0 12 GRAY VAN PS UNASSIGNED 00 PINK P1 4 UNASSIGNED 00 RED P1 5 R ck 00 0 25 VCC 12V BLUE P1 6 P2 D 00 0 25 VEE 15V BLACK JUNCTION 00 0 25 AMP RETURN E 9 VIOLET NAN Pes p2 G 00 0 25 AMP OUTPUT DEIAIL C YELLOW P1 9 P2 E 00 0 25 INTRG m P1 10 NCTION 00 0 25 INTRG STRIPPING FOR 1 TO 4 CONFIGURATIONS CREEN as S A
167. Refer to Table 4 4 to determine the recom mended mating connectors for the different trans ducers Be sure to use the recommended cable for the required length Refer to Table 4 5 for the appropriate J2 connections The color code refers to cables supplied with the system Solder the connections to the MS connector supplied with the AOM Use any cable Capable of maintaining the signals for the required length Ensure the solder connections are clean and free of excessive solder Use heat shrink over the solder connections to prevent the pins from shorting 15 VDC xv m Cabie Ground Connect at or near AOM Figure 4 4 J2 Connectons Strain Relief Wiring 4 Strain Rellef Only Connect the cable to the TB2 terminals on the AOM and to the transducer 5 MS Connector Only Connect the cable to the J2 connector on the AOM and to the transducer 6 Apoly power and check the displacement readings at the system electronics Table 4 5 J2 Connections MS Connector J2 SignaVFunction p Wire Color Code Wire Color Code Integral Cable or Belden 9730 Belden 9931 wire shield 83506 Extension Cables Retum pulse from transducer sersve o interrogation Pulse to transducer 11 5 to 12Vdc 1 Cable shields are grounded at one end of the cable only transducer Cable Ground Cable Grounds 2 An integral cable shield is connected to the circuit ground within the transducer hea
168. Resolution R Recirculations N D 2 D l Remarks 0 1 in N A N A Use 0 001 in resolution and discard the two least significant digits 0 01 in N A N A Use 0 001 in resolution and discard the least significant digit 0 001 in 8 4 1 mm N A N A Use 0 1 mm resolution and discard the least significant digit 0 1 mm 2 1 You can make a note of the parameters as you go along Number of bits required Resolution R Circulations N Update Time less than ms APPENDIX B DPM Programming Procedure Asynchronous Mode NOTE DPM programming switches are pre set at the factory Only authorized OEMs are permitted to program this device Call MTS before making any adjustments to the switches REMOVING THE TRANSDUCER COVER VOIDS THE WARRANTY WARNING The DPM is a static sensitive device and should be treated as such MTS recom mendis that a static wrist strop be worn during installation and programming Also these procedures are to be conduct ed in a clean dust and moisture free environment A small flat head screwdriver should be used to program the switches See Figure B 1 for switch locations Figure B 1 DPM Switch Locations B 1 Setting Number of Recirculations SW1 and SW2 are programming switches that are used to set the number of recirculations 1 through 127 Refer to Table 2B next page NOTE The number of recirculations are speci fied by the customer at time of order
169. S mA V revers mm 0 E ES 51 Stroke length 63 5 EUN Mounting zone Small offsets in the magnet position due to mounting or wear in the moving parts of the mechanical system to which the magnet is attached can be compensate by the adjustments of 2 potentiometers in the card front panel 1 Bring Position magnet to the factory adjusted ZERO and SPAN position Setpoints SP1 and SP2 and check the outputs with help of a digital voltmeter or the connected controller 2 Adjust START position NULL if necessary by potentiometer N 3 Adjust END position SPAN if necessary by the potentiometer S To guarantee the high accuracy of the TEMPOSONICS analog measuring device that adjustments of N and S are only possible in the small range of 1 of full stroke Important Independent of measuring direction valid is The Start Position will be adjusted always with pot N The End Position will be adjusted always with pot S 2 Customized adjustment Setpoint Setpoint SP 1 SP 2 SP 1 SP 2 AN Y Examples of E n customized calibration 0 mm p Available stroke length 63 5 e N Mounting zone Fig 6 4 2 Troubleshooting Use the troubleshooting procedure in this section when operational problems are encountered Note that the following checks are only for general diagnostic purposes 1 Check the cable connections 2 Check the power supply of the board AK 288 3
170. SED LP I AP1 0011 4 3 1997 RSM APD 0034 B RETROFIT OF LA SE BASED SENSORS AP1 0012 4 4 1997 RSM APD 0035 B RETROFIT OF LP SE BASED SENSORS AP1 0013 4 11 1997 RSM _ APD 0036 B NEMA4 ENCLOSURE FOR TDU AP1 0014 4 17 1997 RSM APD 0037 B FORMED TRANSDUCER SPEC SHEET AP1 0015 4 231 997 RSM APD 0038 B SENSOR HEAD AND CONNECTION LENGTH B AP1 0016 I 8 27 1 997 __RSM APD 0039 B SENSOR COMPARISON AP1 0017 8 27 1997 RSM APD 0040 B L SERIES MEASUREMENTS AP1 0018 8 27 1997 RSM APD 0041 B PLUG IN ANALOG OUTPUT CARD WITH LP MPDC 0030 39 26 1997 RMP APD 0042 B CUSTOM SETPOINTS RH LH ANALOG 1 12 2000 KLP APD 0043 B 21 MAGNET CUSTOM SETPOINTS RH ANALOG 10 8 1999 KLP APD 0044 A CUSTOM SETPOINTS PB ANALOG 10 8 1999 KLP APD 0045 A 2MAGNET CUSTOM SETPOINTS PB ANALOG 10 8 4999 KLP APD 0046 A OLD T 2 TRIM PROCEDURE FOR REPAIR CENTERS 7 7 2000 MOG APD 0047 A Configuring R Series Fieldbus Sensors 12 6 2001 RL Adjustment Procedure for the Set Slave Address APD 0048 A Command for the Profibus P202 Husky Sensor 12 13 2001 UV M1192A 08 02 Page 1
171. SITION B NULL 1 MAGNET 1 DEAD ZONE 1 STROKE 1 MTS w 3 0 MIN MAGNET 2 DEAD ZONE 2 STROKE 2 NULL 2 m POSITION A MAGNET 1 NULL STROKE DEAD ZONE 2 OUTPUT TO POSITION A POSITION B MAGNET NULL STROKE DEAD ZONE 2 OUTPUT TO POSITION A POSITION B LIMITS POSITION B ROD LENGTH VDC ROD LENGTH VDC DEAD ZONE 2 SHOULD BE A MINIMUM OF 3 INCHES GREATER THAN DEAD ZONE 1 OUTPUT LIMITS ARE 10 VDC TO 410 VDC MINIMUM OF 2 5 INCH DEAD ZONE REQUIRED FOR DEAD ZONE 2 NOTES A STROKE 1 MAY OR MAY NOT OVERLAP STROKE 2 IF NOT THEN A 3 GAP IS NEEDED B MAGNET 1 AND MAGNET 2 MUST NEVER BE CLOSER THAN 3 APART C MAXIMUM ROD LENGTH IS 300 INCHES Rev B Voltage output only DRAWING NUMBE e DRAWING UMBER DATE LX T Wi f 6 Lee lt APD 0024 9 22 97 SENSORS DIVISION SIZE i i CARY NORTH CAROLINA SHEET 1 OF 1 REVISION C ORIGINATOR DDB Cross Reff DRAWING NO APL 0005 ORIGINATOR DDB AP1 0003 PAGE 1 OF 1 d MTS SENSORS DIVISION 3001 SHELDON DR CARY NORTH CAROLINA 27513 SUBJECT CONVERSION FROM OLD TCS COUNTER CARD TO NE QLD TSC CARD POWER SUPPLY REQUIREM A 15 WC 5 VDC FOR STROKE LENG MEASURING D INPUT FROM INTERNAL INT FOR TRANSD UNIT IS SCALE TH RESOLU UNIT USES PU TRANSDUC UNIT IS BUILT BINARY OR BCD OUTPUT UTPUTS AT FAC
172. Spacer Part No 400633 Magnet Type SR 12 Part No 201542 1 29 in 32 76 mm O D other options available 5 Chamfered Rod Bushing Figure 2 8 Typical Cylinder Installation Figure 2 8 shows a typical cylinder installation Review the following before attempting this type of installation e Use a non ferrous plastic brass Teflon etc spacer 1 to provide 1 8 inch 32 mm minimum space between the magnet and the piston e An O ring groove 2 is provided at the base of the transducer hex head for pressure sealing MTS uses mil standard MS33514 for the O ring groove Refer to mil standard MS33649 or SAE J514 for machining of mating surfaces e The null space 3 is specified according to the installation design and cylinder dimensions The analog output module provides a null adjustment Make sure that the magnet can be mounted at the proper null position e The piston head 4 shown in Figure 2 8 is typical For some installations depending on the clearances it may be desired to countersink the magnet e A chamfered rod bushing 5 should be considered for stokes over 5 feet 1 5 meters to prevent wear on the magnet as the piston retracts The bushing should be made from Teflon or similar material e The recommended bore for the cylinder rod is 1 2 inch 13 mm The transducer rod includes a 0 375 inch 9 53 mm diameter end plug mounted flush Use standard industry practices for machining and mounting of all componen
173. Subsection 1 3 Figure 3 11 Figure 3 10 Subsection 3 3 1 Subsection 3 3 3 Subsection 4 4 Subsection 3 2 Figures 3 10 and 3 11 The equipment required for diagnostic testing is l Analog or digital voltmeter 2 Circuit tester or ohmmeter 3 Oscilloscope 50 mHz 15 mHz minimum dual channel preferred 4 2 Power Supply Check This procedure will determine if the power supply rating is sufficient or if there is a voltage drop occurring in the field wiring Perform the following procedure to check power supply voltage and connections at the interface box l Remove power and disconnect J 1 10 pin connector from interface box Also remove edge connector from counter card Turn power on and check open circuit voltages at the connector pins of the box mating connector 2 Pin H should read 15 with respect to A Pin B should read 15 with respect to A Pin C should read 5 with respect to A 3 Check power supply voltages under load as follows Connect a 150 ohm resistor or similar 1 5 watt 12 15 Vdc load between pins H and A and read the voltage across t resistor The value should be 14 25 Vdc minimum 4 Connect a 220 ohm resistor or similar 1 watt 12 15 Vdc load between pins B and A and read the voltage across the resistor The value should be 14 25 Vdc minimum 5 Connect a 10 to 12 ohm resistor or similar 2 watt 5 6 Vdc load between pins B and A and read the voltage across the resistor The voltage should
174. TE NOV SHE A EVISION A KLP J5e ler Pages xo Speciiy custom izing dual magnet systems C analog setpoints Kai with Tempo Ill PB series No EE e E NT Es x go Eu EE aS gt gt qo oO D Oo Yn es Nul 7 SECH Dead ss Mggnet 1 TA Zone 1 Y Stroke See Table Belo Magnet 1 Magnet 2 ae E Woe a el 3 00 76 2 E E Min Spocing rg CN a e a c c SIE SEN S 2 Or N G Deac Null 2 Magnet 2 ME Zone 2 Stroke See Table Below All null and stroke NULL 1 measurements Magnet 1 Stroke MON ee Bem Mose be 1 00 300 00 increments of O 1 or 5mm 20 47 12 0 50 8 7600 NULL 2 Magnet 2 Stroke Dead Zone 2 Total Tube Must be at least 4 00 300 00 See table below Length 3 00 76 2 greater 42 730 ES 7600 Stroke Length Dead Zone 2 than Null 1 Eo uou 25 aas For longer Dead Zones please contact Application Engineering Electrical Output VDC E c check one at Setpoint 1 at Setpoint 2 at Setpoint 1 at Setpoint 2 Magnet 1 Magnet 1 Magnet 2 Magnet 2 Notes 1 Contact Application Engineering at 1 800 63
175. THREAD DESIGN 45 5 0 020 R KEY MAXIMUM FIM FULL INDICATOR MOVEMENT PD PITCH DIAMETER DETAIL C NOTES 1 Dimensions and tolerances based on ANSI Y14 5 1982 2 MTS has extracted all pertinent information from MS33649 to generate this document 3 PD must be square with surface B within 0 005 FIM across 2 250 dia minimum 4 PD must be concentric with 2 250 dia within 0 030 FIM and with 0 769 dia within 0 005 FIM 5 Surface texture ANSI B46 1 1978 6 Use o ring MTS part number 560315 for correct sealing 7 The thread design shall have sufficient threads to meet strength requirements of material used 8 Finish counter bore shall be free from longitudinal and spiral tool marks Annular tool marks up to 32 micro inches maximum will be permissible Figure 4 8 O ring Boss Detail 4 6 Installing Magnets If the null adjustment is inadequate you can design a coupler with adjustments to mount the magnet to the measured member 14 5 SYSTEM WIRING 5 1 Factory Mutual Control Drawing Drwg 650512 NOISIAIG SYOSNIS SU B 9 OL OCOOO H INI 9 OL 0000 3 1M SH38 edis I Duel GN OM KAN Hisv A he Tw OL W40 NH SSJI 3 ONY ONnOUO 3NYd NOHNGWISID O1 JOWN 38 emm NOUO3NNOO SIHI 9 Mens liar Cas S 0341038 10N et IIHS dans cum ath tibet cad 90 MO4 IVE BEI Ap Ol 03123NH02 SIYM O31SUAL OZ ISN SONI HIOA OJONNOYJ 38 ISMN OT33S JHL 1334 0001 OL 1334 OOZ MOUS SH19N31 BOs 9097 Tn zei6 gy
176. TION RECIRCS WIRING TABLE CRYSTAL 1 er EE E Mhz 2 ii 4 Wa Va 6 3 7 WEE 8 9 10 Linear Displacement Transducer LOT Model Number Gt Standard 0J Mente 01 Smell Rugoedired head Sr XX Sotoa STROKE UNITS 1 ches ond tent 2 e een STROKE LENGTH G 0120 12 cem or 120 mm 0365 MS wre or B r e S och 1200 120 che or 1200 NULL DEAD SPACE Sench O A ene Dncn hull Yta waseq for tros vo to 200 F Toren 0 5 and 2inch Mull Sta wa G for strokes ower 200 i X s oroa null ana or dead wae TRANSDUCER CABLE DRIVER Analog Only Q NO 1 00 ft wore cabe from 7rsoucer Standard for ai digital water I Yet gt 100 ft vgnal cable fromm aucer Standard for entremucaily sale HEAD ELECTRONICS TEMPERAT RE RANGE te AQ to e 180 7 Standard o e greater than 172 powtrve puise la 40 to 180 New Marcas cr rose vo to 26 X lopen temo range and or e v7 ENVIRONMENTAL Q lt NEMA 1 g nt Gott Stendere WEMA 4 solaw oroo Staenagard with Style 02 J intmmwcaiir sale 6 ee x oros 4 lt NEMA 6 nermetically wealeg TRANSDUCER CABLE 0 t eth conector analog 7 4 91 03 6 x t gth analog dtm connector digital t 21 0 former std F t osqtah drot 2 None anakoq Style 02 a t eth connector digital new vid Nome itai Style 02 9 Other length of connector
177. TS APPLICATIONS DISPLACEMENT GROUP 919 677 0200 CUSTOMER REQUEST DATE CONTACT RESPONSE NEEDED BY PHONE ix COMPLETED BY MTS ull Space 2 0 Standard Style A Personality Modules Bend Linear Length Connector C tempo Il style only Dead Space 5 0 Standard Power Supply agnet ANGLE Bend Radius Pipe R1 EXtensten Cable Center of Probe minimum of 8 inches Accessories No Spring Ji DRAWING NUMBER MTS A LADNA NAAN JATE we APD 0057 9 23 97 SENSORS DIVISION SIZE CARY NORTH CAROLINA SHEET 1 OF 1 REVISION B ORIGINATOR RSM Cross Reff AP1 0016 ae 1 l H ui YRAWING NUMBER UU Za A ADT nn DATE APD 0038 s 24 SENSORS DIVISION SIZE CARY NORTH CAROLINA SHEET 1 OF REVISION B ORIGINATOR RSM
178. Temposonics LP 0 1 of F S minimum of 0 004 in 0 10 mm Repeatability transducer e 0 001 of full stroke or 0 0001 in 0 0025 mm Measuring Range transducer e Temposonics Il Up to 25 feet e Temposonics LP Up to 48 inches Operating Temperature e 32 to 158 F 0 to 70 C Output Inches 199 995 Millimeters 5080 00 Centimeters 508 00 Meters 5 0800 e 5 1 4 digit LED display Outputs selected via internal dip switch e 0 005 in e 0 1 mm e 0 01 cm e 0 0001 m Zero Reset e Available on front of display panel Specifications are subject to change without notice Contact MTS for verification of specifications critical to your needs Measurements are independent Best Straight Line BSL Connections For more detailed literature on Temposonics products or to talk with an MTS representative call toll free 1 800 633 7609 ao nd MTS Systems Corporation MTS Sensor Technologie GmbH and Co MTS Sensors Technology Corporation MTS Sensors Division Auf dem Sch ffel 9 Lions Plaza 805 3001 Sheldon Drive D 58513 Ludensheid 1 1 8 Shin Yokohama Cary North Carolina 27513 Telephone 800 633 7609 Fax 919 677 0200 Federal Republic of Germany Telephone 49 23 5195870 Fax 49 23 5156491 Kohoku ku Yokohama 222 Japan Telephone 8145 475 2401 Fax 8145 475 0641 Temposonics is a registered trademark of MTS Systems Corporation Temposonics products are covered by
179. Typical Digital System Connections 21 22 To ensure system performance to published specifications wiring procedures and system configuration guidelines must be carefully followed NOTE The following recommendations are sup plied for full digital systems which include a Temposonics Digital Counter Card For systems which use a digital counting device in the receiver computer the counter card is not supplied Use the following procedures in conjunction with the receiver device manufacturer s rec ommendations 6 2 Transducer Connections The cable from the transducer has 10 conductors 5 pair Belden YR8105 or equivalent Standard available lengths are 5 15 and 25 feet Consult MTS Sensors Division for custom lengths It is recommended to keep the transducer cable as short as possible to avoid possible noise or temperature effects on accuracy Table 6A below identifies the cable leads from the Temposonics II transducer Note the three version indicated in the table Neuter Temposonics II Temposonics II with an integrated Digital Personality Module DPM and a Temposonics II with an integrated RS422 Personality Module RPM Table 6A Temposonics II Transducer Connections Temposonics ll Integrated or Extension Cable see Note 1 2 Temposonics Il Configurations e Neuter No Personality Module e DPM Digital Personality Module e RPM RS422 Personality Module
180. UPPLY COMMON S TO EARTH GROUND LEELA ISA A A VD DATE N ES a RC GE Lk YAT LU VAL M y sensors Division DRAWING NUMBER 1J Se SIZE 1 10 95 5666666666 CARY NORTH CAROLINA SHEET 1 OF 1 REVISION A ORIGINATOR DAVE BAKER 6 PIN 10 PIN DIGITAL INTERFACE BOX NUMBER ATI C a NM Sensors Division AN EN SLA NORTH CAROLINA SHEET 1 OF 1 REVISION A ORIGINATOR DAVE BAKER CARY NOR SUBJF EG ANALOG OUTPUT VOLTAGE REQUIREMENTS PIN PIN PIN PIN PIN PIN PIN FROM TEM noongan N STRIPED COLOR POSONICS e WHITE BLUE S BLUE WHITE S WHITE BROWN BROWN WHITE GREEN WHITE WHITE GRAT STRI WHITE GREEN ST SPECIFICATIONS ENCLOSURE 6 amp 10 PIN MS DISPLACEMENT 0 TO 10 VDC VELOCITY OUTPUT MINIMUM 1 SEC 798 VDC MAXIMUN 25 S STYLE CONNECTORS OUT J PUT FORWARD ACTING POWER REQUIR 15 VDC amp 24 VDC 3 1 ma EMENTS CUSTOMER SU n AAC YY V s Sensors Division ai Ak Ak NE ka Been CARY NORTH PLIED CAROLINA ES
181. US patent number 5 545 984 and others Additional patents are pending PROGRAMMING GERMANY MTS Systems Corporation Sensors Technologie Auf dem Schuffel 9 D 58513 L denscheid Germany Postfach 8130 D 58489 L denscheid Germany Tel 49 2351 95870 Fax 49 2351 56491 Web www mtssensor de PROCEDURE JAPAN MTS Systems Corporation Sensors Technologie Japan Ushikubo Bldg 131 Aihara cho M achida shi Tokyo 194 0211 J apan Phone 81 42 775 3838 Fax 81 42 775 5512 MEMBER Ph er A EU POWEA Part Number 10 00 550409 Revision C mire os PCG Pioneers UNITED STATES GERMANY JAPAN MTS Systems Corporation MTS Systems Corporation MTS Systems Corporation Innovators Sensors Division Sensors Technologie Sensors Technologie Japan BG 3001 Sheldon Drive Auf dem Schuffel 9 D 58513 Ludenscheid Germany Ushikubo Bldg Cary NC 27513 Postfach 8130 D 58489 Ludenscheid Germany 737 Aihara cho M achida shi Magnetostrictive Tel 800 633 7609 Tel 49 2351 95870 Tokyo 194 0211 apan f Fax 800 498 4442 Fax 49 2351 56491 Phone 81 42 775 3838 Sensing Email info temposonics com Web www mtssensor de Fax 81 42 775 5512 Web www temposonics com Temposonics is a registered trademark of MTS Systems Corporation 2000 MTS Systems Corporation All Temposonics sensors are covered by US patent number 5 545 984 and others Additional patents are pending MEMBER AMERICAE FIERPERN PARTNER
182. US patents 3 898 555 4 726 226 4 721 902 4 298 861 4 952 873 and additional patents pending MS Sensors Division Temposonics Display Unit TDU User s Manual User s Manual P N 550260 Revision C 10 Section TABLE OF CONTENTS d L3 mde E 2 Specifications LI 3 imsaltonKt d 4 Scalingthe Output 7 M 2 5 1 Wiring TDU to Temposonics LH 3 5 2 Wiring TDU to Temposonics LP 4 5 3 Wiring TDU to Temposonics II 4 6 zeroSeting a 7 Gradient Setting o e 8 jOfsetAdutMode LI 9 TDU Dimensions d8 Addendum Installing Optional NEMA 4 Enclosure Ia GENERAL INFORMATION 800 633 7609 or 919 677 0100 800 248 0532 919 677 0200 800 498 4442 Shipping Address MTS Systems Corporation Monday Thursday Sensors Division 7 30 a m to 6 30 p m EST EDT 3001 Sheldon Drive Cary North Carolina 27513 Friday 7 30 a m to 5 00 p m EST EDT 1 INTRODUCTION The Temposonics Display Unit TDU provides a large 5 1 4 digit LED readout of accurate measurement data It is ideal for use in applications where immediate visual verification of position is required such as plastic and woodworking applications The TDU is designed to function with Temposonics LH Temposonics Il and Temposonics LP position sensors with START STOP output All communication between the display and transducer is transmitted via RS422 Start Stop p
183. V nu CW JS ARE s I BLUE AN 6 D vgE 15V VEE 15V VEE 15V IN IT SENSORS DIVISION XE m BLACK SrNZ7NZ 7 RMP RETORN FINISH ENGR DATE RESEARCH TRIANGLE PARK NORTH CAROLINA 27709 DETAIL UF VIOLET aa 8 AMP OUTPUT z L QC DATE TITLE YELLOW N A 9 E INTRG z x INTRG TEGRAL CABLES FOR ASSEMBLY DETAIL OF ITEM 1 GREEN 10 E INTRO K INTRG MFG DATE c SEE MTS DOCUMENT 400755 3 EXTENSION CABLES FOR COMPLETE CABLE TERMINATIONS DRAIN WIRE SHIELD WIRE EARTH EARTH DO NOT B SCALE SEE DETAIL J AND TABLES 2 TO 5 f UNDER NO CONDITION WILL AND INTERROGATION BE CONNECTED AT THE SAME TIME SCALE DWG ND SCH THE UNUSED INTERROGATION LEAD MUST BE CONNECTED TO DC GROUND DRAWING SHEET 4 OF 4 APD 0022 A Cross Heft AP1 0001 GUIDE TO COMMON CONNECTORS 370015 AMPHENOL 6 PIN FEMALE PLUG M53106A 145 65 JSED FOR CONNTECTING TEMPO II TO AOM OR DIB BOXES Rl amp Cl FOR INTERROGATION PULSES R2 amp C2 FOR INTERROGATION PULSES MATES WITH 37014 BOX MOUNTED CONNECTOR MS3102A 148S 6P 370017 AMPHENOL 5 PIN FEMALE PLUG M83106A 145 585 MATES WITH AOM BOX Ji MS CONNECTO
184. W2 located on the DPM board are set to the hexadecimal value of the desired number of recirculations Permissible settings are 01 to 7F corresponding to 1 to 127 recirculations The update rate in this mode is determined by the following formula U N 1 SW3 1 2 ms W here U Update rate in ms N of recirculations selected on SW1 and SW2 1 to 127 SW3 Setting of SW3 0 to 15 Refer to the Addendum in the back of this manual for DPM programming procedures 4 2 5 Operation During Loss of Signal It is the responsibility of the Digital Counter Card to detect a loss of signal in the system such as when the magnet is removed from the rod The DPM supports this mode by supporting a restart mode if the Digital Counter Card negates its interrogation cycle before the end of a data acquisi tion cycle TIE Figure 4 6 RS422 Personality Module RPM 4 5 RS422 Personality Module RPM The RS422 Personality Module RPM is an alternate integrated circuit module The RPM is also the size of a US postage stamp and is installed directly into the transducer head to provide the circuitry required to produce an RS422 start stop output This signal is then transmitted to a digital counter card or various other devices The RPM must be interrogated by an external source The surface mount components of the RPM reduce moment of inertia and enhance shock and vibration resistance of the module The simplicity of d
185. WHEN USING THE LA STYLE TRANSDUCERS WITH A TDU MK292 AND AOM IT IS NECESSARY TO INCREASE THE STROKE LENGTH BY ONE INCH AND START THE ULL POSITION ONE INCH OUT THIS COMPENSATES FOR THE DIFFERENCE IN BLANKING RANGE BETWEEN THE OLD SENSORS AND THE SE BASED SENSORS DRAWING NUMBER LS A A p On pie SENSORS DIVISION SIZE GE l CARY NORTH CAROLINA SHEET 1 OF 1 REVISION B ORIGINATOR RSM Reff Cross T AP1 0015 C ROF SE BASED SENSORS 2 FLOATING MAGNET CAPTIVE SLIDE WHEN USING THE LP SE BASED TRANSDUCERS WITH A TDU MK292 AND AOM IT IS NECESSARY TO INCREASE THE STROKE LENGTH BY ONE INCH AND START THE NULL POSITION ONE INCH OUT THIS COMPENSATES FOR THE DIFFERENCE IN BLANKING RANGE BETWEEN
186. WISTED PAIR MUST BE BETWEEN THE CABLE CLAMP AND THE BOOT 1 F AND NOT TERMINATED M PUTNAM 7 23 96 Rev B Added Husky part Z to cable BKT 5 7 96 I rC A r KON 77 VM S Sensors Division A DRAWING NUMBER A P J A OD e SI ZE CARY NORTH CAROLINA SHEET 1 OF 1 REVISION B ORIGINATOR DAVE BAKER 12 01 94 BYPASSING COE CARD WITH TEMPO II WITH DPM es Oe O e 3 SI 2 e amp d s D eiis E e aw e COE CARD COMPONET SIDE E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 EG E7 E8 e eee INT PIN 10 INT PIN 9 GATE PIN 4 GATE PIN 3 DC COM PINS 1 amp 2 NO CONNECTION 15 VDC PIN 5 15 VDC PIN 5 MTS sensors nivis x APD 0006 ATE S Sensors Divisi
187. White Orange Stripe Gray Not Used Not Used K 4 Orange White Stripe Pink Not Used Not Used G 5 White Green Stripe Red Vde JZ Pn H Pin A if stroke length is 180 in 6 Green White Stripe Blue Vdc J2 Pin D H 7 White Brown Stripe Black Return Gnd J2 Pin B Not Used 8 Brown White Stripe Violet Output return pulse J2 Eck Not Used 9 White Gray Stripe Yellow Interrogation J2 Pin E E 10 Gray White Stripe Green Interrogation J2Pin B D NOTES 1 Frame ground is isolated from circuit ground inside the transducer head 2 Verify if the cable has striped or solid color leads and make connections accordingly 3 Connections to existing mating connector when replacing a Digital Interface Box with a Temposonics Il LDT with a Digital Personality Module 4 Grounding Ground connection between bracket and outer cover made by threads Connector 10 pins E Flange electrically isolated from threads Bracket internal to head enclosure NC Transducer Rod 3 8 in stainless steel Machine Ground Head Assembly Grounding Diagram Cable Shield no connection HW Driver Amplifier signals Return s Module Option Module Control Module AOM DIB Counter Card or other Signals Return s Vee Power Supply Power Return Shield Ground non current carrying AC Line Figure 4 1 Grounding 13 MTS aa MTS Systems Corporation MTS Sensor Technologie GmbH and Co KG Sensors Div
188. Y LN RET PULSE fe O47 ATANT LA M 1 JIN AY Wy RA LVAALVA A 1N 1 ind TY LJ pre NOTE IF AOM BOX HAS 24 VDC io VDC N W 7 j AJN OUA As 4A VADI NT T TIT QM o SS ELLE EE INTERROG PULSE ISP OUT OPTION BOARD ONE POWER SUPPLY ISP OUT CAN BE USED AA TPC J 3 sensors Division RR e C 3 sl ij DRA K Ns e N ON CC rey x SIZE C A DIG NUMBER A HI eessen CARY NORTH CAROLINA SHEET 1 OF 1 REVISION A ORIGINATOR DAVE BAKER GATION OC A LA AOM BOXES JUMPER TO C J LANGE RC qui es J FROM THE CENTER HOLE TO THE EDGE OF THE BOARD IS INTERROGATION A JUMPER FROM THE CENTER HOLE TO THE CUSTOM CHIP IS INTERROGATION TUN N 3 SS e hg CT NY Ve pum CAN i Ge J de GAB gt NOS ASE KA NOS A B J L ia VA TBS SE ES amp y 1 Gi 1 QI OCI ISIS SISS D S S N SS N SS SS K N E iN D A B po quo de ote H xl K I Bs i Je T N 4 i P C V Sensors Division A DRAWING NUMBER A H D E SIZE CARY NORTH CARO
189. a_i A e eee et EN Z sa S s snsojpuz pezipeb6ny odws Jwan Aq peyiseds ujbus1 ww SI wg uade ww oos gr uw 30448 Size e 007 s 9U07 poeg 1 i L La ww 9 D WS Pog mais ssaiuio15 O O H T E QO w 0 posuj G i X BIN 5 En ld Pv3 20 POON vt 3Nh9IL C 810g 0420 s n um Ei 4 SA1S uinso 5u3 puopuojs ous 49wo sno Aq proeds yjbue7 ww Zr 96 w SB juapuedeg ww O 0S bpon PONS HANY 007 i 9007 ww 1610 1 u 9 pou ais Sange CoO g C E 00 u rrr Brig pv3 posu G I x BIN 29490 20 poss WE 4NNDI pu 905 20 x M GLI uon020d 0 Sum S S SIN 96610 UO OIOGs0 Su9jS S SIN JO WOWIPO pa 3 tiba 0 930 05u9 g 3Iu0S0 Cu 0i Md N d mer bonen Awe aapoy C6004 vepren 5 d SrivtOLC 5 1004 N d 4 uvo buqon r4 sg Kou Orla vepra 3InOOn 1ndinO 9OTYNY yu a AI CAS a s vw x ww 0 v oos E ww 68g ul er ww cero UA eS oe 1 SE en WEE WS s T Tr 1 12H z Z LE O TE DEn p9 OouJ9 J AQ2 vim UMOUS p pu vuuuoo u 6 wurr x Poesy vz 3Nn ZC 01 Z s ng do pos 394205 J9 02 uM ww Lg w SZ Z ww GOI1 WM GC ww 9 86 ww v9 ul ee ul 770 ww Z1 WCS unu s on E j T fi Bos ww t8 ui ipg parowa J9 0
190. acement outputs to the receiving device Take the following steps to connect J1 1 One of the screws securing the cover of the AOM has a raised head Connect a ground wire from that screw head to a central earth ground or to the power supply ground if it is grounded Only one circuit earth ground should be used to prevent ground loops Refer to Figure 5 1 of this manual for a full system grounding diagram Strain Relief Only Fabricate the J1 cable and prepare the cable as described earlier Identify the connections to TB1 and TB3 Refer to section 10 3 to determine the appropriate J1 connections MS Connector Only Fabricate the J1 cable Refer to section 10 4 to determine the appropriate J1 connections Solder the connections to the MS type connector Part No 370017 Use any cable capable of maintaining the signals for the required length Ensure the solder connections are clean and free of excessive solder Use heat shrink over the solder connections to prevent the pins from shorting Identify the wires at the other end of the cable for connections to the power supplies and the receiving device Test the cable for shorts NOTE Make sure that tbe power supply can pro vide 15 Vdc at 250 mA and 15 Vdc at 65 mA use a bipolar power supply The power supply should provide less than 1 ripple with 2 regulation The power supply should be dedicated to the trans ducer system to prevent noise and exter nal loads
191. actory for repair H voltages are correct go to step 4 4 With power on use an oscilloscope to check the interrogation signal to the transducer on J2 pin E on the DIB If no signal is present send the box to the factory for repair If the signal looks ike the example below go to step 5 L TS 4v 5 pos pulse transducer neg pulse transducer Hook oscilloscope to pin C on the transducer cable The return pulse and recirculations should be present Go to step B6 if these signals are present Send the DIB to the factory for repair if the signals are not present Below is an example of a DIB with 4 recirculations Volts div 1v Time div Sus delay mode rec 1 rec 2 rec 3 rec 4 retum pulse Look at the gate signals on pins G and K on the J1 connector A complimentary 0 volts low 5 volt high TTL level output should be present Send the DIB to the factory for repair if gate signals are not present 4 7 Modifying a DIB from INTERNAL interrogation to EXTERNAL Interrogation Consult drawings 650110 and 250068 1 a Remove the 4 cover screws on the DIB Remove cover with PCB connected Turn component side up with J1 to the left and J2 to the right as you face the board Remove the 555 timer from the bottom of the 16 pin DIP socke position U1B pins 1 4 and 13 16 Install a 9637 IC on the top side of the same 16 pin DIP socket position U1 pins 5 8 and 9 12 Install a 100Q resistor between pins D
192. al Connect oscilloscope to Pin C on the transducer cable The return pulse and recirculations should be present Go to Step 6 if these signals are present Return the DIB to the factory for repair if the signals are not present Below is an example of a DIB with 4 recirculations Volts div 1v Time div 5us delay mode 1 2 3 4 Return Pulse Figure D 4 4 Recirculation Pulses 6 Observe the gate signals on Pins G and KC on the J1 connector A complimentary TTL level output 0 volts low 5 volt high should be present Return the DIB to the factory for repair if gate signals are not present 57 MTS Gw 58 MTS Systems Corporation MTS Sensor Technologie GmbH and Co KG Sensors Division Auf dem Schuffel 9 D 58513 Ludenscheid Germany 3001 Sheldon Drive Postfach 8130 D 58489 Ludenscheid Germany Cary NC 27513 Phone 49 2351 95870 Phone 800 633 7609 Fax 49 2351 56491 Fax 919 677 0200 Internet www temposonics com Temposonics sensors are a registered trademark of MTS Systems Corporation All Temposonics sensors are covered by US patent number 5 545 984 and others Additional patents are pending Part Number 03 98 550033 Revision F 1998 MTS Systems Corporation MTS Sensors Technology Corporation Izumikan Gobancho 12 11 Gobancho Chiyoda ku Tokyo 102 Japan Phone 03 3239 3003 Fax 03 3262 7780 Qe eornm ISO 9001 CERTIFIED MEMBER TEMPOSONICS APM INSIA TATION INSTRUCTIONS 550409 C
193. al Personality Module Natural Binary or BCD Output 5Vde Figure 4 1 Digital System Configuration with DPM LDT and Digital Counter Card Power Supply Requirements e 12 to 15Vdc 140mA bipolar Belden YR8105 or equivalent 5 pair User s Control System Jus RS422 Personality Module Figure 4 2 Temposonics II Digital System Configuration with RS422 Personality Module 13 14 Power Supply Requirements e 12 to 15Vdc 140mA bipolar Belden YR8105 or equivalent 5 pair Pulse Width Output Digital Personality Module Figure 4 3 Half Digital System Configuration with an LDT and a DPM 4 1 Specifications Digital System Components Temposonics II with TCS Counter Card Parameter Specification Digital Counter Card Power Requirements Voltage 5 Vde Current 800 mA Output TTL Compatible nominal 0 amp 5 Vdc parallel true high source Current 0 8 A sink Current 16 mA up to 18 bits natural binary 4 1 4 digit BCD up to 22 bits binary and 6 digit BCD can be achieved with a second counter card M ounting Distance 300 ft maximum from Digital Personality Module DPM Digital Personality Module Recirculations Selectable from 1 to 127 Interrogation Internal External 1 to 4us pulse Power Requirements Voltage Current 15 Vdc 50 mA Temperature Requirements storage 40 F to 180 F 40 C t
194. al block J2 Refer to Figure 1 below Tables 5 1 5 2 5 3 below illustrate the appropriate connections for wiring the Temposonics LH Temposonics ll or Temposonics LP to the TDU and power supply De 15 Vdc 15 Vdc or 20 24 Vdc power supply Figure 1 Rear Panel of TDU w Terminal Blocks 5 1 TDU w Temposonics LH w 15 Vdc or 20 24 Vdc Power Supply See Notes 1 amp 2 Functional 6 Conductor Striped Wire Solid Wire Description Integral Cable RB RC RB RC Extension Cable Extension Cable Note 1 Provided Provided Provided Note 2 Provided Provided Provided Provided Provided Provided Yellow Green White Orange Stripe Gra Orange White Stripe White White Blue Stripe White Drain Wire Blue White Stripe Brown LS White Green Stripe Red White Green Stripe Note 2 NOTES 1 Use J1 2 if power supply is 15 Vdc this pin is not used if using a 20 24 Vdc supply 2 Use J1 3 if using a 20 24 Vdc power supply this pin is not used if using a 15 Vdc supply 5 2 TDU w Temposonics LP w 20 24 Vdc Power Supply TDU Pin w 15 Vdc Power Supply Sensor Wire Color Sensor Wire Color Customer Provided Functional Description 20 to 24 Vdc Functional Description J1 1 J1 2 15 Vdc Customer psu Provided FE Tp A3 GND Customer GND Customer Provided Provided Bi INT Dame BI INT Orange J23 Gae Blue
195. ale position and the dead zone to install the transducer refer to Figure 3 1 Before installing the flexible transducer review the following considerations All flexible transducers are custom manufactured for a specific application and installation The specific requirements are determined prior to ordering which includes specific curvatures and straight sections at specific distances from the transducer head Flexible transducers should not be subjected to temperatures above 130 F 54 C unless specified The temperature of the transducer rod should not vary more than 30 F 16 C unless specified Flexible transducers should not be subjected to pressures above atmospheric pressure Flexible transducers can be flexed or curved to a minimum diameter of 36 in 91 cm during installation Flexible transducers require supports or anchoring to maintain the designed shape Refer to Subsection 3 2 2 for information to install transducer supports Some long transducers are ordered as flexible units to facilitate shipping and handling only even though they are used for straight applications CAUTION DO NOT attempt to install a flexible transducer without knowledge of the design installation dimensions Failure to follow the design dimensions can result in improper operation or transducer damage 1 in O D Flange Install Clamp Here Null Space as specified 3 in mimimum 1 in O D Polypropelene 4
196. an design a coupler with adjustments to mount the magnet to the measured member Part No 201554 O D 2 49 in 63 25 mm Thickness 0 375 in 9 5 mm Part No 251416 1 of 2 holes 0 15 in dia 120 apart 90 cut out Lt 0 53 in 13 5 mm O D 1 29 in 32 8 mm Thickness 0 312 in 7 9 mm Part No 400533 D 0 53 in 13 5 mm O D 1 0 in 25 4 mm Thickness 0 312 in 7 9 mm Max Length 120 in 3050 mm 1 of 4 holes f each 0 182 in dia 4 6 mm I D 0 75 in 19 05 mm on 1 625 in dia 41 3 mm on 0 94 in dia 23 9 mm Part No 201553 1 of 2 holes 0 177 in dia 4 5 mm 120 apart on 1 625 in dia 41 3 mm 0 44 in 11 2 mm opening 90 cut out I D 0 625 in 15 9 mm O D 2 46 in 63 25 mm Thickness 0 375 in 8 5 mm Part No 201542 O O 3 9 mm 4 holes each 0 15 in dia 3 9 mm O O on 0 94 in dia 23 9 mm I D 0 53 in 13 5 mm O D 1 29 in 32 8 mm Thickness 0 312 in 7 9 mm Part No 401032 Part No 251298 1 0 30 in max gt D 0 532 in 13 5 mm 0 D 0 685 in 17 4 mm Aluminum Plate A Thickness E in GR bonded to magnet 4 c Ref Max Length 60 in 1535 mm Y A Figure 2 10 Magnet Dimensions 11 3 Grounding 12 Ground connection between bracket Flange and outer cover made by threads Connector 10 pins CX electrically isolated from threads N Transducer Rod 3 8 in stainless
197. ar 1 5 watt 12 15 Vdc load between pins H and A and read the voltage across the resistor The value should be 14 25 Vdc minimum Connect a 220 ohm resistor or similar 1 watt 12 15 Vdc load between pins B and A and read the voltage across the resistor The value should be 14 25 Vdc minimum Connect a 10 to 12 ohm resistor or similar 2 watt 5 6 Vdc load between pins A and B and read the voltage across the resistor The voltage should read 4 75 Vdc minimum Perform the following procedure to check the power supply voltage and connections at the 5 volt power supply 1 Connect a 4 ohm 5 watt resistor or similar 1 2 amp load across the 5 Vdc terminals of the power supply The voltage should be 4 75 Vdc minimum 2 Reconnect the counter card and digital interface box Read the voltage at the counter card edge con nector pin 2 with respect to pin 1 The voltage should read 4 75 Vdc minimum Automotive 12 or 6 Vdc bulbs of the proper wattage are acceptable alternatives D 3 Temposonics II Digital System Signals Interrogation pulse sent to LDT pin 10 IT Interrogation pulse sent to LDT Pin 9 Return Pulse from LDT pin 8 2015 15us RS422 Start Stop pin 3 NI mmm RS422 4 Start Stop pin 4 DPM Gate Out pin 3 di l DPM Gate Out pin 4 Figure D 1 Digital System signals D 4 Wiring Check Improper wiring can
198. art No 201542 1 29 in 32 76 mm O D other options available 5 Chamfered Rod Bushing Figure 2 8 shows a typical cylinder installation Review the following before attempting this type of installation e Use a non ferrous plastic brass Teflon etc spacer 1 to provide 1 8 inch 32 mm minimum space between the magnet and the piston e An O ring groove 2 is provided at the base of the transducer hex head for pressure sealing MTS uses mil standard MS33514 for the O ring groove Refer to mil standard MS33649 or SAE J514 for machining of mating surfaces The null space 3 is specified according to the installation design and cylinder dimensions The analog output module provides a null adjustment Make sure that the magnet can be mounted at the proper null position The piston head 4 shown in Figure 2 8 is typical For some installations depending on the clearances it may be desired to countersink the magnet A chamfered rod bushing 5 should be considered for stokes over 5 feet 1 5 meters to prevent wear on the magnet as the piston retracts The bushing should be made from Teflon or similar material e The recommended bore for the cylinder rod is 1 2 inch 13 mm The transducer rod includes a 0 375 inch 9 53 mm diameter end plug mounted flush Use standard industry practices for machining and mounting of all components Consult the cylinder manufacturer for applicable SAE or military specifications
199. b Software Programming In some applications it is possible and preferable to maintain a zero offset in software at the receiver permits quick re zeroing without adjusting the magnet or resetting the DIP switches 3 24 Binary Output For the detailed procedure consult the manual for the receiver device Move the magnet to the desired zero position and set the receiver reading to zero In most cases the zero offset is determined by adding the binary complement to the reading observed with the magnet in the desired zero position Resetting the Counter Card with DIP Switches For this procedure the receiver device must be capable of reading each of the Counter Card output bits For example the System CRT or LED display may be connected to each bit connection on the input module If this is not possible a string of LEDs must be connected to the Counter Card connector to read each active bit Refer to Figure 4 1 for a typical connection Figures 3 13 and 3 14 show DIP switches Sl and S2 along with tables for determining the switch settings Take the following steps Refer to Figure 3 13 1 2 3 4 5 Before changing any DIP switch positions record the factory set positions for reference Move the magnet to the desired null position Clamp it in place to prevent movement Reset all switch segments to the LO closed position taking note of alignment marks on the board If a P L C or readout device in
200. cause either an erratic output or complete loss of output signal The following instructions should be followed to check all connections 1 Disconnect or remove DC power to the system 2 Trace all wiring from the counter card to the transducer Ensure that maximum cable length and type is observed 3 Check system grounds Figure D 3 shows a typical circuit diagram with the required and optional grounds Ensure that circuit ground is made at only one location to avoid ground loops If erratic or unstable output is encountered recheck all earth grounds and cable grounds 4 Disconnect transducer from the DIB while the power is off 5 Connect the J1 connector to the DIB and restore power 6 Check for the voltages listed below on the J2 6 pin connector on the DIB with respect to J2 pin B Ground A 12 to 15 Vdc D 13 to 15 Yde F 11 5 to 12 Vdc 53 7 Connect an oscilloscope to J2 pin E with respect to J2 pin B to see the lus TTL interrogation pulse see Figure D 4 Transducers with stroke lengths lt 12 inches should have a negative signal and trans ducers with stroke lengths 13 inches or longer will have a positive signal 8 Disconnect power and connect transducer back to the DIB and look for the same voltage and signal levels as in step 6 and 7 with the power restored 9 Connect the oscilloscope to J2 pin C with respect to J2 pin B to see the transient return pulse along with the recirculations see Figure D 5
201. cer head Integral cable shield or analog output 7 All voltage and 4 20 mA grounded ovtpute have circuit ground applied to the negative lead through the internal construction of the AOM Circuit ground therefore passes passes to the receiver device terminal N the receiver device le grounded R must use the same ground thal le applied to the power supply common B For 4 20 mA ungrounded output only the lead of the AOM output must remain isolated from Circuit ground end serth ground or output wit mallunction Do not connect to a device which has Ground applied to the termensi LH Zeie 2tlI462 53 the Analog Syster 5 Troubleshooting Use the troubleshooting procedures in this section when operational problems are encountered The procedures are listed in order of frequency of occurrence and should be completed in the order shown NOTE The following procedures are for general diagnostic purposes Purchase of replacement components should not be based solely on these procedures Consult MTS Sensiors Division for recommendations and factory service before ordering replacement components General Make sure the magnet is positioned to move freely along the LDT rod Trace all wiring from the J1 connector to ensure proper routing Power Supply Check Pertorm the following procedure to check the power supply voltages 1 Remove power and disconnect connector J1 to check open Circuit power supply voltages a
202. cient Transducer length dependent Electronics 3 ppm F 5 4 ppm C lt 0 00011 in F lt 0 00503 mm C Operating Temperature Head Electronics Transducer Rod Analog Output Module Digital Interface Module MK 292 Digital Output Module 40 to 150 F 40 to 66 C 40 to 185 F 40 to 85 C 40 to 180 F 40 to 82 C 35 to 150 F 2 to 65 C 32 to 140 F 0 to 60 C Sensor Operating Pressure Factory Mutual certified to 3000 psi continuous 8000 psi static Outputs absolute Analog Digital Standard 0 to 10 Vdc others voltage outputs are available Optional 4 20 mA Natural Binary BCD Gray Code Velocity Output optional 0 to 10 Vdc polarity of output defines direction of travel optional 4 20 mA velocity output is available contact MTS for details Magnet Requirement Part Number 201542 standard or 201554 if sensor stroke length is over 200 inches Mounting Distances e Temposonics position sensor to safety barriers 200 feet maximum e Temposonics position sensor to Digital Interface Box up to 200 feet with Belden 9931 cable e Digital Interface Box to MK 292 Module up to 300 feet with Belden 8227 cable e Temposonics position sensors to Analog Output Module up to 200 feet with Belden 9931 cable Specifications are subject to change without notice Consult MTS for verification of specifications critical to your application
203. cope across pins C and D of terminal board TB1 to monitor the velocity signal Apply power to the system Make sure the permanent magnet is not moving Adjust the velocity null control R40 clockwise to increase the value or counterclockwise to decrease the value until you obtain a DVM or oscilloscope reading of 0 000 Vdc Disconnect the DVM or oscilloscope and check overall system operation H no more adjustments are necessary replace the AOM cover 3 Mounting Procedures This section describes mounting procedures for the Linear Displacement Transducer measurement system under the toilowing headings Installing the Analog Output Module Installing Rigid Transducers Installing Flexible Transducers Transducer Supports Spring Loading or Tensioning Cylinder Installation Installing Magnets Specific installation procedures depend on the application Installing the Analog Output Module Overall and mounting dimensions for the analog output module AOM are shown in Figure 3 1 The mounting hole drmensions shown are also stamped on the back of the module The AOM is mounted as shown using two socket head cap screws Shown with Cover Removed 4 35 in 110 5 mm 0 24 in 6 1 mm 13 2 mm 2 25 in 57 1 mm with Cover Socket Head Cap Screw 2 10 32 UNF 2A thread x 3 4 in ig 0 5625 in Recommended 14 3 mm Figure 3 1 Overall Drmensons AOM Mounting Installing a Rigid Transducer Before beginning insta
204. critical to your application 2 Temposonics II LDT Installation Before beginning installation be sure you know the following dimensions as illustrated in Figures 2 1 to 2 3a c e Null Space e Stroke e Dead Zone Flange to Tip 9 Standard Null Dead Zone 290i yg Stroke Length 2 0 in 50 mm SENG ll specified by customer 63 50 mm lengths up to 1 36 in 179 9 in 34 54 mm f lt 0 03 in 0 76 mm 3 in 76 2 mm for strokes gt 180 in 0 38 in 9 65 mm 2 13 in 54 mm 0 38 in DIA P 8 65 mm JUL 1 57 in dia 39 87 mm 1 75 in dia End Plug 44 45 mm Flush 0 375 in 9 65 mm 3 4 16 UNF 3A Thread Hex 1 75 in 44 45 mm across flats Figure 2 1 Temposonics II Dimensions ra in minimum clearance for connector and cable bend Temposonics Il with Molded Connector Cable Assembly Temposonics Il with Field Instalable Connector 1 25 In minimum Temposonics Il with Integral Cable Figure 2 2 Temposonics II Connector Cable Clearance Requirements 1 Use the 3 4 inch 19 mm 16 UNF thread of the transducer to mount it at the selected location Leave room to access the hex head If a pressure or moisture seal is required install an O ring type MS 28778 8 is recommended in the special groove Use the hex head to tighten the transducer assembly Install the permanent magnet over th
205. cs Il lt 0 05 of full scale or 0 002 inch 0 05 mm whichever is greater SE based Temposonics LP 0 1 of full scale or 0 004 in 0 10 mm whichever is greater Temposonics L Series 0 03 of full scale Repeatability 0 001 of full scale or 0 0001 inch 0 002 mm whichever is greater Operating Temperature Head Electronics 40 to 150 F 40 to 66 C Sensor Rod 40 to 185 F 40 to 85 C Operating Pressure Temposonics Il Rod Style Sensors 3000 psi continuous 8000 psi static typical Temposonics L Series Rod Style Sensors Model LH 5000 psi continuous 10 000 psi static Outputs absolute Start stop or PWM configured for external interrogation Mounting Distances sensor with RS422 output to MK292 500 meters 1640 ft sensor with PWM output to MK292 152 4 meters 500 ft MK292 to PLC 25 meters 82 ft Specifications are subject to change without notice Consult M TS for verification of specifications critical to your application 3 System Components 3 1 MK292 Compatible Temposonics Position Sensors To interface with the MK292 a start stop or pulse width modulated output see figure 3 1 is required from the Temposonics position sensor The MK292 will convert these signals into a parallel BCD Gray Code or binary output COMPATIBLE SENSORS 3 1 1 Temposonics Position Sensor with Start Stop Output Temposonics L Series and LP position sensors provide a
206. d 3 The extension cable shield should be connected to ground at the output module connector only Apply ground by separate connection to earth ground or by connectng to pin B on the connector which mates to the box Wiring LEGEND Required Circuit ground E 3 Optional but 2D Earth ground Recommended inherent no additional UP c d d O grounding required RAA U mg AOM s 15 V c Earth or Reference Ground Blue dust cover NEMA 1 le e circut ground Do not apply additional ground Stainless steel or aluminum ruggedized head cover NEMA 4 NEMA 6 le at same potential ae transducer rod Optional it ie good practice to apply a machine local or earth ground to the transducer rod This is normally accomplished by mounting to a grounded device 3 Traneducere with integral cable have circuit ground applied to the cable shield The ground does not pass through the connector to the extension cable or AOM 4 Connect extension cable shield to ckcuN ground or local earth ground al or near the AOM 5 The AOM case te floating with respect to all grounds H le good practice apply a local earth or machine ground to thie case This ls normally accomplished by mounting to a grounded device M 6 Circut of reference ground ls established by connecting the power supply commons to earth ground Do not apply additional grounds to circuit ground at the transdu
207. d The signal must be a low TTL level to inhibit downloading of the updated displacement information into the output registers the receiver is then provided unchanging data 25 6 4 Counter Cards Natural Binary Output Table 6E is based upon a counter card with 1 divider factory set A single card is capable of 18 bits natural binary output maximum For the 27 28 MHz crystal the resulting resolution and recirculations versus stroke are as follows Resolution Circulations Stroke Length 0 000125 32 Up to 32 inches 0 00025 16 Up to 65 inches 0 0005 8 Up to 131 inches 0 001 4 Up to 262 inches 0 002 2 Up to 300 inches 0 004 1 Up to 300 inches Table 6E Counter Card Output 1 Pin No Bit Weight Decimal Value Bit Maximum Counts vs Number of Bits 10 LSB 20 1 1 bit 9 2 3 2 bits 8 22 7 3 bits 7 23 15 4 bits 14 24 31 5 bits 13 29 63 6 bits 12 26 127 7 bits 11 2 255 8 bits 18 28 511 9 bits 17 79 1023 10 bits 16 210 2047 11 bits 15 21 4095 12 bits 20 212 8191 13 bits 21 213 16 383 14 bits 22 214 32 767 15 bits 19 219 65 535 16 bits 23 216 131 071 17 bits 25 MSB2 21 262 143 18 bits NOTES 1 LSB Least Significant Bit 2 MSB Most Significant Bit MSB is determined by dividing the stroke length by the resolution and comparing to the maximum count For Example 25 in 0 001 25 000 t
208. d test equipment for the following adjustments 1 Disconnect all power from the system Loosen the four screws securing the AOM cover and remove the cover 2 Note the location of terminal board TB1 on the AOM Refer to Figure 2 1 Connect a DVM digital voltmeter across pins A and B of terminal board TB1 to monitor the displacement signal Apply power to the system 3 Position the permanent magnet at the specified null position The null position is specified when the LDT assembly is ordered typically 2 inches from the transducer head 4 Use a screwdriver to adjust the null potentiometer R20 clockwise to increase the value or counterclockwise to decrease the value until you obtain a DVM reading of 0 000 Vdc 5 Position the permanent magnet for full scale position typically 5 or 7 inches from the end of the LDT assembly 6 Use a screwdriver to adjust the scale potentiometer R24 clockwise to increase the value or counterclockwise to decrease the value until you obtain a DVM reading of 410 000 Vdc F Repeat steps 3 to 6 to check the null and full scale settings Readjust as necessary B Disconnect the DVM and check overall system operation If no more adjustments are necessary replace the AOM cover Adjustments Velocity Null Adjustment Some AOM units are designed to provide velocity output For those units velocity null and velocity scale adjustments are provided The velocity null and velocity scale adjus
209. dc for retrofits 1 26 Vdc Note This 4 digit code represents either inches and tenths or millimeters depending in the Unit of Measurement selected Velocity Option 0 None 1 Forward acting voltage output 2 Reverse acting voltage output 3 Forward acting current output grounded 4 Reverse acting current output grounded 5 Forward acting current output ungrounded 6 Reverse acting current output ungrounded Maximum Velocity _ _ Maximum Velocity range 1 to 400 inches second or 0 01 to 9 99 meters second Note The 3 digit code represents either inches second or meters second depending upon the Stroke Length Units selected 3 3 1 Accessories for AOM e 5 pin female MS connector P N 370017 e 6 pin female MS connector P N 370015 E LO e Nc E LO co 0 52 in 4 35 in 110 5 mm 13 2 mm 2 25 in 57 1 mm with Cover 0 5625 in 14 3 mm Socket Head Cap Screw 2 Ni 10 32 UNF 2A thread x 3 4 in lg Recommended Figure 3 2 Analog Output Module Dimensions 3 4 Digital Interface Box for Intrinsically Safe Systems i1 6 D LILILILI Digital Interface Box for Intrinsically Safe System _ Interrogation Internal Interrogation E External Interrogation Recirculation Count 0 1 Circulation 1 2 Recirculations 2 4 Recirculations 3 8 Recirculations 4 16 Recirculations 5 32 Recirculations 6 64 Recirculations 7 128 Recirculations 9 Ot
210. ded within the transducer rod and exhibits the physical property of magnetostriction When the magnetic field of the interrogating pulse interracts with the stationary magnetic field of the external magnet a torsional strain pulse or twist is produced in the waveguide This strain pulse travels in both directions away from the magnet At the end of the rod the strain pulse is damped within the dead zone 5 to 7 inches in length At the head of the transducer two magnetically coupled sensing coils are attached to strain sensitive tapes The tapes translate the strain pulse through coils to an electrical return pulse The coil voltage is then amplified in the head electronics before it is sent back to the interface box as the conditioned return pulse Strain 1 of 4 Magnets Ka installed 90 from each other as F e lt nteraction of 2 magnetic fields Ww cause waveguide SS to twist Magnetic Field from Kern interrogating Pulse g External Magnet Assembly SM G586 1 Figure 1 2 Waveguide Interaction 1 2 Digital Interface Box DIB The digital interface box DIB optionally available as a card contains the intelligence for interrogation and return pulse sensing of the transducer The interrogation frequency is factory determined to allow sufficient time for return pulse sensing based upon the transducer stroke and optional recirculations The frequency of interrogation is controlled by a 55
211. diately If no LEDs light move the magnet through the stroke of the transducer and ensure that one or more LEDs light If none respond recheck the wiring of the LEDs and the power supply connections to the Digital Counter Card Pins 1 and 2 x Circuit l Ground Figure D 2 Testing Counter Card Output 4 To check the Counter Card reading move the magnet between two measured positions on the stroke and record the LED readings as HI or LO Take the complement of the readings and calculate the decimal equivalent of the readings Refer to Table 1D next page Table 1D LED Test Bit Number LED Complement A Decimal Weight B AxB 20 0 001 29 HI 1 LO 0 0 512 0 210 LO 0 HI 1 1 024 1 024 21 HI 1 L0 0 2 048 0 212 LO 0 HI 1 4 096 4 096 sum 5 120 inches of stroke Repeat the procedure for position 2 and compare the inches of stroke measured to the inches of stroke observed A change in reading between 2 points on the stroke is a general indication of proper system operation Temposonics ll Transducer Connections FUNCTION WIRE COLOR PIN NUMBER Vec White Green Stripe 5 12 t0 15 Vde Vee Green White Stripe 6 12 to 15 Vdc l POWER SUPPLY Common White Blue Stripe 1 Common e 4 12 to 15Vde Q 0 8 A Frame Ground Blue White Stripe 2 EH Es c 0 8 A e 5 Vdc Gate Output White Orange Stripe 3 Gate Output Orange White Stripe 4 Earth N LLLA
212. dicates the equivalent counts write this value in row A of the diagram in Figure 3 11 Then convert this number to binary and write it in row B To ensure that the count is correct move the magnet through its stroke and observe the count change For example a 24 inch stroke unit with 0 001 resolution should yield a 24 000 count change Alternatively read each active bit on the counter card output and record into row B of the diagram Determine the complement of the binary number in row B by changing ls to Os and Os to ls Write this complement into row C 3 25 6 Use the number from row C to mark the columns E and F If the corresponding bit from C is 1 mark and X in column E open or HI If the corresponding bit is 0 mark an X in column F closed or LO 7 Turn off power then set each switch segment to the value HI or LO indicated by the Xs in columns E and F 8 Apply power to the system and check that the output is now zero 3 26 E 3 Nies FD Use Tables 3 4 to 3 8 to determine pin numbers Dip switch settings should be viewed with the edge card connector facing upward Figure 3 13 Setting DIP Switches Binary System 3 27 BCD Output Take the following steps Refer to Figure 3 14 bk 2 3 5 6 9 Before changing any DIP switch positions record the factory set positions for reference Move the magnet to the desired null position Clamp it in
213. digital data into an analog output via a digital to analog converter DAC MTS uses a 16 bit DAC to provide the best available resolution performance Typically the APM will be ordered with the Temposonics II transducer The APM is installed and the set points and output voltages are pre set at the factory In the example below Figure 7 1 we have a 60 inch stroke note the indicated active stroke range Set points cannot be set within the null or dead space area they can only be set within the active stroke area The 13 inch stroke selected in the example is defined by Set Point 1 set at 4 000 volts and Set Point 2 set at 7 538 volts Set Point voltage values can range from 10 to 10 Vdc 16 Stroke can be anywhere within this range Set Point 1 4 000 V Set Point 2 1 538 V Analog Personality 25in lt in gt Module 60 in Dead Available Active Stroke Null Space 64 5 in Figure 7 1 Voltage amp Displacement 100 Scalable 7 1 Performance Modes Update time or response time for analog systems is based upon the active stroke of the transducer and the resolution desired To get the best mix of update time and resolution for your particular application three modes are available with the APM These modes are as follows Resolution Preferred Mode In this mode the APM generates a high resolution output while sacrificing update time The Resolut
214. e Driver Amplifier PCB Reference Figure 1 Mfg Inst No APD 0046 Rev A Doc Owner Mike O Gorman Effective Date 07 07 00 Page 1 of 6 4 Fig 1 Be sure the oscilloscope is turned ON and the oscilloscope lead is connected to the test box Adjust which ever channel the oscilloscope lead is connected Slide the Trim Magnet to within 2 of the hex Reference Fig 2 Two signals like that shown in Figure 4 should be present on the oscilloscope screen A lest Magnet A f u P N 2 TEE CH X bei mm E _ 8 lt a i a L Li KO p L1 gA 17 N T cy TT 1 X M Ee Ld Doc No APD 0046 Rev A Doc Owner Mike O Gorman Effective Date 07 07 00 Page 2 of 6 5 Slide the Trim Magnet to within 3 of the end of the transducer tip Reference Fig 4 Adjust the resistor decade box so that the Vpeak MIN MAX of the RETURN signal is in accordance with Figure 5 and Table 1 k N N y i 2 e 3 M N est Magnet laced 30i rom end N
215. e LDT rod Mount the permanent magnet to the movable device whose displacement will be measured To minimize the effect of magnetic materials i e iron steel etc on the magnetic field of the permanent magnet ensure the minimum spacing requirements are met as shown in Figures 2 3a c Any non magnetic materials can be in direct contact with the permanent magnet without affect ing performance Ferromagnetic Material 1 8 in 1 8in Minimum 9 8 in Minimum Minimum Tip Nie Figure 2 3a Minimum Magnet Clearance Using Magnetic Supports Threads NON Ferromagnetic Support ye 5 8 in Minimum va Ferromagnetic Support lt Magnet S Magnet P4 gt A 1 in minimum to clear threads lt PA A 5 8 in plus support thickness Figure 2 5b Figure 2 5c Minimum Null Space Using Non Magnetic Support Minimum Null Space Using Magnetic Support NOTES 1 The magnet must not contact ferromagnetic materials such as iron or steel Clearances are required between the surface of the magnet and ferromagnetic material as shown Non ferrous material such as copper brass or 300 series stainless steel may contact the magnet without affecting transducer performance 2 Standard Null Space is 2 inches There is no maximum limit for Null Space Less then 2 inches can be specified if magnet clearances meet requirements illustrated above NOTE Clearance between the magn
216. e O ring groove Refer to mil standard MS33649 or SAE J514 for machining of mating surfaces The null space 3 is specified according to the installation design and cylinder dimensions The analog output module provides a null adjustment Make sure that the magnet can be mounted at the proper null position The piston head 4 shown in Figure 3 9 is typical For some installations depending on the clearances it may be desired to countersink the magnet Achamlered rod bushing 5 should be considered for stokes over 5 feet 1 5 meters to prevent wear on the magnet as the piston retracts The bushing should be made from teflon or similar material Anylok self locking insert 6 is provided on the transducer threads An o ring groove is provided at the base of the transducer hex head for pressure sealing The recommended bore for the cylinder rod is 1 2 inch 13 mm The transducer rod includes a 375 inch flush 12 mm end plug a flush end plug is available Use standard industry practices for machining and mounting of all components Consult the cylinder manufacturer for applicable SAE or military specifications Installing Magnets If the null adjustment is inadequate you can design a coupler with adjustments to mount the magnet to the measured member 4 Wiring Procedures This section descnbes general winng procedures for the following types of analog output systems 0 to 10 V displacement 10 to 10 V d
217. e Support e The outside diameter of the pipe must be small enough to clear the magnet Refer to pipe manufacturers specifications and dimensions schedule 10 40 etc to select the appropriate size pipe Guide pipe is typically supported at each end of the pipe 2 2 Open Magnets When using an open magnet make sure the rod is positioned at all times within the active zone of the magnet The transducer cannot operate properly unless the entire stroke of the transducer rod is located within this zone The active zone as shown in Figure 2 7 lies within the inside diameter of the magnet Magnet x Active Zone Figure 2 7 Active Zone for Open Magnets 2 3 Spring Loading or Tensioning The transducer rod can be spring loaded or tensioned using a stationary weight Attach a spring mecha nism or weight to the dead zone of the transducer rod with a clamping device which will not deform the transducer rod The maximum weight or spring tension is 5 to 7 lbs 2 amp Cylinder Installation lt Dead Zone 7 2 50 in 63 5 mm Null as specified for stroke lengths Minimum 2 in 50mm up to 179 9 in for stroke lengths 3 Stroke c 3 in 76 2 mm x gt 180 in Minimum 5 in 127 mm gt gt yD p RE 0 5 in 12 7 mm Bore T X qu Lo O ring MS 28778 8 or equivalent 2 Part No 560315 1 NON ferrous
218. e keys can be detached using either an 5 Align the 12 pin connector on the interconnect board with the socket on the APM ensure the pins are straight and press gently until the module is securely inserted 6 Once the module is inserted secure the APM with hardware provided until they are snug DO NOT OVER TIGHTEN MTS s INSTALLING AN ANALOG PERSONALITY MODULE APM 8 Carefully align the cover to the threads and hand tighten until snug against the gasket DO NOT OVER TIGHTEN COVER 9 Once cover is secure attach the label provided as shown in Figure 2 Figure 2 Temposonics Il Label already attached Apply new label here 10 Connect transducer and verify proper operation APM PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE CAUTION IMPORTANT Before beginning the programming procedures supply power to the APM for a full 5 minutes This will allow all components to stabilize and ensure set point accuracy The output range of the APM is determined by choosing two endpoints within the active stroke length of the transducer and using the two push buttons to assign a voltage to each point The two endpoints are called Set Point 1 SP1 and Set Point 2 SP2 Any voltage from 10 volts to 10 volts may be assigned to either point the APM will automatically scale the output to the specified range Set point 1 must be the set point closest to the head electronics In addition the APM can be programmed for one of the three performance
219. e travels within the waveguide typically 9 09 microseconds per inch This number is stamped on the transducer label N Number of circulations 1 to 1 Example The last 5 digits for a Temposonics II transducer wi resolution are Number of circulations Max Transducer Length inches Resolution inches MO E O EI 4 Co no Ole 1826 028 38 8 434 341 079 23 0 20 2 176 155 PO E TE Co IT E DE0010 h a built in DPM using a 14 inch transducer s 1 External interrogation A synchronous operation customer generates the interrogation pulse to the DPM d Gate Represents the time between the generation of on interrogation pulse and receiving the signal 3 Circulations A process that involves the re triggering of on interrogation pulse a fixed number of times by the return pulse to improve resolution programmed on the DPM Increasing the e maximum pulse width that con be measured by ately 1680 microseconds The maximum stroke length the nodule s of an inch resolution and 2 tenthousandths of an inch with strokes up to 20 inches Use for your systen OCS MIL SENSORS DIVISION CARY NORTH CAROLINA I RAWING NUMBER A APD 00206 9 22 97 SIZE lt u k SHEET 1 OF REVISION B ORIGINATOR DDB
220. ead the system is calibrated at the Counter Card or by external means The scaling inches per count is determined by a fixed frequency crystal oscillator while the zero point is determined by re settable DIP switches on the counter card Generally the system components do not show shift age or drift over time and re calibra tion is not necessary However calibration may be used to compensate for mechanical wear on external mechanical parts connected to the magnet or the transducer 6 6 1 Re zeroing the Digital Counter Card On the Counter Cards the zero point is preset at the factory using a pair of DIP switches 1 and S2 Zero is set at 2 inches from the hex flange of the transducer or at a distance specified by the customer If reverse output is specified the zero point is set at 2 5 inches from the tip of the transducer rod There are three ways of changing the zero setting 1 Mechanical Offset The zero position can be adjusted by changing the mechanical offset of the magnet relative to the transducer rod This requires a coupler device which permits a screw adjustment of the magnet Fabricate a coupler device to hold the magnet The coupler should include adjustment screws that allow fine adjustments of the magnet along the transducer rod Move the magnet to obtain a zero reading If the coupler does not allow magnet position adjustment it can sometimes be used to lock the magnet in place while shims or washers a
221. econds The output value at SP2 is now stored and the system has entered the Operations Mode NOTE Setting up a value outside the valid voltage range will be detected and RE will flash rapidly to indicate an error EXAMPLE BCD Switch Settings SP1 7 565 V SP2 9 480 V 9125 Sl 92 0 9228 99355 93 4 94 7 94 9 S PEU opel 96 0 56 9 NOTE To configure a negative setpoint value S6 5 25 al MTS Systems Corporation MTS Sensors Division w 3001 Sheldon Drive Cary NC 27513 USA Phone 800 633 7609 Fax 919 677 0200 Temposonics is a registered trademark of MTS Systems Corporation All Temposonics products are covered by US patent number 5 545 984 Other patents pending 0797 550414 Revision B 1997 MTS Systems Corporation MTS Sensor Technologie Gmb and Co KG Auf dem Sch ffel 9 D 58513 Ludensheid Federal Republic of Germany Phone 49 23 5195870 Fax 49 23 5156491 MTS Sensors Technology Corp Izumikan Gobancho 12 11 Gobancho Chiyoda ku Tokyo 102 Japan Phone 3 3239 3003 Fax 3 3262 7780 ISO 9001 IFIE CERTIFIED MTS TEMPOSONICS EE mau iTi B Position Sensors 550912A User s Manual Analog Position Sensor System with Separate Electronic Interface 1 Position Sensor Temposonics 2 Analog Board AK 288 Table of Contents Page 1 Introduction 1 2 Analog Board AK 288 1 3 Installation 2 4 Troubleshooting 5 5 System
222. ed Not Used Not Used 5 White Green Stripe Red Vdc TB2 F J2 Pin F TB2 A J2 Pin A 6 Green White Stripe Blue Vdc TB2 D J2 Pin D TB2 D J2 Pin D White Brown Stripe Black Output Pulse Return TB2 B J2 Pin B TB2 B J2 Pin B 8 Brown White Stripe Violet Output Pulse TB2 C J2 Pin C TB2 C J2 Pin G 9 White Gray Stripe Yellow Interrogation TB2 E JZ FINE TB2 E J2 PINE See notes 2 4 10 Gray White Stripe Green Interrogation TB2 E J2 Pin B TB2 E J2 Pin D See notes 3 4 NOTES 1 Frame ground is isolated from circuit ground inside the transducer head 2 For retrofitting AOMs or DIBs with strooke lengths greater than 12 inches interrogation pulse 3 For retrofitting AOMs or DIBs with stroke lengths of 12 inches or less interrogation pulse 4 IMPORTANT under no condition should both the positive and negative interrogation leads be connected at the same time The unused interrogation lead must be connected to DC ground 5 Verify if the cable has striped or solid color leads and make connections accordingly Table 3D Connections Temposonics II to Digital Interface Box DIB Temposonics Il Cable Color Code See Note 1 DIB Connections Pin No Wire Color Wire Color Function J 2 Pin Connections Retrofit connections to Striped leads Solid Leads Mating Connector P N 370160 See Note 2 1 White Blue Stripe White DC Ground J2 Pin B A 2 Blue White Stripe Brown Frame see note 2 J2 Pin B J 3
223. ed from threads Bracket internal to head enclosure Transducer Rod 3 8 in stainless steel Machine Ground Head Assembly Grounding Diagram Cable Shield no connection HW Driver Amplifier signals Return s Module Option Module Control Module AOM DIB Counter Card or other Signals Return s Vee LIA Power Supply Power Return Shield Ground non current carrying AC Line Figure 5 1 Grounding Analog Output Module Customer Interface Analog Output Module Customer Interface 4 20 mA Grounded Loop Figure 5 2 Figure 5 3 4 20mA Grounded Loop 4 20mA Ungrounded Loop NOTES FOR FIGURES 5 2 amp 5 3 1 Selecting the grounding scheme is dependent upon the controller interface 2 The current loop path must be completed for the system to operate 3 The ungrounded loop is not truly isolated from ground Isolators are required if this configuration is needed by the controller interface 13 6 Introduction to Analog Systems Temposonics II Analog Systems include a Linear Displacement Transducer LDT a magnet and an Analog Personality Module APM Analog Output Module AOM or an Analog Output Card See Figures 6 1 6 2 and 6 3 The APM AOM and Analog Output Card generate the interrogation pulse sense the return pulse and develop the analog output displacement signal voltage or current The Analog Personality Module Figure 6 1 is installed in the electronics enclo
224. eeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeegeeeeeeg Re zeroing the Series 80 Digital Counter Card Re zeroing the Series 60 Digital Counter Card former design Scaling Series 60 and 80 Digital Counter Card Troubleshooting General Power Supply Check Wiri iring Counter Card Digital Output Test Procedure 1 2 1 3 1 3 1 7 1 8 3 1 3 1 3 7 3 9 3 10 3 11 3 13 3 13 3 23 3 24 3 24 3 29 3 29 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 3 k 3 E WN 6 N e sO O9 uw E E PS 3 10 vo Ne 3 13 3 14 4 1 4 2 h o vc 1 pg Ono un Table of Contents continued List of Figures Modal CORRE gege omit rmm tmt Terre rere ase dad M Linear Displacement Measurement System Functional Description l l Waveguide Interaction KEEN REENEN CE A re q bet Digital Electronics s o aos EGO RE e EC e fe LDT Assembly ao Ferromagnetic Material Mounting Specifications e ee eege EX SER SY Cire ee 3 3 Types of Magnets E 40925266 EN Transducer Rod Positions within an Open Magnet 3 5 Loop Support 429 64 4 0944499 828492829299859 8 99 6222292 Sal Channel Support 20o2520690 7979999 DEENEN 57 oie QI BODIE Was 2 8 0 9 9 CRE ee Reese n AI ae 55 1 19 49 949 9 2 TER cee 3 8 Typical Cylinder Installation Piston at Full Retraction 3 9 Signal and Power Wiring Digital Systems
225. emposonics Il Replacement of Existing Temposonics with AOM Temposonics II Integrated or Extension Cable Notes 1 2 Analog Output Module AOM PinNo Wire Color Code Wire Color Code Functional Description Terminal Blocks Military Style MS Connectors 1 White Blue Stripe White DC Ground TB2 B J2 Pin B 2 Blue White Stripe Brown Frame Note 3 TB2 B J2 Pin B 3 White Orange Stripe Gray Not Used Not Used Not Used 4 Orange White Stripe Pink Not Used Not Used Not Used 5 White Green Stripe Red Vdc TB2 F Note 4 J2 Pin F Note 4 6 Green White Stripe Blue Vdc TB2 D J2 Pin D 7 White Brown Stripe Black Return GND TB2 B J2 Pin B 8 Brown White Stripe Violet Output return pulse TB2 C JZ Pin e 9 White Gray Stripe Yellow Interrogation Note 5 TB2 E J2 Pin E See warning below 10 Gray White Stripe Green Interrogation Note 6 TB2 B J2 Pin B See warning below NOTES 1 Verify if the cable has striped or solid color leads and make connections accordingly 2 Cable Belden 78105 or equivalent 3 Frame ground is isolated from circuit ground inside the electronics enclosure or head of the transducer 4 Connect to TB2 Pin A if the stoke length exceeds 180 inches 5 For retrofitting AOMs with stoke lengths greater than 12 inches in stroke length and positive 4 interrogation 6 For retrofitting AOMs with stoke lengths greater than 12 inches in stroke length and negative in
226. ency fc assuming N 1 and D 1 3 If the calculated frequency is greater than 40 MHz divide by N 2 4 8 16 32 etc until you find a value for N which determines an fc between 11 and 40 MHz 4 Taking the N value from Step 3 and the given stroke use the graph in Figure A 1 to determine the update time 5 If the update time is unacceptable select a lower N value which yields a clock frequency fe of 56 MHz or less Then recheck the update time You can make a note of the parameters as you go along Number of bits required Resolution R Circulations N Update Time less than ms Example 2 Given 48 0 0001 480 000 counts From Table A 1 e Stroke 48 in this requires 19 bits e Resolution 0 0001 in fe 0 11 0 0001 1100 MHz NO e Maximum Update Time 30 milliseconds 3 Try N 2 and divide f by N 1100 2 550 This Specify is greater than 56 MHz Number of bits required 18 4 Try N 4 and divide 1100 4 275 This is also Resolution R 0 0001 in greater than 56 MHz Re circulations 32 5 Try N 8 16 and 32 For N 32 the clock crystal Update Time less than 25 ms value is 34 4 MHz fc 34 MHz 6 The graph in Figure A 1 indicates an update time of less than 25 milliseconds which is acceptable Repeat Steps 1 6 using half the resolution and note that the update time is unacceptable Note that this application can also be satisfied in some cases w
227. ent 36 000 inches Reading 35 420 counts or 35 420 in BCD Scale Factor 36 0 0010163 inches per count 35 420 counts per inch in BCD For systems that will be used for only one or more discrete positions move the magnet to the known measured positions that will be repeated during system operation Observe and record each reading Compare each observed reading to the measured reading and record results Use the observed readings in software programming as the set point or control points For greater system accuracy repeat this step and average the readings NOTE To obtain maximum system accuracy perform tbe above procedures at or near the actual system operating conditions 4 For systems that are used for continuous readings or variable set points apply the scale factor in Step 2 to software programming so that each reading is multiplied by the scale factor con sult receiver device manual Continue to Step 5 5 Move the magnet to a known measured position at or near half of stroke Observe the read ing and compare to the measurement If the reading varies by more than 0 05 full stroke repeat Step 2 using a different measurement near full stroke Check the new scale factor by performing Step 5 again NOTE To obtain maximum system accuracy several scale factors should be calculated using different measurements and the factors should be averaged keadings should be taken at o
228. er interface box and counter card are factory calibrated to provide the desired resolution The counter card crystal frequency is calculated based upon the transducer velocity gradient which is unique to the transducer serial number The zero pre set is factory set on the counter card and is also matched to the transducer To maintain a scaled output the user should use a transducer and counter card with the same serial number Substitution of interface boxes of the same stroke and recirculation number does not affect the output reading An unscaled system is provided upon request An unscaled system may require calibration refer to Subsection 3 4 to mathematically correct the digital output to read in inches millimeters etc The scale factor for unscaled systems is not a discrete number of inches per count but should be within 0 2 of the specified resolution for 27 28 MHz systems For example an unscaled system specified for 0 001 inches per count may have a scale factor of 0 001002 inches per count approximately Similarly an unscaled BCD output may have a scale factor of 1 002 inches per inch of reading Interchanging system components which do not have the same serial number will also result in an unscaled output Refer to troubleshooting Subsection 4 4 and Subsection 1 3 3 below 1 3 2 Universal Interface Box or Card Universal boxes or cards are supplied to certain customers upon request In a universal box the DIB i
229. er of bits LSB MSB MSB determined by dividing stroke by resolution and comparing to maximum counts For example 25 inches 0 001 25 000 This requires a maximum count of 32 767 yielding an MSB at pin 19 uH H M M H H H H H H H H HM H H M 131 071 3 18 Table 3 6 is based upon a counter card with 4 divider factory set A single card is capable of 16 bits natural binary output maximum For the 27 28 MHz crystal the resulting resolution and recirculations vs stroke are as follows l For 0 000125 inches N 125 recirculations stroke up to 8 inches 2 For 0 00025 inches N 64 recirculations stroke up to 16 inches 3 For 0 0005 inches N 32 recirculations stroke up to 32 inches 4 For 0 001 inches N 16 recirculations stroke up to 65 inches 5 For 0 002 inches N 8 recirculations stroke up to 131 inches 6 For 0 004 inches N 4 recirculations stroke up to 262 inches 7 For 0 008 inches N 2 recirculations stroke up to 524 inches 8 For 0 016 inches N 1 or none recirculations Table 3 6 Counter Card Output 4 Bit Decimal Maximum Counts Weight Value vs Number of bits 1 z1 bit 3 z2 Obit 7 x23 bit 15 4 bit 31 5 bit 63 6 bit 127 7 bit 255 8 bit 511 9 bit o 10 bit MSB determined by dividing stroke by resolution and comparing to maximum counts For example 25 inches 0 001 25 000 This requires a maximum count of 32 767 yielding an MS
230. erall Dimensions AOM LDT Assembly Magnetic Material Mounting Specifications Flexible Transducer Loop Support Channel Support Guide Pipe Support Active Zone for Open Magnets Typical Cylinder Installation Cable Preparation for Strain Relief J1 Connections Strain Relief J1 Connections Velocity Output Strain Relief J2 Connections Strain Relief Grounding the Analog System Analog Output Module Signals Specifications Voltage Output J1 Connections MS Connector Ungrounded 4 20 mA Current Output J1 Connections MS Connector Grounded 4 20 mA Current Output J1 Connections MS Connector J2 Connections MS Connector moo mom C2 m gt gt gt 1 2 4 4 aa A 1 Introduction WM Lo 0 lo The Temposonics II Linear Displacement Transducer measurement system with analog output precisely senses the position of an extemal magnet to measure displacements with a high degree of resolution The system measures the time interval between an interrogating pulse and a return pulse The interrogating pulse is transmitted through the transducer waveguide and the return pulse is generated by a movable permanent magnet representing the displacement to be measured The system includes a linear displacement transducer LDT a magnet and an analog output module AO
231. ermany 3001 Sheldon Drive Postfach 8130 D 58489 Ludenscheid Germany Cary NC 27513 Phone 49 2351 95870 Phone 800 633 7609 Fax 49 2351 56491 Fax 919 677 0200 Internet www temposonics com Temposonics sensors are a registered trademark of MTS Systems Corporation All Temposonics sensors are covered by US patent number 5 545 984 and others Additional patents are pending Part Number 11 98 550032 Revision F 1998 MTS Systems Corporation MTS Sensors Technology Corporation Izumikan Gobancho 12 11 Gobancho Chiyoda ku Tokyo 102 J apan Phone 813 3239 3003 Fax 813 3262 7780 Cen ISO 9001 CERTIFIED MEMBER LIRE Sensors Division Temposonics l Linear Displacement Transducer Installation and Instruction M anual for DIGITAL SYSTEMS P N 550033 Rev F GENERAL INFORMATION MTS PHONE NUMBERS Application questions 000 633 7609 Service 800 248 0532 Fax 919 677 0200 SHIPPING ADDRESS MTS Systems Corporation sensors Division 3001 Sheldon Drive Cary North Carolina 27513 HOURS M onday Thursday 7 30 a m to 6 30 p m EST EDT Friday 7 30 a m to 5 00 p m EST EDT TABLE OF CONTENTS Section Page 1 INTRODUCTION 1 1 1 Theory of Operation Magnetostriction 1 1 2 Temposonics Il LDT Specifications 2 1 3 Specifications for Temposonics Il LDTs over 180 inches 3
232. errogation lead must be connected to DC ground 4 When using a Temposonics Il transducer with a Digital Personality Module DPM or an RS422 Personality Module RPM it is recommended that both the positive and negative interrogation leads are used to produce a differential interrogation signal 5 For external interrogation mode ONLY 6 Temposonics Il w APM requires 13 5 to 15 Vdc All others require 12 Vdc to 15 Vdc Temposonics Il 10 Pin Connector Table 3B Connections Original Temposonics Transducer Original Temposonics Connector Pin Number Wire Color Code Signal Function A Green or Gray 15 Vdc B Black DC Ground Orange or Brown Return Pulse from LDT D Blue 15 Vde E White Interrogation Pulse F Red 12 Vdc 11 12 Table 3C Connections Temposonics II Transducer to Analog Output Module AOM AOM Connections Stroke Lengths lt 180 in AOM Connections Stroke Lengths gt 180 in Temposonics II Cable Color Code See Note 5 PinNo Wire Color Wire Color Function Terminal Military Style Terminal Military Style Striped leads Solid Leads Blocks Connectors Blocks Connectors 1 White Blue Stripe White DC Ground TB2 B J2 Pin B TB2 B J2 Pin B 2 Blue White Stripe Brown Frame see note 1 TB2 B J2 Pin B TB2 B J2 Pin B 3 White Orange Stripe Gray Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used 4 Orange White Stripe Pink Not Used Not Used Not Us
233. erse Acting Negative offset counts up when magnet is moved to the head and counts down when moved to the tip Move the magnet to the desired mechanical start position and calibrate the offset as follows 1 Hold the programming switch in Position 2 until the ZERO LED begins to flash 3 sec ADJUST The displacement output indicated position without the offset calculation 2 Enter the desired offset value using BCD switches S1 S6 EXAMPLE Switch Settings S1 S6 for Offset Value POSITIVE OFFSET in inches BCD Switch 700 3571 104 5841 403 5705 445 8405 91 1 1 B D 92 93 S4 9D 96 NEGATIVE OFFSET in inches BCD Switch 00 3571 04 5841 03 5705 45 8405 S1 1 1 5 5 S 2 93 94 59 96 MISES 1 Hold the programming switch in Position 2 to restart programming sequence 3 sec SET UP NOTE If a set value is overwritten the programming mode has to be set again by repeatedly tapping the dip Switch to Position 1 21 22 7 8 RUN Operation Mode Red LED 1 Hold the programming switch in Position 1 until the RUN LED begins to flash 3 sec SETUP The Programming Mode is exited and all parameter settings are stored in an EEPROM within the MK292 module You are now in Operation Mode 8 Optional Analog Output for the MK292 for Recording Purposes Only NOTE The analog output is available as an option and must be specified at the time of order
234. es maximum will be permissible Figure 2 9a O ring Boss Detail 10 1 180 in Recommended Minimum Spotface Diameter See Note 1 0 004 lt 0 813 in 0 002 in i g 0 008 in 0 004 in 0 094 in Max ZL 0 125 uy 5 6 008 in AE R0 015 in P 1 100 in 1250 in Max t 459 5 Been uten See Note 3 4 See Note 4 15 STIL Pitch Dia NOTES 1 If face of port is on a machined surface dimensions 1 180 and 0 094 need not apply as long as R0 008 0 004 is maintained to avoid damage to the O ring during installation 2 Measure perpendicularity to A at this diameter 3 his dimension applies when tap drill cannot pass through entire boss 4 This dimension does not conform to SAE J1926 1 3 4 16 UNF 2B Thread 90 500 in Ref ef See Note 4 Figure 2 9b Port Detail SAE J1926 1 2 5 Installing Magnets Figure 2 10 below shows the standard magnet types and dimensions The circular magnet with an outside diameter of 1 29 inches and 0 53 inch inside diameter Part No 201542 is the most common and is suit able for most applications Larger magnets with an outside diameter of 2 5 inches are typically only used with Temposonics transducers that exceed 180 inches in stroke length Magnets with a 90 degree cut out are used in applications that require intermediate supports along the transducer rod If upon installation the null adjustment is inadequate you c
235. esign makes the module rugged and reliable Inside Temposonics LDT Head Interrogation Pluse gt It 1 us nominal RS422 L _ Personality TIL pi RS422 Module TTL Level L Excitation Pulse OV W id IF externally interrogated BE Return Pulse Displacement gt th 1 us pulse wid Figure 4 7 The RPM Start Stop Signal 17 18 4 4 Digital Counter Card The digital counter card measures the on time of the DPM pulse duration signal This is accomplished by using a crystal oscillator with frequency selected to provide the desired resolution counts per inch A 27 28 MHz crystal is typically used The leading edge of the pulse duration signal enables the counter registers and the trailing edge triggers a latch pulse to download the count into the output registers The latch pulse is normally available for the receiver device to interpret as a data valid signal normally low data valid TTL level high data invalid The latch pulse frequency is the same as the interrogation frequency and the duration is nominal ly 1 microsecond Scaling of the counter card is accomplished by matching the counter card crystal frequency to the gradi ent of the transducer to provide 0 001 inch 0 0005 inch etc per count Unscaled systems may require scaling within the receiver device depending upon desired accuracy 4 5 in 114 3 mm a 0 35 in 8 9 mm 0 175
236. et Waveguide Sensing coil Conducting element Interaction of magnetic fields causes waveguide to twist A Magnetic field from interrogation pulse bS Waveguide enclosure Figure 1 1 Waveguide Interaction 1 2 Temposonics II LDT Specifications Parameter Specifications Input Voltage 12 to 15 Vdc Current Draw Transducer Only 15 Vde at 100 mA maximum 25 mA minimum current draw varies with magnet position maximum draw occurs when magnet is at 2 in 50 6 mm from the flange and minimum update time is being utilized Transducer with e RS 422 Personality Module RPM 12 to 15 Vdc at 140 mA maximum e Digital Personality Module DPM 15 Vde at 150 mA maximum 75 mA minimum 15 Vde at 100 mA maximum 25 mA minimum Displacement Up to 25 feet 7620 millimeters Dead Space 2 5 inches 63 5 millimeters for stroke lengths up to 179 9 in 3 inches 76 2 millimeters for stroke lengths gt 180 in Electronics Enclosure IP 67 Non linearity lt 0 05 of full scale or 0 002 inch 0 05 mm whichever is greater Resolution 1 gradient x crystal freq mHz x circulation maximum resolution 0 006 mm or 0 00025 in Repeatability Equals resolution Hysteresis 0 0008 inch 0 02 mm maximum Update Time Resolution and Stroke dependent Minimum Stroke specified in inches 3 x 9 1 us Operating Temperature Head Electronics Transducer Rod 4
237. et and the transducer rod is not critical However contact between the components will cause wear over time The installation of supports or readjustment of the supports is recommended if the magnet contacts the transducer rod 3 Move the permanent magnet full scale to check that it moves freely If not Gf the magnet rubs on the transduc er you can correct this by mounting a support bracket to the end of the transducer Long transducers may need additional supports to be attached to the transducer rod Transducer supports are described later in this section 2 1 Types of Transducer Supports Long transducers 48 inches or longer may require supports to maintain proper alignment between the transducer rod and the permanent magnet When transducer rod supports are used special open ended permanent magnets are required Transducer supports attached to the active stroke length must be made of a non ferrous material thin enough to permit the permanent magnet to pass without obstruction Because the permanent magnet does not enter the dead zone supports connected within the dead zone may be made of any material The main types of supports are loop channel and guide pipe supports 2 1 1 Loop Supports Loop supports are fabricated from non ferrous materials thin enough to permit free movement of the magnet Loop supports are recommended for straight transducers and may be spaced apart approximately every three feet They may be used
238. eturn Pulse from LDT Blue 15 Vde White Interrogation Pulse Red 12 Vdc APM Option DC Ground Frame Displacement Return Displacement Out Vdc Vdc Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used 11 4 Troubleshooting the Linear Displacement Transducer 12 NOTE The following checklist is for general diagnostic purposes Purchase of replace ment components should not be based solely on this checklist Consult MTS Sensors Division for recommendations and factory service before ordering replacement components Use the below checklist when operational problems are encountered The possible causes of faulty out put are listed below in order of probability of occurrence and should be checked in order Improper power supply power connection Mismatched system components Ground loops improper grounding Improper wiring Incorrect receiver device or software Improper magnet mounting EMI noise affecting transducer or transducer cable Circuit fault within transducer Will cause erratic or unstable output CON NAW KR LAM Ne Update Time Jus ius Interrogation pulse sent to LDT Pin 10 Interrogation pulse sent to LDT Pin 9 Return pulse from LDT pin 8 Figure 4 1 Temposonics II Transducer Signals 5 Grounding Ground connection between bracket and outer cover made by threads Connector 10 pins WW Flange electrically isolat
239. external ly interrogated an RS422 excitation pulse is fed from an external control system The Temposonics linear displacement measurement systems are available with either synchronous or asynchronous options These options are available by the configuration of three miniature rotary switches SW1 SW2 and SW3 4 2 1 Synchronous External Interrogating Mode In synchronous operation an interrogation pulse is supplied to the linear displacement transducer from an external counter module After supplying the pulse the counter module waits until the recirculation electronics return a termination pulse and then ends the cycle The time between the interrogation and termination pulses is proportional to the distance between the transducer head assembly and the movable magnet In this synchronous mode SW1 and SW2 are set to the hexadecimal value of the desired number of recirculations plus 80 i e 81 to FF hex or 129 to 255 SW1 is the least significant digit and SW2 is the most significant digit Permissible settings are 81 to FF corresponding to 1 to 127 recir culations SW3 is ignored in this mode 15 16 Update Time User Defined External InterrogationTiming 4 L DPM Output Figure 4 5 Timing for Two Circulations 4 2 2 Asynchronous Internal Interrogating Mode In asynchronous operation the transducer interrogates itself The DPM uses a fixed interrogation frequency Switches SW1 and S
240. f the digital counter card An optional 12us wide latch pulse is available if the lus pulse is too fast TTL Level CS saa 0 Connect complementary gates from the Gate TTL Level Digital Interface Box DIB Gate x or Digital Personality Module DPM to Digital Counter Card Pins 4 and 5 Date INVALID during Latch Pulse Pin 3 of Digital Counter Cord Data VALID Latch Pulse Figure 6 2 Latch Pulse 6 3 2 Protocol The recommended protocol for assuring that valid count data is received from the counter card is as follows e Poll the data valid output for a logic 1 indicating that data is currently invalid but will soon be valid e Poll the same output for a logic 0 indicating that new valid count data is present at the out puts of the counter card e Bring the latch inhibit input of the counter card low This prevents the outputs of the counter card from changing e When ready accept the data into the user control system processing e After sampling bring the latch inhibit input high If this protocol is followed data presented to the user control system from the input module will be valid count data and the effects of electrical noise and signal transitions will be minimized 6 3 3 Latch Inhibit Input The latch inhibit input is available on the digital counter card to freeze the binary output signal The users receiver provides an inhibit signal to pin 24 on the counter car
241. ficant digit 0 1 mm 2 1 2 Using the N value selected look up the update time in the graph Figure A 1 If this update time is acceptable record the values for N R D and update time and go on to Step 3 If this update time is not acceptable try Step 1 again using the values for D 1 The divider D 2 is preferred to prevent instability of the least significant digit LSD If one or more digits are dis carded however D 2 offers only marginal improvement over D 1 3 Use Table 3A to determine the number of BCD bits required to generate the given resolution NOTE If the number of bits required is 18 or more requiring two counter cards and the desired resolution is 0 1 inch 0 01 inch or 1 mm then consider the alter nate procedure in Section IV You can make a note of the parameters as you go along Number of bits required Resolution R Circulations N Update Time less than ms PROCEDURE IV System Sizing for BCD Output Other Resolutions Non Standard Clock Crystal For 0 1 in 0 0001 in 0 01 mm and 0 001 mm a non standard counter card clock crystal must be estimated using the following procedure NOTE Procedure IV should be used only when absolutely necessary Ordering a non standard clock crystal will add approxi mately four weeks to normal manufac turing lead times An additional nomi nal charge also applies Procedure III above should be used whenever
242. h PCB connected Turn component side up with J1 to the left and J2 to the right as you face the board 3 Make one connection to Pin E on the J2 6 pin connector which represents the positive or negative pulse Example e Post E14 to J2 Pin E is polarity e Post E13 to J2 Pin E is polarity Digital Interface Box PCB Board Component Side Up o o o o o0 3 o9 00 E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 ER ES E10 Ell E12 E13 E14 J1 J2 Figure C 1 Digital Interface Box Posts El E14 APPENDIX D Troubleshooting This section consists of troubleshooting procedures to be used when operational problems are encountered NOTE The following procedures are for general troubleshooting purposes Purchase of replacement components should not be determined solely upon results of these tests Consult MTS Sensors Division for recommendations before purchasing replacement system components D 1 General If the output signal is erratic or unchanging turn off power and recheck mechanical and electrical installa tion Once all steps have been checked continue with diagnostic test procedures to determine the cause of fault The possible causes of faulty output are listed below in order of probability of occurrence and should be checked in order 8 7 Improper power supply power connection Mismatched system components Ground loops improper grounding Improper wiring for counter card connecti
243. h front panel Figure 5 NEMA 4 Enclosure MTS me MTS Systems Corporation Sensors Division 3001 Sheldon Drive Cary North Carolina 27513 Telephone 1 800 457 6620 Fax 919 677 0200 04 95 550260 Revision C Printed in USA Copyright MTS Systems Corporation iSO 9001 di CERTIFIED Natonal FLUID POWER Assocetornt MEMOCA 11 MTS XRXX TEMPOSONICS PRODUCT S P EC 1 F 1 G ATI Features e Microprocessor controlled External synchronization e Output selections BCD Natural Binary Gray Code e Program settings Zero point Resolution Active stroke length Output orientation Error feedback e Noise rejection e Data ready Data hold e Master Slave opera Temposonics Digital Output Module Model MK292 The Temposonics MK292 Digital Output Module pro vides an interface between a Temposonics position sensor and a system con troller The selection of dis placement outputs from the MK292 allows almost uni versal compatibility they include BCD Binary and Gray Code DATA READY and ERROR feedback as well as logic inputs DATA HOLD EXTERNAL START MASTER SLAVE and TRI STATE are standard with the MK292 If required an optional sub board assem bly provides an analog out put range 0 to 10 Vdc or 10 to 0 Vdo Two mounting configura tions are available see above photograph Both are designed for installation in a standard 19 inch mo
244. h quality shielded multiconductor cable can be used for all signals including power 2 Cable length between 50 and 300 feet Use a high quality 100 ohm twin axial cable such as Belden 8227 for the positive and negative pulse duration gate signals The power supply wires are routed through an additional multiconductor cable selected and sized according to industry standards Wire gage for dc power to the interface box should be selected to ensure minimum possible voltage drop 3 3 3 Digital Counter Card Connections Tables 3 3 3 4 and 3 5 show the counter card output connection tables In order to select the proper table the following order variables must be known A Stroke inches mm B Resolution inches mm C Recirculations zN D Outpu format BCD natural binary E Optional inputs outputs latch inhibit input The counter card divider if supplied is determined knowing A B and C and is obvious from the table description Series 60 Counter Cards Refer to Figure 3 10 for power input 5 Vdc and interface box gate signal connections Pin 24 n the counter card is normally connected to the latch pulse output and is normally low high during update of output J1 Diqital Interface Box FUNCTION 15V 15SV Circurt Ground Common SV output output Case Ground External Interrog Pulse optional PIN H B A C G K J E D Optionally a latch inhibit input is supplied o
245. he transducer within the channel Figure 3 6 shows a channel support Channel supports are available from various manufacturers or may be fabncated Figure 3 6 Channel Support Guide Pipe Supports Guide pipe supports are normally used for flexible transducers A guide pipe support is constructed of non ferrous material straight or bent to the desired shape As shown in Figure 3 7 both inside and outside dimensions of the pipe are critical Because the transducer rod is installed inside the pipe the inside diameter of the pipe must be large enough to clear the rod The outside diameter of the pipe must be small enough to clear the magnet Refer to pipe manufacturers specifications and dimensions schedule 10 40 etc to select the appropriate size pipe Guide pipe is typically supported at each end of the pipe Lal 4 Mounting Figure 3 7 Guide Pipe Support Open Magnets When using an open magnet make sure the rod is positioned at all limes within the active zone of the magnet The transducer cannot operate properly unless the entire stroke of the transducer rod is located within this zone The active zone as shown in Figure 3 8 lies within the inside diameter of the magnet inactive Figure 3 8 Active Zone tor Open Magnets Mounting Spring Loading or Tensioning The transducer rod flexible or ngid can be spring loaded or tensioned using a stationary weight Attach a spring mechanism or
246. her Style 0 Standard 15 Vdc P S Temp Range 35 to 150 F 1 67 to 66 C 2 12 Vdc P S Temp Range 35 to 150 F 1 67 to 66 C 9 Special Unit of Measurement Sensor Length U US Customary inches and tenths M Metric millimeters Stroke Length of Sensor _ Stroke Length Note This 4 digit code represents either inches and tenths or millimeters depending in the Unit of Measurement selected 4 1 75 in 1 31 in 44 5 mm d 33 3 mm L 0 06 in 1 5 mm 5 38 in 136 7 mm _ 4 88 in 124mm 1 5 in 38 1 mm 1 75 in 44 5 mm MS3102A14S 6P MS3112E125 10P Connector Connector 4 Holes L_ 0 44 in 11 each 0 177 in dia 4 5 mm 044 in 11 2 mm 0 25 in 6 3 mm Figure 5 5 Digital Interface Box Dimensions 3 4 1 Accessories for Digital Interface Box e 10 pin female MS connector P N 370013 e 6 pin female MS connector P N 370015 3 5 MK 292 Digital Output Module for Intrinsically Safe System MK 292 _ 0 1 MK 292 Digital Output Module Hardware 10 Card 11 Card with Analog Sub board Assembly Sub board assembly AK294 0 to 10 Vdc or 10 to 0 Vdc output 50 Module 51 Module with Analog Sub board Assembly Sub board assembly AK294 0 to 10 Vdc or 10 to 0 Vdc output Software 01 For use with Intrinsically Safe Sensor and Digital Interface Box 170 mm T Ra 50 4 mm I O Mrs O o MK 292 AU UAU UAY ME
247. hich represents the or pulse Example post E14 to J2 pin E is polarity post E13 to J2 pin E is polarity A post component side PCB AAA AA AAA AAAA E1 through E14 Cover J1 J2 rr oma 201m go 3742031 Assy 60lO 9 op w INUIT 970W BVI NIKI S31ON SAL s23oi og 23010 32 IMS sid E SX wis ATS imi 7 Bod iO 30 did No Q3MwLsN 39 OL T 4 ZAA va 3 23 13 In CA C1 O O c px on di Sensors Division MTS Systems Corporation Box 13128 Research Triangle Park North Carolina 27709 Telephone 919 677 0100 Fax 919 677 0200 0990 5500 19 Supplement RECH Sensors Division Temposonics Intrinsically S afe Position Sensors Ordering Guide amp Installation and Instruction Manual Part Number 550420 Revision D 2 20 98 Section TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 1 INTRODUCTION BEE 1 2 SYSTEM COMPONENTS 2 SEET 3 3 HOW TO ORDER SYSTEM COMPONENTS a 4 3 1 Temposonics Intrinsically Safe Position ner 4 S 2 EXTENSION 4 3 9 Analog D p IVIORUIE eeh 6 MNT Hee EE 8 3 5 MK 292 Digital Output IOC UNE uino tet atte ttti 9 A MECHANICALINSTALLATON kk 10 4 1 Installing a Temposonics Position Sensor 10 47 VDESOL ENER RN A 11 BPW OOPS UNO 11 42 2 GIANNIS We UDO ONS ops Qa ei eaten es AT 12 4 23 Gtll ge PIDE SUPPO a m u uu ua 1
248. his requires a maximum count of 32 767 thus yielding an MSB at Pin 22 NOTE When using more than 18 bits Natural Binary or 17 bits BCD a second counter card is required Table 6F is based upon a counter card with 2 divider factory set A single card is capable of 17 bits natural binary output maximum For the 27 28 MHz crystal the resulting resolution and recirculations versus stroke are as follows Resolution Circulations Stroke Length 0 000125 64 Up to 16 inches 0 00025 32 Up to 32 Inches 0 0005 16 Up to 65 inches 0 001 8 Up to 131 inches 0 002 4 Up to 262 inches 0 004 2 Up to 300 inches 0 008 1 Up to 300 inches Table 6F Counter Card Output 2 Pin No Bit Weight Decimal Value Bit Maximum Counts vs Number of Bits 9 LSB 20 1 1 bit 8 2 3 2 bits 7 22 7 3 bits 14 23 15 4 bits 13 24 31 5 bits 12 29 63 6 bits 11 26 127 7 bits 18 27 255 8 bits 17 28 511 9 bits 16 29 1023 10 bits 15 210 2047 11 bits 20 21 4095 12 bits 21 212 8191 13 bits 22 213 16 383 14 bits 19 214 32 767 15 bits 23 219 65 535 16 bits 15 MSB2 216 131 071 17 bits NOTES 1 LSB Least Significant Bit 2 MSB Most Significant Bit MSB is determined by dividing the stroke length by the resolution and comparing to the maximum count For Example 25 in 0 001 25 000 this requires a maximum count of 32 767 thus yielding an MSB at
249. igital Personality Module DPM Table 6B Temposonics II Retrofit Wiring Connections For direct replacement of Original Temposonics transducer using an existing DIB Temposonics Il Cable Color Code DIB Connections see Note 1 2 Pin No Wire Color Wire Color Functional Description J2 Retrofit connections to Striped Leads Solid Leads Pin Connections R3 connector P N 370160 See Note 7 1 White Blue Stripe White DC Ground J2 Pin B A 2 Blue White Stripe Brown Frame Note 3 J2 Pin B J 3 White Orange Stripe Gray Not Used Not Used K 4 Orange White Stripe Pink Not Used Not Used G 5 White Green Stripe Red VCC J2 Pin T H Pin A if stroke length exceeds 200 in 6 Green White Stripe Blue VEE J2 Pin D H 7 White Brown Stripe Black Amp Return Gnd J2 Pin B Not Used 8 Brown White Stripe Violet Amp Output Return pulse J2 Pin Not Used 9 White Gray Stripe Yellow Interrogation Note 4 6 J2 Pin E E 10 Gray White Stripe Green Interrogation Note 5 6 J2 Pin B D Notes 1 Verify if the cable has striped or solid color leads and make connections accordingly 2 Cable Belden YR8105 or equivalent 3 Frame ground is isolated from circuit ground inside the transducer head 4 For retrofitting DIBs with strokes greater than 12 inches interrogation 5 For retrofitting DIBs with strike lengths less than 12 inches interrogation 6 IMPORTANT Connect the unused interrogation lead to ground 7 Connections
250. impedance 100 Velocity output 0 to 10 Vdc positive traveling away Irom the LDT head assembly negative traveling towards the LDT head assembly Standard features of Analog Output Module External noise rejection circuitry to eliminate EMI noise from motors relays or other sources Low ripple filter to reduce ac ripple on the output signal lo 5 mV maximum Options available gt D C xt Or Change wthou gem Ce B C xO D wow T lt x C Ip Coro w 2 Adjustments This section explains how to adjust and calibrate the Temposonics Linear Position Transducer LDT system with analog output The Analog Output Module AOM includes adjustments for null zero and full scale span The adjustments compensate for the following differences between transducer gradients small offsets in the magnet position due to mounting wearin the moving parts of the mechanical system to which the magnet is attached In cases where a coupler device is used for adjusting the magnet as described in Section 4 the coupler is used for coarse adjustments of both null and scale while the AOM is used for fine adjustments Nominal Range of Adjustment Null From 3 inch up to 3 of total stroke Full scale 2 of total stroke Figure 2 1 shows the location of position adjustments and terminal boards on the AOM ln ele lien ele Fd ed ee bees ee NN tat lele p wr ale D DPE
251. in 4 4mm 3 8 in 96 5 mm n EN 5 85 in 148 6 mm 48 6 250 in 158 75 mm 0 95 in 24 1 mm m 2 60 in 66 mm Figure 4 8 TCS Digital Counter Card 0 40 in 10 2 mm 4 4 1 Scaling In most cases the system supplied is a scaled system Scaling refers to the selection of system component variables so that the natural binary output represents a discrete number of inches per count such as 0 002 inch 0 001 inch or 0 0005 inch per count For BCD outputs scaling means that the output reads directly in inches mm etc and need not be corrected mathematically The system variables that are matched include the transducer stroke the number of recirculations the null point and the counter card crystal oscillator clock The transducer DPM and counter card are factory calibrated to provide the desired resolution The counter card crystal frequency is calculated based upon the transducer velocity gradient which is unique to the transducer serial number The zero is factory set on the counter card and is also matched to the transducer To maintain a scaled output the user should use a transducer and counter card with the same serial number Substitution of DPMs with the same number of recirculations does not affect the output reading An unscaled system is provided upon request An unscaled system may require calibration to mathematically correct the digital
252. in the special groove Use the hex head to tighten the transducer assembly 2 Install the permanent magnet over the LDT rod Mount the permanent magnet to the movable device whose displacement will be measured To minimize the effect of magnetic materials i e iron steel etc on the mag netic field of the permanent magnet ensure the minimum spacing requirements are met as shown in Figure 2 4 CAny non magnetic materials can be in direct contact with the permanent magnet without affecting perfor mance Ferromagnetic Material 1 8 in Minimum 5 8 in Minimum Tip Figure 2 3a Minimum Magnet Clearance Using Magnetic Supports NON Ferromagnetic Support Va 5 8 in Minimum lt gt Threads Z Ferromagnetic Support magne P4 Magnet P 4 A A 1 in minimum to clear threads A 5 8 in plus support thickness Figure 2 3b Figure 2 3c Minimum Null Space Using Non Magnetic Support Minimum Null Space Using Magnetic Support Notes 1 The magnet must not contact ferromagnetic materials such as iron or steel Clearances are required between the surface of the magnet and ferromagnetic material as shown Non ferrous material such as copper brass or 300 series stainless steel may contact the magnet without affecting transducer performance 2 Standard Null Space is 2 inches There is no maximum limit for Null Space Less then 2 inches can be specified if magnet clearances
253. ion e 26 Vdc Power Supply Temposonics 1 i Red z E 3 MTL 728 or Position Sensor Stahl 9001 01 280 100 10 3 MTL 710 or Stahl 9001 01 086 150 10 4 2 Brown or Orange 3 MTL 710 or 1 Stahl 9001 01 086 150 10 B 4 2 Hazardous Area Safe Area Figure 5 5 Analog Output Module with MS Connectors Pin C Ground Pin A 26 Vdc Analog Output Module w MS Style Connectors and 24 V Power Supply Option 5 2 1 Analog Output Module AOM Output Connections TB1 Table 5A Standard AOM Strain Relief MS Connector ECHO Connection Pin Designation TB1 A D Displacement Output B E Displacement Output Return C n a n a D n a n a Table 5B AOM w Velocity Output Option Strain Relief MS Connector Pi nanan Connection Pin Designation TB1 A D Displacement Output B Displacement Output Return C E Velocity Output D Velocity Output Table 5C AOM w Dual Channel Option Strain Relief MS Connector p Connection Pin Designation TB1 A D Channel 1 Displacement Output E E Channel 2 Displacement Output C n a n a D n a n a 5 3 Digital Systems Power Supply and Sensor Connections SYSTEM e Temposonics Position Sensor e Digital Interface Box e 26 Vdc Power Supply e Power Supplies 15 15 and 5 Vdc 26 Vdc Power Supply Power 15 Vdc Bee 15 Vdc C
254. ion Preferred Mode is limited to stroke lengths up to 48 inch es and will provide an output resolution of approximately 0 001 inches In applications exceeding 48 inches the APM must be set for Balanced Mode or Update Preferred Mode In the program ming procedure the Resolution Preferred Mode is indicated by an output of 0 volts Balanced Mode In this mode the APM offers a balance between update time and resolution For stroke lengths up to 250 inches the output resolution will be approximately 0 003 inches In the programming procedure this mode is indicated by an output of 8 4 volts Update Preferred Mode In this mode the APM produces the fastest possible update time while sacrificing resolution For stroke lengths up to 300 inches the output resolution will be approxi mately 0 007 inches In the programming procedure this mode is indicated by an output of 8 4 volts The mode desired is selected at the time of order and factory pre set The following charts identify the update time and resolution for each mode Resolution Preferred Mode Update Time Resolution 0 005 0 008 0 004 0 007 0 006 0 003 D 000 o _ 0 002 2 0 004 cS 0003 0 001 0 002 0 001 0 000 0 000 8 16 24 32 40 48 8 16 24 32 40 48 Sensor Stroke Length inches Sensor Stroke Length inches Balanced Mode Update Time Resolution 0 005 0 008 0 004 0 007 0 003 ce 0 006 6 0 0 002 0 005 og
255. ioning MTL 728 or 26 Vdc Stahl 9001 01 280 100 10 DC Ground MTL 710 or Sie SIGNAL CONDITIONING Stahl 9001 01 086 150 10 ower upply utpu Optional Module MTL 710 or Analog Output voltage or current Stahl 9001 01 086 150 10 2 15 15 5 Vdc Pulse Duration Output P Safety Barriers aver Uppy Digital Interface Box 15 15 5 Vdc 3 Power Supply E m Digital Hazardous Area Safe Area Natural Binary BCD or Gray Code Output Figure 1 1 Typical System Configuration 2 1 System Specifications Parameter Input Voltage Specification e Position Sensor 26 Vdc e Interface Modules 12 to 15 Vdc e Counter Card 5 Vdc Displacement Up to 25 feet 7620 millimeters Dead Space For stroke lengths up to 200 inches 5 inches 127 millimeters For stroke lengths over 200 inches 7 inches 177 8 millimeters Sensor Styles 3 Styles 1 Standard dust tight 2 Ruggedized dust tight similar to NEMA 1 3 Ruggedized splash proof similar to NEMA 4 Non linearity lt 0 05 of full scale or 0 002 inch 0 05 mm whichever is greater Repeatability 0 001 of full scale or 0 0001 inch 0 002 mm whichever is greater Frequency Response Stroke dependent 200 to 50 Hz for strokes ranging from 12 to 100 inches 305 to 2540 mm Wider response is available For digital systems output is updated at discreet intervals Temperature Coeffi
256. ired null position Clamp it in place to prevent movement 3 Reset all switch segments to the LO closed position taking note of alignment marks on the board 4 If a PLC or readout device indicates the equivalent counts write this value in row A of the dia gram in Figure 6 4 Then convert this number to binary and write it in row B To ensure that the count is correct move the magnet through its stroke and observe the count change For example a 24 inch stroke unit with 0 001 resolution should yield a 24 000 count change Alternatively read each active bit on the counter card output and record into row B of the dia gram 5 Determine the complement of the binary number in row B by changing 1s to Os and Os to 1s Write this complement in row C 6 Use the number from row C to mark the columns E and F If the corresponding bit from C is 1 mark and X in column F open or HD If the corresponding bit is 0 mark an X in column E closed or LO 7 Turn off power then set each switch segment to the value HI or LO indicated by the Xs in columns E and F 8 Apply power to the system and check that the output is now zero 33 34 Edge Card Connector Pin No Bit A Reading in Counts If available Reading in Binary From LEDs or Binary of A C Complement Complement of BI CLOSED OPEN CLOSED COUNTER
257. irements up to this point it is ready to have GRADIENT and LINEARITY TEST run on it Doc No APD 0046 Rev A Doc Owner Mike O Gorman Effective Date 07 07 00 Page 6 of 6 MTS ma APD 0048 Sensors Division Title Adjustment Procedure for the Set Slave Address Command for the Profibus P202 Husky Sensor Revision Notes A Initial Release 12 13 01 Reviewed amp Approved By Uwe Viola Purpose The purpose of this application note is to redefine the procedure for adjustment of the Temposonics R Series Profibus version P202 slave address in the field for transducer serial numbers 10123000 and above Restrictions For the Set Slave Address command we have the following restriction The Slave Address can only be permanently stored in the internal EEPROM after power up and before entering Data Exchange Mode Even if the sensor responds to the Set Slave Address Command and appears to be working with the new address if the sensor was not taken out of Data Exchange Mode before programming it will not retain the new address Doc No APD 0048 Rev A Doc Owner Uwe Viola Effective Date 12 13 01 Page 1 of 2 Procedure In order to program the sensor with a new address the following steps are required 1 Make sure that the sensor is working under the expected address default address is 126 Leave Data Exchange Mode change address of the projected slave in the actual configuration if necessary Restart y
258. ision Auf dem Schuffel 9 D 58513 Ludenscheid Germany 3001 Sheldon Drive Postfach 8130 D 58489 Ludenscheid Germany Cary NC 27513 Phone 49 2351 95870 Phone 800 633 7609 Fax 49 2351 56491 Fax 919 677 0200 Internet www temposonics com Temposonics sensors are a registered trademark of MTS Systems Corporation All Temposonics sensors are covered by US patent number 5 545 984 and others Additional patents are pending Part Number 11 98 550055 Revision E 1998 MTS Systems Corporation MTS Sensors Technology Corporation Izumikan Gobancho 12 11 Gobancho Chiyoda ku Tokyo 102 J apan Phone 813 3239 3003 Fax 813 3262 7780 AVN St Mae or FLUIO POWER Peed est MEMBER pj MTS Ga Temposonics TI Position Sensors Installation amp Instruction Manual for Analog Systems 11 98 550032 Revision F GENERAL INFORMATION MTS PHONE NUMBERS Application questions 000 633 7609 Repair Service 000 248 0532 Fax 919 677 0200 SHIPPING ADDRESS MTS Systems Corporation sensors Division 3001 Sheldon Drive Cary North Carolina 27513 HOURS M onday Thursday 7 30 a m to 6 30 p m EST EDT Friday 7 30 a m to 5 00 p m EST EDT TABLE OF CONTENTS Section Page 1 INTRODUCTION 1 1 1 Theory of Operation Magnetostriction 1 1 2 Temposonics Il LDT Specifications for Sensors lt 18
259. isplacement Ungrounded 4 to 20 mA displacement Grounded 4 to 20 mA displacement All other types of systems are described in Appendixes A and B at the back of this manual Connections are made between the transducer assembly the analog output module AOM the customer supplied power supply and the customer supplied receiving device Preparing Cable for Connection to the AOM The AOM is equipped with two strain reliefs or two MS mil spec connectors A strain relief is used for an unterminated cable Prepare the cable as shown in Figure 4 1 It is recommended that you tin the exposed leads to ensure a good connection Mount the cable to the AOM ready to make connections to the terminal boards TB1 TB2 or TB3 inside NE T Module case Nau Threaded Nipple Do not remove Strain Relief Split Ring Figure 4 1 Cable Preparation for Strain Relief When an MS connector is used the correct matching connector is provided In this case strip and prepare the cable for soldering to the matching connector Wiring J1 Connections The J1 cable provides the AOM voltage inputs from the customer supplied power supply hH also provides displacement outputs to the customer supplied recemng device Take the following steps to connect J1 n 5 One of the screws securing the cover of the AOM has a raised head Connect a ground wire from that screw head to a central earth ground or to the power supply ground if it
260. isplacement with a high degree of accuracy and resolution Using the principle of magnetostriction see Section 1 1 below the Temposonics II LDT measures the time interval between the initiation of an interrogation pulse and the detection of a return pulse A variety of interface devices use the data derived from these two pulses and generates an ana log or digital output to represent position 1 1 Theory of Operation Magnetostriction The interrogation pulse travels the length of the transducer by a conducting wire threaded through a hol low waveguide The waveguide is spring loaded within the transducer rod and exhibits the physical prop erty of magnetostriction When the magnetic field of the interrogation pulse interacts with the stationary magnetic field of the external magnet a torsional strain pulse or twist is produced in the waveguide This strain pulse travels in both directions away from the magnet At the end of the rod the strain pulse is damped within the dead zone 2 5 inches in length At the head of the transducer two magnetically coupled sensing coils are attached to strain sensitive tapes The tapes translate the strain pulse through coils to an electrical return pulse The coil voltage is then amplified in the head electronics before it is sent to various measuring devices as the conditioned return pulse External reference magnet Reference magnetic field Strain tape Va Bias magn
261. ith 0 000125 inch resolution and a standard 27 28 MHz clock crystal A 3 BCD Output Selection Notes on BCD Output When specified digital systems can provide BCD Binary Coded Decimal output BCD code is a binary method of representing decimal numbers In BCD notation each decimal digit is converted into a four bit binary number The BCD code for a decimal number is a string of four bit binary numbers each representing one decimal digit Only the following binary groups are used Decimal Binary Decimal Binary 0 000 5 0101 1 0001 6 0110 0010 7 0111 3 0011 8 1000 4 0100 g 1001 For example the decimal number 8 74 is encoded in BCD as a 12 bit binary number Decimal 8 7 4 8 74 BCD 1000 0111 0110 1000 01110100 In many cases the BCD code for a stroke length lies within a range of BCD numbers where some bits never change value For example 19 999 inches can be represented in BCD by the 20 bit number 00011001 100110011001 Notice that for all values from 0 up to 19 999 the first three bits will always be zero This means that the remaining 17 bits are sufficient to encode a stroke of 19 999 inches that is one counter card is sufficient Table 3A lists the maximum stroke length versus number of significant bits for a resolution of 0 001 inch By moving the decimal point the number of bits required for all other resolutions can be determined 42 Table 3A Maximum Stroke Length vs
262. l Counter Card 1 Blue dust cover NEMA 1 is at circuit ground Do not apply additional ground Stainiess steel or aluminum ruggedized head cover NEMA 4 NEMA 6 ls at same potential as transducer rod 2 H is good practice to apply a machine local or earth ground to the transducer rod 3 Transducers with integral cable have circuit ground applied to the cable shield The ground does not pass through the connector to the extension cable or digital Interface box 4 Connect extension cable shield to circuit ground or local earth ground 5 Digital interface box case is floating with respect to all grounds it le good practice apply a local earth or machine ground to this case 6 Circuit or reference ground is established by connecting the power supply common s to earth ground Do not apply additional grounds to circuit ground at the transducer head Integral cable shield or digital box output cable 7 Digital interface box outputs should be shielded and grounded Figure 3 11 Required and Recommended Grounding 3 16 Table 3 4 is based upon a counter card with 1 divider factory set A single card is capable of 18 bits natural binary output maximum For the 27 28 MHz crystal the resulting resolution and recirculations vs stroke are as follows 1 2 3 For 0 000125 inches N 32 recirculations stroke up to 32 inches For 0 00025 inches N 16 recirculations stroke up to 65 inches For 0 0005 inches
263. l loop linear position controller designed to occupy one option slot in the Allen Bradley 771 Universal I U chassis The module is used to control and monitor a precise linear position of a tool or workpiece along one or WO axes is module connects to a Temposonics II feedback system comprising of a transducer with o Digital Personality Module DPM ntegrated into the head electronics to provide a feedback of the axes position thereby making it a closed loop system e module can work with electrical strokes up to 15 feet with a 2 thousandths of an inch resolution Transducers with smaller strokes can achieve a more accurate resolution e module sends an interrogation signal every c milliseconds to a Temposonics H transducer with a DPM option board programmed for external interrogation synchronous operation The DPM generates a gate that is proportional to the ule The maximum pulse width gate returned by e DPM e no displacement of the mognet olong the stro circulations 3 will double the gate width a ule without overflowing its Internal can measure is 15 feet with a 2 thousandt e equation below to determine the maximum transducer lengt Maximum Transducer Length 1680 T x N 3 depends on the transducer stroke length and the nu nd resolutions of 1 counter is opproxim e length of the transducer to the no nber of circulations 1 e position reading to 1 T Grodient The time at which the sonic wav
264. l the APM enters the programming mode 3 seconds and acknowledges by producing an output voltage of approximately 5 volts Release the SP1 button Press and release the SP2 button to enter the performance mode setup mode The APM will acknowledge by producing an output voltage which corresponds to the currently stored performance mode If the APM has never been programmed the default mode will be resolution preferred that is the output voltage will be 0 volts At this point repeated presses of the SP2 button will cause the APM to cycle through the three performance modes Continue to press and release the SP2 button until the voltage output indicates the voltage associated with the correct mode for your application Once the correct voltage is displayed press and release the SP1 button to accept the mode setting The APM acknowledges by producing an output voltage of approximately 5 volts Note that the mode chosen in this step should be the same as the one chosen in step 3 If a different mode is chosen it will overwrite the one chosen previously Press and release the SP2 button to enter the Set Point 2 setup mode The APM will acknowledge by producing an output voltage of 2 5 volts At this point you can use the SP1 and SP2 buttons to choose the voltage to assign to Set Point 2 Pressing and holding the SP1 button causes the output voltage to move in the positive direction pressing and holding the SP2 button causes the output vol
265. le 1 Example of Scaling Sensor Length SP 1 SP2 51 300 mm Stroke length Mounting zone Stroke length 51mm mounting zone 46 mm x 17 9 mm e Put in the values of above sketch 300 51 46 W 22 18 17 9 e Round up that calculated value to 23 e Add the Single Values from table 1 to that calculated Total Value of 23 and setup the corresponding dip switches see table 1 in position ON All others in position OFF EW 16 4 2 1 23 Y YV Yy Y Switch 6 8 9 Table 1 can also be used to obtain the cycle time or measuring frequency for the individual sensor length The cylcle time is calculated by the addition of the individual cycle times 6 2 us 5 2 Noise Rejection TEMPOSONICS sensor device needs a perfect STOP signal Noises out of interferences on the connecting cable can be rejected on the Analog Board AK 288 with code switch S1 by programming a time window The STOP signal must be within this window a 5 4 3 2 Code switch S1 Start Stop Start imo p Noise rejection win Noise rejection lt SD dow Z Fig 9 The pulse duration measured in us is adjusted dyna mically to the STOP signal in each case If a setting other than the factory scaling is desired the duration must be programmed on starting up in dependence on the maxi mum speed of the position magne
266. lity Module DPM Update Frequency e Stroke and resolution dependent Optional Voltage Output e 0 to 10 Vdc or 10 to 0 Vdc with additional sub print AK 294 Programming Parameters e Zero Resolution Stroke Length Measuring Direction Connection e 64 pin edge connector DIN 41612 Optional 64 pin card holder available Part No 370292 Cable Requirement e 8x24 AWG twisted pairs shielded Belden 8104 recommended Maximum Cable Length e 500 meters Dimensions e 19 in standard European board Front panel 30 2 x 128 4 mm e 19 in module for rack mounting Front panel 50 4 x 128 4 mm Specifications are subject to change without notice Contact MTS for verification of specifications critical to your needs Measurements are independent Best Straight Line BSL oystem Configuration D H P Digital P ersonality Module DP M Mb ocn FC DT OO 7775 l Start Stop Output from Temposonics Il with RPM or Temposonics LP with Start Stop Output I Maximum Resolution 0 002 in 0 05 mm mem BE Duration Output from Temposonics II with DPM Maximum Resolution 0 0002 in 0 005 mm Temposonics Il Position Sensor will also function with a Temposonics LP Position Sensor with Start Stop output MK 292 Digital Output Module Sensor Outputs Selectable BCD Binary or Gray Code Output Optional Voltage Output 0 to 10 Vdc or 10 to 0 Vdc For more detailed literatu
267. llation be sure you know the following dimensions as illustrated in Figure 3 2 null space s stroke dead zone 0 375 in O D 1 5 in dia 9 5 mm O ring 38 1 mm Null 4 Strok in max Dead Zone Space 101 6 mm Figure 3 2 LDT Assembly Use the 3 4 inches 19 mm 16 UNF thread of the transducer to mount it at the selected location Leave room to access the hex head If a pressure or moisture seal is required install an O ring type MS 28778 8 is recommended in the special groove Use the hex head to tighten the transducer assembly 2 Install the permanent magnet over the LDT rod Mount the permanent magnet to the movable device whose displacement will be measured To minimize the effect of magnetic materials i e iron steel etc on the magnetic field of the permanent magnet ensure the minimum spacing requirements are met as shown in Figure 3 3 Any non magnetic materials can be in direct contact with the permanent magnet without affecting performance Mounting The magnet must not contact ferromagnetic matenals such as iron or steel Clearances are required between the surface of the magnet and ferromagnetic matena as shown Non ferrous matenal such as copper brass or 300 series stainless steel may contact the magnet without affecting transducer performance Ne NN o 1 8 in min mme Side TI ZEN Standard null space is 2 inches There is no maximum limit on null space Less than 2 i
268. m or as specified Figure 3 4 Flexible Transducer Take the following steps to install a flexible transducer DO NOT loosen or mount the transducer using the polypropylene fitting near the transducer head This will cause damage to the transducer A transducer supplied with a 1 inch O D head flange requires a U bolt flange collar or similar clamping device to keep the transducer head stationary Install the permanent magnet over the LDT rod Mount the permanent magnet to the movable device whose displacement will be measured To minimize the effect of magnetic materials i e iron steel etc on the magnetic field of the permanent magnet ensure the minimum spacing requirements are met as shown in Figure 3 3 Any non magnetic materials can be in direct contact with the permanent magnet without affecting performance Mount the analog output module AOM n a cation within reach of the LDT cable Standard systems allow the AOM to be mounted a standard of 250 feet of the LDT assembly Mounting Mount the required transducer supports Transducer supports are descnbed later in this section Connect the cable trom the AOM to the transducer assembly Adjust the AOM null and full scale potentiometers as described in Section 2 to compensate for any offsets due to mechanical installation Lal MJ Mounting Types of Transducer Supports Long transducers 4 feet or more may require supports to maintain proper alignme
269. me or a non standard reso lution use procedure II From the stroke length resolution and maximum acceptable update time we can determined the number of TTL level parallel bits supplied by the Digital Counter Card s the number of circulations required in the Digital Personality Module or Digital Interface Box and the actual update time using a standard 27 MHz clock crystal Take the following steps 1 Divide the stroke length by the resolution This number gives the minimum number of counts required Use Table 1A to determine how many bits are required to accommodate this number 2 Use Table 2A to determine how many circulations are required for the specified resolution NOTE The following additional steps are recom mended to increase output stability a Divide the required resolution by 2 D Select the number of bits from Table 1A using the new resolution c Discard or do not connect to the least significant bit d Do not exceed 18 bits to avoid using an additional counter card 3 Use the graph in Figure A 1 to determine the update time based upon the stroke and circula tions 38 4 If the update time is unacceptable adjust the resolution and circulations to lower the update time You can make a note of the parameters as you go along Number of bits required Resolution R Circulations N Update Time less than ms Table 1A Calculations for Required Binary Bits Binary
270. meet requirements illustrated above NOTE Clearance between the magnet and the transducer rod is not critical However contact between the components will cause wear over time The installation of supports or readjustment of the supports is recommended if the magnet contacts the transducer rod 4 Move the permanent magnet full scale to check that it moves freely If not Gf the magnet rubs on the transduc er you can correct this by mounting a support bracket to the end of the transducer Long transducers may need additional supports to be attached to the transducer rod Transducer supports are described later in this section 2 1 Types of Transducer Supports Long transducers 48 inches or longer may require supports to maintain proper alignment between the transducer rod and the permanent magnet When transducer rod supports are used special open ended permanent magnets are required Transducer supports attached to the active stroke length must be made of a non ferrous material thin enough to permit the permanent magnet to pass without obstruction Because the permanent magnet does not enter the dead zone supports connected within the dead zone may be made of any material The main types of supports are loop channel and guide pipe supports 2 1 1 Loop Supports Loop supports are fabricated from non ferrous materials thin enough to permit free movement of the magnet Loop supports are recommended for straight transd
271. modes During the programming procedure each mode is represented by a particular output voltage The three modes are as follows Resolution Preferred Mode In this mode the APM generates a high resolution output while sacrificing update time The Resolution Preferred Mode is limited to stroke lengths up to 48 inches and will provide an output resolution of approximately 0 001 inches In applications exceeding 48 inches the APM must be set for Balanced Mode or Update Preferred Mode In the programming procedure the Resolution Preferred Mode is indicated by an output of volts Balanced Mode In this mode the APM offers a balance between update time and resolution For stroke lengths up to 250 inches the output resolution will be approximately 0 003 inches In the programming procedure this mode is indicated by an output of 10 volts Updated Preferred Mode In this mode the APM produces the fasts possible update time while sacrificing resolution For stroke lengths up to 300 inches the output resolution will be approximately 0 007 inches In the programming procedure this mode is indicated by an output of 10 volts APM PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE The following charts identify the Update Time versus the Resolution for stroke lengths up to 300 inches for each of the three mode selections Resolution Preferred Mode Update Time Resolution 0005 Ee EN o Leen l dure BPR Resolution inches per step ce Sensor S
272. n MTS Applications Engineer if you have any questions regarding the configuration of your sensor or how to interface to the MK292 unit The system parameters for each configuration are indicated below SYSTEM PARAMETERS SYSTEM PARAMETERS Sensor with PWM Outputs Sensor with Start Stop Outputs lt Programming Mode A Pulse Duration N A A A NOTE Pulse Duration REC only applies to systems that are using sensors with a PWM output 8 lt sma s ei Usel e wl yg lt wm m6 une lt a System parameters are set via the front panel of the MK292 using the programming and BCD switches e Programming Switch This momentary toggle switch is located at the bottom of the front panel It has two activation posi tions 1 and 2 Programming Modes are accessed by manipulation of this switch as defined in the Programming section of this manual Position 1 Normal Position 2 Position Figure 5 1 Programming Switch Positions When the Programming Switch is pushed into either Position 1 or Position 2 it will automatically return to the center normal position when released e BCD Switches S1 S6 The six rotary switches S1 least significant digit to SG most significant digit are used to set parame ter values A screw driver or adjusting tool is used to set the switches The input values are checked against the actual values as indicated by the customer provided con troller display LEDs
273. n damage electronic components of sensor or board Fig 4 Possible shields are One sided sheath to machine ground standard One sided sheath to 0 volts Two sided sheath to machine ground External sheath to machine ground Internal shield to 0 V power supply applies only to double shielded cable of type LIYCY CY We recommended following cable type 8 x 0 25 mm twisted pairs shielded e g LiYCY 4 x 2 x 0 25 mm or LiYCY CY 4 x 2 x 0 25 mm2 Input 15 V dc 0 5 V 15 V current consumption 250 mV max Ripple 200 mV max e 15 V current consumption 100 mV max Ripple 200 mA max Input 24 Vdc 1 2V Current consumption 250 mA max Ripple 200 mV max 3 5 Connections of Sensor Temposonics ll Connector Cable color TEMPOSONICS II Series TTA TTM and TTS Connector Cable type K 32 Type TTA TTM TTS RB M O000 R Integral connector Pin No 4x 2 pairs Type TTA TTM TTS RO M O000 R Integral cable Power Supply DC Ground 0V Machine Ground Frame 15V 15V 10 pin MTS Connector Pulse Transmission type AB male Stop Stop External view Start Start 3 6 Wiring Sensor Analog Board Following TEMPOSONICS components can be connect to an analog sensor system Position Sensor 1 Type TTA TTM and TTS RB M xxxx R Connector version 2 Type TTA TTM and TTS R0 M xxxx R Cable version Analoq B
274. n pi i t pin 24 By a lying a ground sink to pin 24 the updating of the binary Geto is frozen and the output does not change Series 80 Counter Cards available 6 88 Latch inhibit input is now standard on pin 24 for all Series 80 counter cards No connection or TTL high allows updating to continue Control Room 15 Vdc 15 Vdc Common Common 5 Vdc Connector Pin 1 2 Gate Pulse 5 card with edge Gate Pulse 4 when Local Machine 3 Digital Counter or earth ground Binary outputs Interrogation Pulse interrogation Pulse Receiver with Interrogation Capability optional 3 It is common practice to apply earth ground to power supply common terminals near power supply case ground is normally applied by installation of box to machine or local equipment Must be specified with order LA A 176 Figure 3 10 Signal and Power Wiring Digital Systems 3 14 Table 3 3 Jl Connections de Common 15 Vdc Power 5 Vdc Power External Interrogation Pulse Optional External Interrogation Pulse Optional Gate Output 15 Vdc Power Case Ground Gate Output 3 15 Required Circuit ground Optional but d Earth ground Recommended Inherent no additional Ss grounding required Case ground g mi 15 V fs p SA k Digita
275. n pulse The coil voltage is then amplified in the head electronics before it is sent to various mea suring devices as the conditioned return pulse See the Temposonics II Analog and Digital manuals for more information on analog and digital system configurations External reference magnet Reference magnetic field Strain tape Va Bias magnet Waveguide Sensing coil Conducting element Waveguide Interaction of magnetic fields causes waveguide to twist A Magnetic field from interrogation pulse bS Waveguide enclosure Figure 1 1 Waveguide Interaction 1 2 Temposonics II LDT Specifications for Sensors lt 180 Inches Parameter Specifications Input Voltage 12 to 15 Vdc Current Draw Transducer Only 15 Vde at 100 mA maximum 25 mA minimum current draw varies with magnet position maximum draw occurs when magnet is at 2 in 50 6 mm from the flange and minimum update time is being utilized Displacement Up to 25 feet 7620 millimeters Dead Zone 2 5 inches 63 5 millimeters Electronics Enclosure IP 67 Non linearity lt 0 05 of full scale or 0 002 inch 0 05 mm whichever is greater Repeatability lt 0 001 of full scale or 0 0001 inch 0 002 mm whichever is greater Hysteresis 0 0008 inch 0 02 mm maximum Temperature Coefficient Transducer length dependent 2 ppm F 5 4 ppm C Electronics lt 0 00011 in F lt
276. nches null space can be specified as long as magnet clearances are observed as shown above The examples below illustrate minimum clearances Ferromagnetic Nonferrous support A 5 8 in plus the support thickness To clear transducer thread Figure 3 3 Magrete Matenal Mounting Spec cac s Mounting al NOTE Clearance between the magnet and the LDT rod is not cntical However contact between the components will cause wear over time The installation of supports or readjusiment of the supports is recommended if the magnet contacts the LDT rod Move the permanent magnet full scale to check that it moves freely If not if the magnet rubs on the LOT you can correct this by mounting a support bracket to the end of the LOT Long transducers may need additional supports to be attached to the transducer rod Transducer supports are described later in this section Mount the analog output module in a location within reach of the LDT assembly cable Standard systemis allow the analog output module to be mounted 250 feet of the LOT assembly Connect the cable from the AOM to the transducer assembly Adjust the AOM null and full scale potentiometers as described in Section 2 to compensate for any offsets due to mechanical installation Mounting Installing a Flexible Transducer Before beginning installation be sure you know the following dimensions as illustrated in Figure 3 4 null space stroke
277. net Type SR 12 Part No 201542 1 29 in 32 76 mm O D other options available 5 Chamfered Rod Bushing Figure 2 8 Typical Cylinder Installation Figure 2 8 shows a typical cylinder installation Review the following before attempting this type of instal lation e Use a non ferrous plastic brass Teflon etc spacer 1 to provide 1 8 inch 32 mm minimum space vn 40 015 0 094 in 0 000 1 105 in Minimum Full Thread Depth between the magnet and the piston An O ring groove 2 is provided at the base of the transducer hex head for pressure sealing MTS uses mil standard MS33514 for the O ring groove Refer to mil standard MS33649 or SAE J514 for machining of mating surfaces The null space 3 is specified according to the installation design and cylinder dimensions The analog output module provides a null adjustment Make sure that the magnet can be mounted at the proper null position The piston head 4 shown in Figure 2 8 is typical For some installations depending on the clearances it may be desired to countersink the magnet A chamfered rod bushing 5 should be considered for stokes over 5 feet 1 5 meters to prevent wear on the magnet as the piston retracts The bushing should be made from Teflon or similar material A Nylok self locking insert 6 is provided on the transducer threads An O ring groove is provided at the base of the transducer hex head for pressure sealing The recommended bore for
278. ng in millimeters When measuring in inches BCD output is available for stroke lengths up to 300 inches 3 W hen using a PWM output the sensors must be configured for external interrogation Figure 4 6 System Connections 4 3 Functional Inputs Outputs OUTPUTS Voltage Level TTL level to 24 Vdc Maximum Current Load 20 mA high level INPUTS Control Signal Level applied Vin level Current Load per Input 1 mA 4 5 1 Error Output Loss of Feedback Pu c Logic HIGH No Error LOW Error HIGH No Error LOW Error Figure 4 7 Error Outputs Errors e No sensor magnet e Sensor magnet not positioned within the active range of sensor e Malfunction or failure of sensor or module e Electronic interference 4 3 2 Data Ready Output Latch Pulse Pin c6 Logic HIGH Ensures that parallel data transfer does not occur during data update i e during change in magnet position In addition the data ready output confirms that the data is up to date The timing of data transfer is illustrated below Cycle Time 60 us SEH 60 us Data Changing Figure 4 8 Data Ready 10 4 3 3 Data Hold Input Latch Inhibit Pin c17 Logic HIGH Data Hold is another means besides Data Ready to ensure that paral lel data transfer does not occur during data update When Data Hold C17 is high data does not update 4 3 4 External Start Input Features Pin c16 Logic HIGH The Ex
279. nsducer Pulse width modulated signal optional Dependent upon unit configuration Options include e 4 20 mA ungrounded velocity return or e Channel 2 return for dual channel displacement 11 Dependent upon unit configuration Options include e Velocity output current source or e Channel 2 output for dual channel displacement cO CO NM Od O17 AIIN C 12 Analog displacement output current source 13 Displacement return for 4 20 mA ungrounded output systems 14 Output pulse 15 Interrogation pulse to transducer NOTE The mating edge connector is MTS p n 370034 and may be ordered by contacting the factory The connections from the Temposonics II transducer to the Analog Output Card are as follows Table 12B Temposonics II Connection to Analog Output Card Temposonics II Integrated or Extension Cable see Note 1 Pin No Wire Color Code Wire Color Code Analog Output Card Pin No 1 White Blue Stripe White 1 2 Blue White Stripe Brown 1 S White Green Stripe Red 4 6 Green White Stripe Blue 8 7 White Brown Stripe Black 1 8 Brown White Stripe Violet 14 9 White Gray Stripe Yellow 15 10 Gray White Stripe Green 1 NOTES 1 Verify if the cable has striped or solid color leads and make connections accordingly 2 Shield wire drain can be connected to Pin 1 on the Analog Output Card 37 MTS Gw MTS Systems Corporation MTS Sensor Technologie GmbH and Co KG Sensors Division Auf dem Schuffel 9 D 58513 Ludenscheid G
280. nsure the components can withstand the environment where they will be installed 3 2 1 Mechanical Installation A transducer assembly with a blue dust cover over the LDT head is suitable for general purpose applications located indoors A transducer assembly with a ruggedized LDT head cover is suitable for environments exposed to moisture vibration and outdoor elements The digital interface box must be protected from moisture and vibration The digital counter card is suitable for non hazardous environmentally controlled atmospheres only such as control rooms or control panels indoors A transducer assembly with the intrinsically safe design approved for Class I Division 1 Groups C and D is available for hazardous areas NOTE The intrinsically safe design has special installation requirements which are not covered in this manual Consult MTS Sensors Division for details The mechanical installation includes mounting the transducer the counter card electronics box and the permanent magnet Before installing the transducer assembly it is necessary to know the null position stroke length full scale position and the dead zone refer to Figure 3 1 3 1 3 8 O D O Ring 1 5 Take 3 Null Position SM G585A Figure 3 1 LDT Assembly the following steps to install the LDT measurement system The transducer assembly is mounted to the selected loca
281. nt between the transducer rod and the permanent magnet All flexible transducers kkewse require supports to obtain the design shape When transducer rod supports are used special permanent magnets are required Transducer supports attached to the active stroke length must be made of a non ferrous matenal thin enough to permit the permanent magnet to pass without obstruction Because the permanent magnet does not enter the dead zone supports connected within the dead zone may be made of any material The main types of supports are loop channel and guide pipe supports Loop Supports Loop supports are fabricated from non ferrous materials thin enough to permit free movement of the magnet Loop supports are recommended for straight transducers They may be used alone or with channel supports Figure 3 5 illustrates the fabrication of a loop support NOTE When open magnets are used ensure the transducer rod remains within the inside diameter of the magnet throughout the length of the stroke If the transducer rod is allowed to enter the cut out area of an open magnet the transducer signal will be lost Front Vi Side Vi f 0 375 in I D I Transducer Rod Figure 3 5 Loop Support Mounting Channel Supports Channel supports being typically straight are normally used with rigid transducers A channel suppon consists of a straight channel with loop supports mounted at intervals The loop supports are required to keep t
282. nterface Box C 1 Modifying the Polarity of the Interrogation Pulse Consult drawings 650110 and 250068 before performing the following procedure From INTERNAL to EXTERNAL interrogation 1 Remove the 4 cover screws from the DIB 2 Remove cover with PCB connected Turn component side up with J1 to the left and J2 to the right as you face the board 3 Remove the 555 timer from the bottom of the 16 pin DIP socket position U1B Pins 1 4 and 13 16 4 Install a 9637 IC on the top side of the same 16 pin DIP socket position U1 Pins 5 8 and 9 12 5 Install a 100Q resistor between Pins D and E of J1 10 pin connector or E1 and E2 C 2 Changing Recirculations From EXTERNAL to INTERNAL Interrogation 1 Remove the 4 cover screws from the DIB 2 Remove cover with PCB connected Turn component side up with J1 to the left and J2 to the right as you face the board 3 Remove the 9637 IC from the top side of the 16 pin DIP socket position U1B Pins 5 8 and 9 12 4 Install a 555 timer on the bottom side of the same 16 pin DIP socket position U1 Pins 1 4 and 13 16 5 Install the proper value resistor or next highest available value in R1 location Use the following formula to deter mine the resistor value R1 KQ T msec x 14 43 1 6 Install R2 4990 C1 0 1uF and C13 0 01uF if R1 is not present 1 Remove the 4 cover screws on the DIB 2 Locate the jumper wire in the center of the PCB a
283. nterrogation pulse timing is set for a certain maximum stroke length typically from 60 to 72 inches The box will interrogate at the maximum stroke frequency but can be used with any transducer with stroke length greater than 12 inches and up to the maximum Transducers with 12 inches are normally negative pulse interrogation and require a pulse change modification within the DIB The recirculation setting is also factory set and will provide published resolution with the proper recirculation number The only performance change is that the update time will be that for the maximum stroke length of the interface box refer to general bulletins Also note that a small zero shift may occur when used with transducers of different stroke length 1 3 3 Universal Counter Card A universal counter card differs from a scaled counter card in two Ways L The crystal is selected based upon an average transducer gradient 2 The zero pre setting is selected using a randomly selected transducer with an average gradient The averaging results in a scale factor within 0 6 of the specified nominal resolution The zero position will also be affected but should be within 0 1 inches of the specified null position To correct for scale and zero offset refer to Subsection 3 4 System Calibration Also note that if a randomly selected counter card is used with a transducer the system will perform as a universal counter card system
284. nts the least significant digit Rapid flashing of the green LED indicates input error e Parameter Setup To store a newly set parameter hold the programming switch in Position 2 see Fig 6 1 until the LED of the next parameter is activated 3 sec NOTE If the value cannot be stored momentarily hold the programming switch in Position 1 and repeat until you cycle through to the desired parameter e Operation Mode Hold the programming switch in Position 1 until the red RUN LED is activated This indi cates that the Programming Mode has been exited and the Operation Mode is ready Position 1 Normal Position 2 Position Figure 6 1 Programming Switcb Positions For detailed instructions on programming the MK292 Digital Output Module refer to Section 7 of this manual 14 7 Detailed Programming Procedure 7 1 RUN Programming Mode Red LED During initial start up the red RUN LED will flash This indicates that the MK292 is in the programming mode and input parameters are required for operation If the RUN LED is on but not flashing this means that parameters have already been set If parameters must be changed the programming mode must be accessed as fol lows Hold programming switch in Position 1 until RUN LED flashes 3 sec ADJUST 7 2 REC Pulse Duration Green LED NOTE This parameter only applies to systems that have a Temposonics position sensor with a PWM out
285. o 83 C Operating 40 F to 180 F 40 C to 83 C RS422 Personality Module Interrogation External Power Requirements Voltage 15 Vde Current 40 mA Temperature Requirements storage Operating 40 F to 180 F 40 C to 83 C 40 F to 180 F 40 C to 83 C Temposonics Il Power Supply Power Supply Requirements 15 Vde at 175 mA maximum 25 mA minimum current draw varies with magnet position maximum draw occurs when the magnet is 2 inches 50 8 mm from the flange and the minimum update time is being utilized 4 2 Digital Personality Module DPM The Digital Personality Module DPM replaces the functions provided by the digital interface box The DPM which is roughly the size of a US postage stamp is installed directly into the transducer head and provides electronics for pulse shaping digital recirculations auto interrogation and cable interfacing NOTE Call MTS Sensors Division when replac ing a Digital Interface Box with an inte grated Digital Personality Module DPM Inside Temposonics LDT Head Rz 1 us nominal Digital JL _ Personality TTL Level Module OV c TTL Level Pulse Duration Output RS422 OV Excitation Pulse i Return Pulse W d IF externally interrogated SAM wat lt Displacement Figure 4 4 Excitation Pulse The waveguide driver board detects a logic level excitation pulse from the DPM If the device is
286. o avoid ground loops If erratic or unstable output is encountered recheck all earth grounds and cable grounds 5 Connect an oscilloscope to the and gate signals at the counter card edge connector pins 5 and 4 with respect to circuit ground pin 1 Check for presence of each gate separately since loss of either gate will cause loss of output If the pulse width modulates with change in magnet position continue to Subsection 4 4 for counter card testing 4 4 Counter Card Digital Output Test Procedure The counter card output 14 18 bits typical is a true high TTL level signal nominal 0 to 5 volts dc The receiver device must be selected to interface with the TTL level signal of the counter card Most devices offer a TTL input option or a specific model selection designed for TTL only If the user suspects an improperly selected or malfunctioning receiver device the counter card output may be tested using LED s Perform the following procedure 1 Disconnect the receiver device from the binary output of the counter card This is usually performed at the receiver device input terminals 4 3 2 3 Connect 4or more LED s between the binary power supply ground as shown in Figure 4 1 Select e 1 or digit which will give a reading which is ea interpreted Four of the middle bits for natural ee tenths or units place for BCD The LED s should be rai for 3 5 Vdc 50 mA maximum The LEDs light when the is high N
287. oard 1 Type AK 288 xx 0 xxxx 15 Vdc Input 2 Type AK 288 xx 1 xxxx 24 Vdc Input Do not carry out any connection with power on The Start Stop pulse transmission between Sensor and Board is a differential signal Cable length Maximum of 500 meters see page 3 Cable type Shielded Cable with twisted pairs e g LIYCY 4x 2x 0 25 mm or LIYCYCY 4 x 2 x 0 25 mm SENSOR AK 288 4 x 2 x 0 25mm 10 green A 9 yellow BEI 6 blue r as 5 ed Stop Be Error Stop o 3 99r 1 Machine Grd Frame oe OV DC Ground 0V eme Voltage V AE Current mA i I 1 w o electrical isolation 415V 24V Maximum load 15V NC 600 Ohms at 15V ov LJ ov 1000 Ohms at 24V zu a 15V or 24Vdc 2 with electrical isolation Maximum load 750 Ohms Input Input for Error Output OV a c 14 is electrically isolated 15 V 24V of OV input Fig 5 4 Operational Check 4 1 Adjustment Start Position and End Position Note All boards are factory set to the following customized parameters Sensor Length Noise rejection Measuring direction Position of Setpoints SP1 and SP2 Output A difference is made between standard and customized adjustments 1 Standard adjustment Setpoint Setpoint SP 1 SP 2 mA V forward 0 mm IE ERE
288. oles 0 177 in dia 4 5 mm 120 apart on 1 625 in dia 41 3 mm 0 44 in 11 2 mm opening 90 cut out 1 of 4 holes each 0 182 in dia 4 6 mm I D 0 75 in 19 05 mm ee 0 D 2 49 in 53 25 mm on 1 625 in dia 41 3 mm Thickness 0 375 in 9 5 mm I D 0 625 in 15 9 mm O D 2 46 in 63 25 mm Thickness 0 375 in 9 5 mm Part No 251416 Part No 201542 1 of 2 holes 0 15 in dia 3 9 mm 120 apart gi citon on 0 94 in dia 23 9 mm Le D 0 53 in 13 5 mm O D 1 29 in 32 8 mm Thickness 0 312 in 7 9 mm Part No 400533 I D 0 53 in 13 5 mm O D 1 0 in 25 4 mm Thickness 0 312 in 7 9 mm 10 0 30 in max Ed Aluminum Plate A 0 80 in bonded to s GC in Ref ef 4 holes each 0 15 in dia 3 9 mm O O on 0 94 in dia 23 9 mm I D 0 53 in 13 5 mm O D 1 29 in 32 8 mm Thickness 0 312 in 7 9 mm Part No 400633 Q Q 4 Holes C each 3 9 mm dia 0 15 in 90 apart on 23 9 mm dia 0 94 in Magnet Spacer Part No 401032 I D 0 532 in 13 5 mm 0 D 0 685 in 17 4 mm Thickness 0 312 in 7 9 mm ID 14 3 mm 0 563 in For use with stroke lengths OD 31 75 mm 1 25 in lt 60 in Thickness 3 175 mm 0 125 Part No 251298 1 1 1 In Ref gt 0 75 in Figure 2 11 Magnet Dimensions 3 Temposonics Il Wiring Table 3A Temposonics II Connections Neuter Version and with APM
289. oltage associated with the correct mode for your application Once the correct voltage is displayed press and release the SP1 button to accept the mode setting The APM acknowledges by producing an output voltage of a approximately 5 volts Press and release the SP1 button to enter the Set Point 1 setup mode The APM will acknowledge by producing an output voltage of about 2 5 volts At this point you can use the SP1 and SP2 buttons to choose the voltage to assign to Set Point 1 Pressing and holding the SP1 button causes the output voltage to move in the positive direction pressing and holding the SP2 button causes the output voltage to move in the negative direction If either button is held for more than five seconds the output volatge will begin to change more quickly Release the button when the desired output voltage is displayed on the digital volt meter For testing purposes it is not necessary to perform this step It can be skipped entirely since it only assigns the final voltage to the Set Point To complete the setup for Set Point 1 press and release both buttons simultaneously If the transducer has been previously programmed it will resume operation with the new voltage assigned to SP1 If it has not been previously programmed it will return to the same voltage it had prior to entering the pro gramming mode near 0 volts Move the permanent magnet to the desired position for Set Point 2 Press the SP1 push button unti
290. olution the system must be returned to the factory In some cases the customer provided receiver device software may be reprogrammed to adjust to the new settings 20 Electronic Connections 6 1 General Figure 6 1 below illustrates the interconnections of a typical digital system comprised of a Temposonics II transducer an integrated Digital Personality Module DPM and a Digital Counter Card Function 12 to 15Vdc 12 to 15Vdc Power Return Frame Ground Gate Output Gate Output Interrogation Interrogation 2 optional NOTES e 12 to 15 Vdc 0 8A 12 to 15 Vdc e 12 to 15 Vdc 0 8A e b Vdc 3A Common 5V Earth Ground Digital Counter Card Pin 1 DC Common with Edge Connector Pin2 5 Vdc Pin 3 Latch Pulse Pin 4 Gate Pulse Pin 5 Gate Pulse Pin 6 No Connection si Pin 7 Pin8 S2 iE 2 Pin 10 Gate Pulse A Gate Pulse U e e Pin 24 Latch Inhibit Note 2 Pin 25 JL _ Interrogation Pulse Interrogation Pulse Binary Outputs Receiver with Interrogation Capability 2 optional 1 It is common practice to apply earth ground to power supply common terminals near power supply Refer to Section 3 for grounding dia gram 2 Jumpers W20 and W22 make Pin 24 inhibit and Pin 3 Latch Pulse Jumpers W21 and W23 make Pin 24 Latch Pulse and Pin 3 inhibit Figure 6 1
291. ommon 5 Vdc Temposonics Red MTL 728 or Intrinsically Safe ET 9001 01 280 100 Position Sensor Black White i MTL 710 or Brown or Orange m MTL E or m 9001 01 086 150 o Pin Blue 6 pin connector J2 J4 0 pin connector Digital Interface Box Hazardous Area Safe Area Pulse Duration Signal To MK 292 or customer provided counter card Figure 5 6 Digital System 5 5 1 Digital Systems Digital Interface Box J1 Connections Table 5D Digital Interface Box J1 Connections J1 Pin Function A DC Common B 15 Vdc Power C 5 Vde Power D External Interrogation Pulse E External Interrogation Pulse G Gate Output H 15 Vdc Power J Case Ground K Gate Output 5 4 MK 292 Digital Output Module Connections Temposonics Intrinsically Safe vumm MK 292 Digital Output Module Pulse Duration Output from 3 Safety Barriers Digital Interface Box lt lt lt lt Interrogation Pulse Pulse Duration Output gt gt gt gt Digital Interface Box Selectable BCD Binary or Gray Code Output QL Optional Voltage Output 0 to 10 Vdc or 10 to 0 Vdc Figure 5 7 Typical System Configuration Intrinsically Safe Position Sensor Digital Interface Box and MK 292 Module NOTICE Refer to document number 550414 MK 292 Digital Output Module Installation Manual and Ordering Guide for details on the installation wiring and programming of the
292. on SIZE DRAWING NUMBER IE UU U O 11 29 94 ES CARY NORTH CAROLINA SHEET 1 OF 1 REVISION A ORIGINATOR AVE BAKER CABLE S ECIFICATIONS JIVI AL C C2 dem JUAL SHIELD 1 ES D P PAIR 20 AWG OV JACKET ESTANE 58866 COE PART 4203 0059 01 MTS 400901 AWG WOVEN ES I BLACK OUTI ES ES 7 7 7 WII ENSION CA mw ELD AT J2 PIN B RCUIT GROUND
293. on because of breakdown or faulty operation of equipment or process e Faulty operation of process which causes simultaneous failure of electrical equipment Group A Group B Group C Group D Atmospheres Atmospheres such as Atmospheres such as Atmospheres such as containing Acetylene e Butadiene e Cyclopropane e Acetone e Ethylene Oxide e Ethyl Ether e Alcohol e Propylene Oxide e Ethylene e Ammonia e Acrolein e Benzene e Hydrogen e Benzol e Butane e Gasoline e Hexane e Lacquer Solvent Vapors e Naptha e Natural Gas e Propane Intrinsic Safety IS is based on the principle of restricting the electrical energy transmitted into a hazardous area thereby ensuring that any sparks or heated surfaces that may occur as a result of electrical failures are insufficient to cause ignition With intrinsically safe systems a safe operating environment is provided for personnel and equipment voltages are low and no threat of an explosion exists 2 SYSTEM COMPONENTS COMPONENTS INTRINSICALLY SAFE SYSTEMS e Temposonics Linear Displacement Transducer e 1 ea MTL 728 Shunt Diode Safety Barrier P N 370140 e 2 ea MTL 710 Shunt Diode Safety Barrier P N 370141 e 24 28 Vdc Power Supply P N 380009 e 15 Vdc Power Supply required with digital systems and some analog system configurations e 5 Vdc power Supply required with digital systems e A signal conditioning interface module see Figure 1 1 Signal Condit
294. ons Incorrect receiver device or software Improper magnet mounting EMI noise affecting transducer transducer cable or counter card cable Circuit fault within transducer Circuit fault within counter card Will cause erratic or unstable output The equipment required for diagnostic testing is 1 Analog or digital voltmeter 2 3 Circuit tester or ohmmeter Oscilloscope 50 MHz 15 MHz minimum dual channel preferred 51 52 D 2 Power Supply Check IMPORTANT NOTE This procedure is for checking the power supply voltage to the Digital Interface Box DIB The DIB is a discontinued product but this procedure is included in this manuals to support prior installa tions This procedure will determine if the power supply rating is sufficient or if there is a voltage drop occur ring in the field wiring Perform the following procedure to check power supply voltage and connections at the interface box dy Remove power and disconnect J 1 10 pin connector from the Digital Interface Box DIB Also remove edge connector from counter card Turn power on and check open circuit voltages at the connector pins of the Digital Interface Box mating connector Pin H should read 15 Vdc with respect to Pin A Pin B should read 15 Vdc with respect to Pin A Pin C should read 5 Vdc with respect to Pin A Check power supply voltages under load by connecting a 150 ohm resistor or simil
295. or 200 inches See column 1 e Digits 5 1 4 1 is considered 1 4 digit e Digital Counter Card Connections Per column 4 Pin Connections e Least Significant Digit LSD Connections Pins 8 7 14 13 Card A e Most Significant Digit MSD Connections Pin 12 Card B The next MSD connections are Pins 8 7 14 13 on Card B Pin 9 on Card A is NOT USED see Note 3 below Resolution 1 4 Digit Pin 12 Card B 100 5th Digit 10 Ath Digit 1 3rd Digit 0 1 2nd Digit 0 001 1st Digit 0 001 Example Table BCD Output Connection Table 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Max No of Active Pin Connectors Binary Digit Check Appropriate Reading Active Bits Digits Card A Card B Weight Column Resolution other 8 1 1 7 S LSD 14 4 0 000 0 001 0 01 1 13 8 12 1 2 11 2 18 4 0 001 0 00 0 1 2 17 8 16 1 3 15 2 20 4 0 01 0 1 1 999 12 3 21 8 1999 13 3 1 4 22 1 4 3999 14 3 1 2 19 2 7999 15 3 3 4 23 4 0 1 1 10 9999 16 4 25 8 18999 17 41 4 g 8 1 5 39999 18 41 2 7 2 79999 19 4 3 4 14 4 1 10 100 99999 20 5 13 8 199999 21 5 1 4 12 1 6 399999 22 51 2 11 2 MSD 799999 23 5 3 4 18 4 10 100 1000 999999 24 6 17 8 NOTES 1 LSD Least Significant Digit 2 MSD Most Significant Digit 3 Used ONLY with 4 1 4 digits For 4 1 2 digits or more a second Digital Counter Card is required 5th digit is on second card 31 6 6 System Calibration There are no adjustments on the Digital Personality Module or on the transducer Inst
296. or which mates to the box Table 3 2 J2 Mating Connectors rector To Transducer Head Transducer Transducer Head Connector MS 3106A 145 65 MS 3106E 145 65 environmental MS 3113H 10 6P DT1H 10 6PN MS 3102E 145 6P MS 3100F 145 6P MS 3113H 10 6P DT1H 10 6PN w integral cable NEMA 1 SRH Hermetically Sealed NEMA 6 SRH Environmental NEMA 4 Ruggedized Environmental Woodit Ruggedized Hermetically Sealed Woodt 3 12 MS 3101A 145 6P MS 3101E 145 6P environmental MS 3116F10 65 environmental MS 3106E 14S6S environmental MS 3106E 145 65 environmental MS 3116F10 65 environmental MS 3106A 145 65 MS 3106E 145 65 environmental MS 3106A 145 65 MS 3106E 145 65 environmental M 3106A 145 65 MS 31068 145 65 environmental MS 3106A 145 6S MS 3106E 145 65 environmental MS 3106A 145 65 MS 3106E 145 65 environmental 3 3 2 Digital Interface Box Connections Figure 3 10 shows the digital interface box connections for J to the power supply and receiver device Cables should be selected according to the following guidelines depending upon the overall cable length between the box and counter card l Cable length up to 50 feet a twisted shielded pair is recommended for the gate signals and interrogation signals optional Power signals can be routed using any properly sized multiconductor cable For areas not subject to electrical noise a hig
297. ors Apply power The voltage should be 15 Vdc 3 Connect the DVM to pins B and C of cable connector J1 if you have MS type connectors or TB3 pins J and K if you have strain relief connectors The voltage should be 15 Vdc NOTE A low voltage reading in steps 4 and 5 indicates a power supply with an inade quate rating or an excessive voltage drop in the cabling i e improper wire sizes 4 If the voltage readings are correct check the power supply voltages under load as described in steps 5 and 6 32 5 Connect a 60 Q to 75 Q resistor across Pins A and C of the MS connector or pins H and K of TB3 The voltage across the resistor should be 14 7 Vdc minimum 6 Connect a 230 Q to 250 Q resistor across Pins B and C The voltage across the resistor should be 14 7 Vdc minimum 11 3 Grounding Trace all ground and power supply common connections A single earth ground should be connected to the power supply common circuit ground An additional ground is connected to the case of the analog output module AOM If the AOM is suspect remove the mounting screws and place the box on insulat ing material i e wood then recheck the output readings 11 4 Connections Check the solder connections in the J1 cable Ensure no cold solder joints are present Perform a continu ity check between the J1 connections to ensure no shorts are present 11 5 LDT Signals Disconnect connector J2 from the AOM Apply p
298. osonics Fig 7 5 1 Sensor Length and Cycle Time To optimize the cycle time measuring frequency the AK 288 must always be adjusted to the Sensor Length of the connected Temposonics ll transducer The Sensor Length is the addition of labled stroke length mounting zone 51 mm and a fixed value of 46 mm see below MTS Sensor Technologie Example MT GmbH amp Co KG Sensor Lable Auf dem Sch ffel 9 ME D s8513L denscheid Temposonics TTA RB M 0150 R Stroke 150 mm Stroke length Scale 64840 FK 281972 A Grd 9 00805 FN 93 39065 The Sensor Length must be programmed with the dip switches No 0 9 of the code switch S2 fig 8 in On Off position Fig 8 Code switch S2 5 1 1 Calculation of Total Value GW GW Stroke length 51mm Mounting zone 46 mm S 17 9 mm Always round up the calculated value 5 1 2 Setup Code switch S 2 Each of the dip switches 0 9 of code switch S2 has a Single Value EW as shown in table 1 EW Single Value which is closest to the calculated GW Total Value read from the table 1 and add EW s until GW is reached Set the slide switches 0 9 with the single a value EW to position ON 1 OFF All other switches must be in position OFF a Y Single Cycle Time Sensor Value EW psec Length mm 1 6 4 12 8 25 6 51 2 102 4 204 8 409 6 819 2 1638 4 3264 8 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Tab
299. osonics Il Cable Color Code See Note 1 Temposonics Il Configurations e Neuter No Personality Module e RPM RS422 Personality Module e DPM Digital Personality Module e APM Analog Personality Module Pin No Wire Color Wire Color Neuter DPM RPM APM Striped leads Solid Leads 1 White Blue Stripe White DC Ground DC Ground DC Ground DC Ground 2 Blue White Stripe Brown Frame Frame Frame Frame 3 White Orange Stripe Gray Not Used Gate Out Start Stop Pulse Displacement Return GND 4 Orange White Stripe Pink Not Used Gate Out Start Stop Pulse Displacement Out g White Green Stripe Red VDC VDC VDC VDC See Note 6 6 Green White Stripe Blue VDC VDC VDC VDC 7 White Brown Stripe Black Uutput Pulse Return Not Used Not Used Not Used 8 Brown White Stripe Violet Output Pulse Not Used Not Used Not Used g White Gray Stripe Yellow Interrogation Interrogation Interrogation Not Used See Notes 2 3 See Notes 2 4 See Notes 2 4 5 10 Gray White Stripe Green Interrogation Interrogation Interrogation Not Used See Notes 2 3 See Notes 2 4 See Notes 2 4 5 NOTES 1 Verify if the cable has striped or solid color leads and make connections accordingly 2 1 to 4 microseconds maximum pulse duration 3 WARNING Under no condition should both the positive and negative interrogation leads be connected at the same time when using the NEUTER version Temposonics II transducer The unused int
300. ote that output voltage will drop under load lt TTL data books Circuit Ground LED LA 8018 Figure 4 1 Testing Counter Card Output With the above test set up procedure some of the LED should light immediately If no LED s light move th magnet through the stroke of the transducer and ensure t a one or more LED s light If none respond recheck the in of the LED s and the power supply connections to the card pins 1 and 2 To check the counter card reading move the magnet betwee two measured positions on the stroke and record the LEI readings as hi or lo Take the complement of th readings and calculate the decimal equivalent of th readings For example in natural binary a decima equivalent is Table 4 1 LED Test Decimal Complement A Weight B ee d 1 024 0 4 906 5 930 Inches of stroke Shown for reference purposes Repeat this table for position 2 and compare the inches of stroke measured to the inches of stroke observed NOTE A change in reading between 2 points on the stroke is a general indication of proper system operation 4 5 Interrogate Recirculate Interrogation and Recircuration m pulses J2 pin E Shown for N 2 T T gt Recirculations f Transient Transient and Return Return and transient pulses 8 J2 pin C Return 2 5 V C Interface Box Pulse Duration Outputs gates J1 pins G and K To counter card pins UU 5 and 4
301. ounter card s To determine the applicable connections the resolution and stroke length must be known yielding a maximum reading column 1 Refer to column 7 to determine the decimal equivalent of the particular digit in question knowing the desired decimal point position 7 Check Appropriate Column Resolution Used only with 4 1 4 digits For 4 1 2 or more digits Sth digit is on card 8 Figure 3 12 Sample BCD Output Connection Table 3 22 3 3 4 Wiring Procedure The general wiring and checkout procedure is as follows 1 2 3 9 Route the power and signal cables to the interface box Do not run near high voltage lines or contacting equipment Mark the power supply wires at the interface box Jl connector end of cable and connect the panel end of cable to the proper power supply terminals Connect the and gate signal wires to the counter card edge connector Do not connect the edge connector to the card at this time Solder all cable wires to the appropriate Jl pins on the MS3116F12 10S box mating connector Use heat shrink tubing over each solder connector to protect the connections from shorts Make sure that cable shields do not make contact with the connector pins or the connector shell Apply tape or a rubber boot over any exposed cable shield before tightening the cable clamps Check for wiring shorts between pins after connector assembly CAUTION Be sure all connections are correct before
302. our Profibus system do not enter Data Exchange Mode Switch off and on the supply voltage for the sensor Change the Slave Address as in the normal procedure Doc No APD 0048 Rev A Doc Owner Uwe Viola Effective Date 12 13 01 Page 2 of 2
303. output Section IV Troubleshooting This section consists of troubleshooting procedures to be used when operational problems are encountered NOTE The following procedures are for general troubleshooting purposes Purchase of replacement components should not be determined solely upon results of these tests Consult MTS Temposonics for recommendations before purchasing replacement system components If the output signal is erratic or unchanging random the first procedure is to turn off power and recheck Subsections 3 3 1 3 3 2 and 3 3 3 for possible errors in mechanical or electrical installation Once all procedures have been checked continue for diagnostic test procedures to determine the cause of fault The possible causes of faulty output are listed below in order of frequency probability of occurrence and should be checked in order References Improper power supply power connection Mismatched system components Ground loops improper grounding Improper wiring procedure for J 1 on DIB power and signal connections Improper wiring procedure for J2 on DIB to transducer Improper wiring procedure for counter card connections Incorrect receiver device or software Improper magnet mounting EMI noise affecting transducer transducer cable or DIB counter card cable Circuit fault within interface box Circuit fault within counter card Circuit fault within transducer 4 1 Figure 3 10 and Subsection 4 2
304. ow Refer to the programming proce dures on the next page if the DPM needs to be reprogrammed Key to be cut off 2 Key removed rH 1 ran 1 The keys can be detached using either an Exacto knife or side cutting wire cutters Figure 1 5 Place provided insulator on the bracket 6 Align the 12 pin connector on the interconnect board with the socket on the RPM ensure pins are straight and press gently until PM is securely inserted 7 Once the module is inserted secure with the 2 provided Plastite screws until snug DO NOT OVER TIGHTEN 05 94 550093 REVISION B 5 PAGES 1 8 Carefully align the cover to the threads and hand tighten until snug against the gasket 9 Once cover is secure attach the provided label as shown in Figure 2 Temposonics Il Label already attached Apply new label here Figure 2 10 Connect transducer and verify proper operation DPM Programming Procedure Asynchronous Mode NOTE DPM programming switches are set from the factory Call MTS before mak ing any adjustments to the switches A small flat head screw driver should be used to program the switches See Figure 1 next page for switch loca tions CAUTION The DPM is a static sensitive device and should be treated as such MTS recommends a static wrist wrap be worn during installation and program ming These procedures are to be con ducted in a clean environment 1 SW1 and SW2 are programming swi
305. ower and check the J2 readings using Figure 11 1 If the voltages are correct connect J2 and check the signals at pins B and C with an oscilloscope 33 34 Figure 11 1 Test Point TP Locations 5 Volts at Test Point 1 0 Volts TB3 K 3 5 Volt Interrogation pulse sent to TB2 E Pulse returned from TB2 C approximately 2 3 Volts Weg x musa TTL level pulse 3 5 Volts located at Test Point 3 Pulse width modulated output 3 5 Volts at Test Point 2 Test Point 9 0 to 10 Volts as the magnet moves back and forth Test Point 12 0 to10 Volts or 10 volts as the magnet moves back and forth H The 4 20 mA Ungrounded option is 0 to 2 Volts Figure 11 2 AOM Signals NOTE Do not interchange transducers and AOMs with differing model numbers without first consulting MTS Sensors Division A If a spare transducer of the same stroke and model number is available connect the spare transducer to the AOM and check the displacement readings at the system electronics B If a spare AOM of the same stroke model number is available connect J1 J2 and the ground wire to the spare AOM and check the displacement readings at the system electronics 35 12 Analog Output Card The Analog Output Card is a plug in type electronics card that performs the same functions as the Analog Output Module AOM and can be used as a direct replacement physically and functionally for the old style Temposonics Elect
306. own in Figures 4 2a c Any non magnetic materials can be in direct contact with the permanent magnet without affecting performance Ferromagnetic Material 1 8 in 5 8 in Minimum Minimum Tip Figure 4 2a Minimum Magnet Clearance Using Magnetic Supports 10 NON Ferromagnetic Support Ferromagnetic Support Threads 9 8 in Minimum Magnet L Magnet ue A A 1 in minimum to clear threads A 5 8 in plus support thickness Figure 4 2c Figure 4 2b Minimum Null Space Using Magnetic Support Minimum Null Space Using Non Magnetic Support Notes 1 The magnet must not contact ferromagnetic materials such as iron or steel Clearances are required between the surface of the magnet and ferromagnetic material as shown Non ferrous material such as copper brass or 300 series stainless steel may contact the magnet without affecting sensor performance 2 Standard Null Space is 2 inches There is no maximum limit for Null Space Less then 2 inches can be specified if magnet clearances meet requirements illustrated above NOTE Clearance between the magnet and the sensor rod is not critical However contact between the components will cause wear over time The installation of supports and or readjustment of the supports is recommended if the magnet contacts the sensor rod 3 Move the permanent magnet full scale to check that it moves freely If not Gf the magnet rubs on the sensor rod you can correct
307. pairs shielded low capacitance cable BELDEN 8105 or equivalent w appropriate number of conductors for sensor used Maximum Cable Length Sensor with RS422 output 500 meters 1640 ft sensor with PWM output 152 4 meters 500 ft Dimensions MK292 Card Front Panel 30 2 x 128 4 mm 1 19 x 5 06 in MK292 Module Front Panel 50 4 x 128 4 mm 1 98 x 5 06 in When using the MK292 with a Temposonics LA or LP sensor please contact Applications Engineering Specifications are subject to change without notice Consult MTS for verification of specifications critical to your application 2 2 Temposonics Position Sensor Specifications For detailed specifications and installation requirements for the position sensors refer to the appropriate document as follows e Temposonics II Sensor Installation and Instruction Manual P N 550055 e SE based Temposonics LP Installation Guide P N 550582 e Temposonics L Series Digital Product Specification P N 550539 NOTE Zero Points Before ordering an M K292 with a Temposonics LA or LP sensor consult an M TS Sensors Division Applications Engineer for details regarding the positioning of the sensor s ZERO point Parameter Specification Input Voltage Powered from MK292 Module Stroke Length Temposonics Il Up to 300 inches 7620 mm SE based Temposonics LP Up to 48 inches 1219 mm Temposonics L Series Up to 120 inches 3048 mm Non linearity Temposoni
308. place to prevent movement Reset all switch segments to the LO closed position taking note of alignment marks on the board If a CRT or other readout device indicates a decimal value in inches mm or other units convert this value from decimal to BCD binary and record it in row B of the diagram in Figure 3 14 Decimal to BCD conversion is explained on page 3 20 Alternatively read each active bit on the counter card output and record this BCD number in row A of the Diagram Then convert row A to decimal and record it in row B Subtract each digit in row B from 9 and record the result in row C Convert row C into BCD binary and record the result in row D Use the number from row C to mark the columns E and F If the corresponding bit from C is 1 mark an X in column E open or HI If the corresponding bit is 0 mark an X in column F closed or LO Turn off power then set each switch segment to the value HI or LO indicated by the Xs in columns E and F Apply power to the system and check that the output is now zero 3 28 on e w e WI C eae 2050900000999 RU NN s 2 ve 22 21 a9 18 ve v7 18 vx va 19 LEDs T BCD indicator used in _C 9 Deeimal LI D Converted Convert C to se Ee If value in row D is 1 mark X in column E K value in row D is 0 mark X in column F Dip switch settings should be viewed with the edge card connector facing
309. ponents do not show shift age or drift over time and recalibration is not necessary However calibration may be used to compensate for mechanical wear on external mechanical parts connected to the magnet or the transducer 3 4 1 Re zeroing the Series 80 Digital Counter Card On Series 80 counter cards the zero point is preset at the factory using a pair of DIP switches Sl and S2 Zero is set at 2 inches from the hex flange of the transducer or at a distance specified by the customer If reverse output is specified the zero point is set at 5 inches or 7 inches from the tip of the transducer rod The DIP switches are normally covered with RTV or otherwise protected to prevent accidental resetting There are three ways of changing the zero setting a Mechanical Offset The zero position can be adjusted by changing the mechanical offset of the magnet relative to the transducer rod This requires a coupler device which permits a screw adjustment of the magnet The installer fabricates a coupler device to hold the magnet The coupler should include adjustment screws that allow fine adjustments of the magnet along the transducer rod Move the magnet to obtain a zero reading If the coupler does not allow magnet position adjustment it can sometimes be used to lock the magnet in place while shims or washers are used to move the transducer relative to the magnet Do not attempt this if the unit is installed in a hydraulic cylinder
310. possible The crystal frequency for a given resolution versus circulations is approximated by the following formula FORMULA where fc 0 11 x D R inches x NJ fe Counter Card clock frequency in MHz or R Resolution inches or millimeters f 2 8 x D R mm x N N Number of circulations D Counter Card divider 1 2 or 4 only Take the following steps d Select an N circulation value using Table 5A for the resolutions shown These pre calculated values are normally sufficient As an alternative N values can be calculated using the formulas above Begin by using the values from the first column for counter card divider D 4 If none are available under D 4 then use values from the next column D 2 Using the N selected look up the update time in the graph Figure A 1 If this update time is acceptable record the values for N R D and update time and go on to Step 3 If this update time is not acceptable use the formula above to calculate values for N and try Step 1 again using the values for D 2 then if necessary D 1 The higher divider numbers are preferred to prevent instability of the least significant digit LSD If one or more digits are discarded however D 2 offers only marginal improvement over D 1 Use Table 3A to determine the number of BCD bits required to generate the given resolution 43 44 Table 5A Recirculation Values for Resolutions
311. ppli jineering O ro t CQ A utout DRAWING NUMBER AF 043 CN N s 8 99 SHEET 1 HF 1 REVISION A BY KLP Use this to page specify custom analog setpoints utilizing single magnet systems with Tempo lll PB series rm CN ZS o 538 Sib Ol C C Magnet Pre ut Null Gircke x P 445 7 00M r 0 d d Lo rtl Je NULL Magnet Stroke Must be 1 00 300 00 2 7 00 50 8 0 1 or 5mm increments OW increments 25 7600 or 5mm See at Setpoint 1 Non Standard Velocity Notes Contact Application Engineering N custom setpoints Specify lengths in 0 1 at Setpoint 2 Dead Zone table below Stroke Lengtn Total Tube Length Dead Zone 1 10 196 0 25 5000 2 5 63 5 For longer Dead Zones please contact Application Engineering Jinches second check on meters second at 1 800 633 7609 fo Consult Application Engineering for model number when requiring or omm increments as applicable Application Eng Initials e r assistance EEEEENR SYSTEMS CORPORATION MITS SENSORS DIVISION EE EEARCH TRIANGLE PARK NORTH CAROLINA 27709 DRAWING NUMBER AP 0044 DA
312. put In the procedure this step will not occur if the M K292 is configured for a start stop output Temposonics sensors with a PWM output are capable of circulations meaning that the interrogation and return signals can be recirculated a specific number of times This lengthens the duration of the PWM output from the sensor and the counting time of the MK292 the result is increased resolution The number of circulations is determined at the time of order and is reflected in the sensor s model number Refer to the appropriate ordering guide for the sensor that you are using to determine the circulation count If you have any questions regarding this contact an MTS Applications Engineer 15 16 1 Hold the programming switch in Position 2 until the REC LED is flashing 3 sec ADJUST 2 Enter the Pulse Duration recirculation value using BCD switches S1 S6 Example NOTE The chart below defines the M K292 programmable res olutions It is important to note that with resolution finer than 0 0002 in instabilities will be detected on the Least Significant Bits Resolution vs Circulations Maximum Minimum Circulation Count See note above 0 00025 16 0 00025 0 0005 8 0 0005 0 001 4 0 001 0 002 2 0 002 0 004 1 Maximum Resolution Formulas e Resolution in millimeters 0 0508 Circulation Count e Resolution in inches 0 002 Circulation Count Switch Setting PWM Outpu
313. r near actual system operation conditions 6 If the readings do not relate to the stroke position or appear erratic refer to Appendix D for troubleshooting information 37 APPENDIX A How to Specify Systems with Digital Outputs A 1 General To order a transducer with digital output you must first determine the stroke length the resolution and the maximum acceptable update time for your application and then select the appropriate options Four sizing procedures are provided IL Natural Binary Output using the standard 27 28 MHz clock II Natural Binary Output using non standard clocks III BCD Output using the standard 27 28 MHz clock IV BCD Output using non standard clocks Note that procedures I and III based upon a 27 28 MHz counter card clock crystal offer a scaled output with the standard shipping schedule If the combinations of options available do not match the resolution or update needs of your application MTS Sensors Division can by special order modify the clock crystal rate to improve resolution or shorten update time Refer to procedures II and IV to select a non standard counter card clock crystal A 2 Natural Binary Output Selection PROCEDURE I System Sizing for Natural Binary Output Scaled Output 27 28 MHz Clock Crystal This procedure is for 95 of all applications and provides a scaled output with best possible manufacturing lead time For applications requiring a shorter update ti
314. rammable Specifications are subject to change without notice Consult MTS for verification of specifications critical to your application 6 1b Analog Output Module AOM and Analog Output Card Parameter Specification Power Requirements Standard 15 Vdc 42 at 250 mA lt 1 ripple 15 Vde 2 at 65 mA lt 1 ripple Optional 24 Vdc 2 at 340 mA lt 1 ripple Output Impedance 5 KQ minimum load for voltage output 40062 maximum for 4 20 mA output Velocity Output 0 to 10 Vdc at 1 to 400 in per second Positive voltage output as magnet travels away from the transducer s head assembly negative voltage output as the magnet travels toward the transducer s head assembly Temperature Requirements Storage 40 to 180 F 40 to 82 C Operating 40 to 180 F 40 to 82 C Coefficient 20 ppm F 36 ppm C otandard Features Non volatile memory permanently stores set up information Surface mounted components reduce moment of inertia and enhance shock and vibration resistance of the module Specifications are subject to change without notice Consult M TS for verification of specifications critical to your application 15 7 Analog Personality Module The Analog Personality Module APM is mounted inside the electronics housing of the Temposonics II linear dis placement transducer and produces a direct analog output No additional interfacing electronics are required The APM processes
315. re 4 6 lies within the inside diameter of the magnet Figure 4 6 Active Zone for Open Magnets 4 4 Spring Loading or Tensioning The sensor rod can be spring loaded or tensioned using a stationary weight Attach a spring mechanism or weight to the dead zone of the sensor rod with a clamping device make sure that the clamp does not deform the rod The maximum weight or spring tension is 5 to 7 lbs 12 4 5 Cylinder Installation Null as specified Minimum 2 in 50mm I E 0 5 in 12 7 mm Bore IN O ring MS 28778 8 or equivalent e Part No 560315 Nylok Insert H D NON ferrous Spacer Part No 400633 Magnet Type SR 12 Part No 201542 1 29 in 32 76 mm O D other options available 5 Chamfered Rod Bushing Figure 4 7 Typical Cylinder Installation Figure 4 7 shows a typical cylinder installation Review the following before attempting this type of installation e Use a non ferrous plastic brass Teflon etc spacer 1 to provide 1 8 inch 32 mm minimum space between the magnet and the piston e An O ring groove 2 is provided at the base of the hex for pressure sealing MTS uses mil standard MS33514 for the O ring groove Refer to mil standard MS33649 or SAE J514 for machining of mating surfaces e The null space 3 is specified according to the installation design and cylinder dimensions The analog output module provides a null adjustment Make sure that the magnet can be mounted
316. re on Temposonics products or to talk with an MTS representative call toll free DEE MTS Systems Corporation MTS Sensor Technologie GmbH and Co MTS Sensors Technology Corporation MTS Sensors Division Auf dem Sch ffel 9 Lions Plaza 805 EE 3001 Sheldon Drive D 58513 Ludensheid 1 1 8 Shin Yokohama Cary North Carolina 27513 Federal Republic of Germany Kohoku ku Yokohama 222 Japan Telephone 800 633 7609 Telephone 49 23 5195870 Telephone 8145 475 2401 Fax 919 677 0200 Fax 49 23 5156491 Fax 48145 475 0641 Temposonics is a registered trademark of MTS Systems Corporation Temposonics products are covered by US patents 3 898 555 4 726 226 4 721 902 4 298 861 4 952 873 and additional patents pending 03 97 550451 REVISION B DAP Printed in USA COPYRIGHT MTS Systems Corporation 19947 MTS a Temp os onics P o S itio n Sensor S MK292 Digital Output Module Users Manual 0797 550414 Revision B GENERAL INFORMATION Phone Fax Numbers Phone 919 677 0100 800 633 7609 Fax 919 677 0200 Shipping Address MTS SYSTEMS CORPORATION Sensors Division 3001 Sheldon Drive Cary North Carolina 27513 Office Hours Mon Thurs 7 30 a m to 6 30 p m EST Friday 7 30 a m to 5 00 p m EST Technical Support 24 Hr Call 800 633 7609 after hours press 5 Table of Contents INTRODUCTION system Configuration SPECIFICATIONS MK292 Specifications Temposonics Position Sensor Specifications
317. re used to move the transducer relative to the magnet Do not attempt this if the unit is installed in a hydraulic cylinder 2 Software Programming In some applications it is possible and preferable to maintain a zero offset in software at the receiver This permits quick re zeroing without adjusting the magnet or resetting the DIP switches For the detailed procedure consult the manual for the receiver device Move the magnet to the desired zero position and set the receiver reading to zero In most cases the zero offset is determined by adding the binary complement to the reading observed with the magnet in the desired zero position 3 Resetting the Counter Card with DIP Switches For this procedure the receiver device must be capable of reading each of the Counter Card out put bits For example the System CRT or LED display may be connected to each bit connection on the input module If this is not possible a string of LEDs must be connected to the counter card connector to read each active bit Refer to Figure 7 1 for a typical connection Figures 6 5 and 6 6 show DIP switches S1 and S2 along with tables for determining the switch settings A Circuit P gt Ground Figure 6 3 Testing Counter Card Output a Binary Output Take the following steps Refer to Figure 6 4 next page 1 Before changing any DIP switch positions record the factory set positions for reference 2 Move the magnet to the des
318. read 4 75 Vdc minimum Perform the following procedure to check the power supply voltage and connections at the 5 volt power supply l Connect a 4 ohm 5 watt resistor or similar 1 2 amp load across the 5 Vdc terminals of the power supply The voltage should be 4 75 Vdc minimum 2 Reconnect the counter card and digital interface box Read the voltage at the counter card edge connector pin 2 with respect to pin 1 The voltage should read 4 75 Vdc minimum II n amIO nc nrcEn h lt Sasa Automotive 12 or 6 Vdc bulbs of the proper wattage are acceptable alternatives 4 2 4 3 Wiring Improper wiring between the transducer and J 2 box connector or the counter card and J 1 box connector can cause either an erratic output or complete loss of output signal The following instructions should be followed to check all connections l Disconnect or remove dc power to the system 2 Trace all wiring from the counter card to the interface box Refer to Figure 3 8 and instructions Subsection 3 3 2 for proper connection diagrams and cable types 3 Trace all wiring from the transducer to the interface box J 2 connector Ensure that maximum cable length and type is observed Refer to Table 3 1A and installation Subsection 3 3 1 for color codes cable numbers etc 4 Check system grounds Figure 3 11 shows a typical circuit diagram with the required and optional grounds Ensure that circuit ground is made at one location only t
319. rials i e iron steel etc on the magnetic field of the permanent magnet ensure the minimum spacing requirements are met as shown in Figure 2 3a c Any non magnetic materials can be in direct contact with the permanent magnet without affecting performance Ferromagnetic Material 1 8 in 1 8 in Minimum 5 8 in Minimum Minimum lt N Tip Mee Figure 2 3a Minimum Magnet Clearance Using Magnetic Supports Threads NON Ferromagnetic Support x 5 8 in Minimum Va Ferromagnetic Support lt gt Magnet S Magnet P gt A 1 in minimum to clear threads lt NA A 5 8 in plus support thickness Figure 2 3b Figure 2 3c Minimum Null Space Using Non Magnetic Support Minimum Null Space Using Magnetic Support Notes 1 The magnet must not contact ferromagnetic materials such as iron or steel Clearances are required between the surface of the magnet and ferromagnetic material as shown Non ferrous material such as copper brass or 300 series stainless steel may contact the magnet without affecting transducer performance 2 Standard Null Space is 2 inches There is no maximum limit for Null Space Less then 2 inches can be specified if magnet clearances meet requirements illustrated above NOTE Clearance between the magnet and the transducer rod is not critical However contact between the components will cause wear over time The installation of supports or
320. ronics Card 0 187 in gt 3 3 in gt i was 4 5 in M 9 R20 R24 5 375 in lt 4 50 in O 1 008 in N L 2 484 0 375 in Figure 12 1 Analog Output Card Dimensions The displacement output options available from the Analog Output Cards are as follows Voltage Outputs e 0 to 10 Vdc forward and reverse acting e 0 to 10 Vdc forward and reverse acting e 10 to 10 Vdc forward and reverse acting Current Outputs e 4 to 20 mA ungrounded forward and reverse acting e 4 to 20 mA grounded forward and reverse acting Null R20 and scale R24 adjustments are available on the Analog Output Card Null Adjustment Using a digital voltmeter turn potentiometer R20 to increase or decrease the voltage output until null is set at 0 000 Vdc Scale Adjustment Using a digital voltmeter turn potentiometer R24 to increase or decrease the voltage output until full scale output is set at 10 000 Vdc 36 The Analog Output Card has a 15 pin edge card connector the function of each pin is as follows Table 12A Analog Output Card Pin Identification Pin No Function 1 DC Ground Current return for grounded systems 5 Vdc input optional 15 Vdc input 12 Vdc to transducer for strokes lt 180 in 15 Vde input 24 Vdc is optional 15 Vdc to transducer for strokes 180 in External reference input optional 15 Vdc to tra
321. rotocol Together the TDU and Temposonics sensors provide a highly accurate reliable and easy to use position display system This document identifies the performance specifications set up procedures and wiring configurations 2 SPECIFICATIONS w Temposonics LH 15 Vdc 250 mA or 20 24 Vdc 250 mA w Temposonics Il 15 Vdc bipolar s 10 250 mA w Temposonics LP 15 Vdc 250 mA or 20 24 Vdc 250 mA EE LH s 0 05 of full stroke or lt 0 002 in 0 05 mm transducer Temposonics Il lt 0 05 of full stroke or s 0 002 in 0 05 mm Temposonics LP 0 1 of F S minimum of 0 004 in independent BSL e 0 005 in standard 0 001 in available contact MTS for details NOTE Resolution for stroke lengths beyond 199 999 inches is reduced to 0 01 in due to 5 1 4 digit display limitation Measuring Range Temposonics LH up to 200 inches standard transducer e Temposonics II Up to 200 inches standard Temposonics LP Up to 60 inches NOTE Jemposonics LH and Temposonics Il sensors are available up to 300 inches however the resolution will be reduced to 0 01 in Operating Tenperare 32 to 158 F 0 to 70 C 5 1 4 digit LED display inches 199 999 0 001 inches Millimeters 5080 0 0 1 millimeters Centimeters 508 00 0 01 centimeters Meters 5 0800 0 0001 meters e NOTE Scaling is selectable via internal dip switches Zero Reset Available on front of pane
322. rt Stop pulse processing Measuring Length Calibration Noise Rejection Analog Output with Reference Voltage Analog Switch Filter and Amplifier for Null and Span 5 Error Output d CO DO The card generates the measuring repeat frequency and generates a pulse width from the start stop signal which is proportional to the position of the magnet head The pulse duration controls a precision analog switch used to switch an internal reference voltage to an active filter The filter forms an analog voltage from the gate which is direct ly proportional to the magnet position mA R Module t s Voltage Current Output 15 V 24 Vdc Power Supply Fig 1 The Error Output of board AK 288 shows Low level if the magnet on the sensor is missing no sensor is connected the power supply of sensor is missing the board is defective the Error Input Pin a16 is not connected The Error Output requires an additional power supply of 15V or 24Vdc on Pin a16 Pin c16 shows that voltage output if the board AK 288 has no fault 2 2 Block Diagram AK 288 S2 Coding a ER ei 4321 Crystal Oscillator gt Start Flip Flop Precision i V Differential driver Stop Internal Reference i Displacement A Output
323. s as illustrated in Figures 2 1 to 2 3a c e Null Space e Stroke e Dead Zone Flange to Tip Standard Null 2 0 in 50 mm Dead Zone 290in 4 Stroke Length MM specified by customer lengths up to 179 9 in 2 50 in 63 50 mm 1 36 in 34 54 mm lt 0 03 in 0 76 mm 3 in 76 2 mm for strokes gt 180 in lt 0 38 in 9 65 mm 2 13 In 54 mm 0 38 in DIA LA 8 65 mm 1 57 in dia 39 87 mm mE 1 75 in dia End Plug 44 45 mm Flush 0 375 in 9 65 mm 3 4 16 UNF 3A Thread Hex 1 75 in 44 45 mm across flats Figure 2 1 Temposonics II Dimensions in minimum clearance for connector and cable bend Temposonics Il with Molded Connector Cable Assembly Temposonics Il with Field Instalable Connector 1 25 in minimum Temposonics Il with Integral Cable Figure 2 2 Temposonics II Connector Cable Clearance Requirements 1 Use the 3 4 inch 19 mm 16 UNF thread of the transducer to mount it at the selected location Leave room to access the hex head If a pressure or moisture seal is required install an O ring type MS 28778 8 is recom mended in the special groove Use the hex head to tighten the transducer assembly 2 Install the permanent magnet over the LDT rod Mount the permanent magnet to the movable device whose dis placement will be measured To minimize the effect of magnetic mate
324. s described in steps 2 and 3 NOTE If voltage is not present in steps 2 and 3 a problem with wiring or the power supply is indicated 2 Connect a DVM digital voltmeter to pins A and C of cable connector J1 Apply power The voltage should be 15 Vdc 3 Connect the DVM to pins B and C of cable connector J1 The voltage should be 15 Vdc NOTE A low voltage reading in steps 4 and 5 indicates a power supply with an inadequate rating or an excessive voltage drop in the cabling i e improper wire sizes 4 If the voltage readings are correct check the power supply voltages under load as descnbed in steps 5 and 6 5 Connect a 60 Q to 75 Q resistor across pins A and C The voltage across the resistor should be 14 7 Vdc mn Troubleshooting Grounding Connections LDT Signals Ww 6 Connect a 230 Q to 250 Q resistor across pins B and C The voltage across the resistor should be 14 7 Vdc min Trace all ground and power supply common connections A single earth ground should be connected to the power supply common circuit ground An additional ground is connected to the case of the analog output module AOM If the AOM is suspect remove the mounting screws and place the box on insulating material i e wood then recheck the output readings Check the solder connections in the J1 cable Ensure no cold solder joints are present Perform a continuity check between the J1 connections to ensure no shorts are pre
325. sent Disconnect connector J2 from the AOM Apply power and check the J2 readings using Figure 5 1 and earlier Table 4 5 If the voltages are correct connect J2 and check the signals at pins B and C with an osalloscope If the J2 readings are proper refer to step A If the J2 readings are not proper refer to step B MEER Time base for max displacement cycle Interrogation pulse sent to LOT Pulse returned from LDT fT Pusewan modulated output Full Scale iain E Zero Averaged dc output Figure 5 1 Analog Output Module Signals Troubleshooting NOTE Do not interchange transducers and AOMs with differing model numbers without first consulting MTS Sensors Division H a spare transducer of the same stroke and model number is available connect the spare transducer to the AOM and check the displacement readings at the system electronics it a spare AOM of the same stroke model number is available connect J1 J2 and the ground wire to the spare AOM and check the displacement readings at the system electronics Appendix A J1 Wiring for Options This appendix describes J1 wiring for non standard options J1 wiring includes all connections to TB1 and TB3 Table A 1 shows the TB1 connections for all available options Winng for the standard system with displacement only and for the velo city outpul option is illustrated in Section 4 Wiring for all other options is shown in Figures A 1 to A
326. sitive bag by hold ing the module by its edges 9 Place provided insulator on the bracket 6 Align the 12 pin connector on the interconnect board with the socket on the RPM ensure pins are straight and press gently until PM is securely inserted T Once the module is inserted secure with the 2 provid ed Plastite screws until snug Do not over tighten 8 Carefully align the cover to the threads and hand tight en until snug against the gasket Apply new label here 9 Once cover is secure attach the label provided as Figure 2 shown in Figure 2 pesa MTS Systems Corporation MTS Sensor Technologie GmbH MTS Sensors Technology Corporation MTS Sensors Division and Co KG Lions Plaza 805 3001 Sheldon Drive Auf dem Sch ffel 9 1 1 8 Shin Yokohama Cary North Carolina 27513 D 58513 L denscheid Kohoku ku Yokohama 222 Phone 800 633 7609 Federal Republic of Germany Japan Fax 919 677 0200 Telephone 49 2351 95870 Telephone 81 45 475 2401 Fax 49 2351 56491 Fax 81 45 475 0641 02 97 550094 REVISION B 1 PAGE TS E Sensors Division TEMPOSONICS Linear Displacement Transducer System with Analog Output Installation and Instruction Manual Table of Contents List of Figures List of Tables nN H s k CVA OEU NAOMN MN 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 5 Linear Displacement Transducer System Location of Position Adjustments and Terminal Boards on the AOM Velocity Adjustments on the AOM Ov
327. sonics Position Sensor Temposonics Position Sensor Figure 3 1 Start stop and PWM Outputs 4 Connections 4 1 1 Temposonics II Position Sensors with DPM or RPM Table 4 A Connections Temposonics ll Position Sensor M K292 Wire Color Wire Color Function Function Connections Pin No Striped Leads Solid Leads w PWM Output w Start Stop Output C32 1 White Blue Stripe White DC Ground DC Ground oe 2 Blue White Stripe Brown Frame Frame C28 3 White Orange Stripe Gray Gate Out Start Stop Pulse 27 4 Orange White Stripe Pink Gate Out Start Stop Pulse C30 5 White Green Stripe Red 15 Vdc 15 Vdc C31 6 Green White Stripe Blue 15 Vdc 15 Vdc No Connection 7 White Brown Stripe Black Not Used Not Used No Connection 8 Brown White Stripe Violet Not Used Not Used C24 g White Gray Stripe Yellow Interrogation Interrogation 25 10 Gray White Stripe Green Interrogation Interrogation NOTE Verify if the cable has striped or solid color leads and make connections accordingly Figure 4 1 10 Pin RB Style Connector Mating Connector P N 400755 3 4 1 2 SE based Temposonics LP Position Sensors with Start Stop Output Table 4 B Connections SE based Temposonics LP Position Sensor MK292 Sensor Connections Pin No Wire Color Function C28 1 Blue Gate C27 2 Green Gate C25 3 Yellow Interrogation C24 4 Orange Interrogation C3
328. special application considerations A mechanical means of zero positioning of the magnet must be designed into the installation and a unit with scaled output must be used 1 4 Specifications 15Vdc amp 5Vdc 596 1 ripple max 15V at 100 mA 15Vat 75 mA 5V at 1 2 amps 400 mA for DIB 800 mA counter card Supply Requirements Electrical Stroke As specified Up to 360 inch available Fixed 2 inches from hex standard or as specified Null Position Dead Space Fixed 5 or 7 inches from end of rod as specified Non Linearity 0 0596 full stroke maximum Repeatability Better than 0 00196 0 0001 inch minimum 0 0008 inch maximum Hysteresis 0 00018 inch fF 0 00011 inch for lt 12 inches stroke 3ppm F inch stroke transducer 5ppm F nominal for external electronics Temperature Coefficient 40to 180 F transducer rod a 35 to 150 F head electronics lt 12 inches 40to 180 F head electronics 12 inches 3S to 150 F digital interface box Operating Temperature TTL compatible nominal 0 amp 5 Vdc parallel true high Source Current 0 8 mA Sink Current 16 mA Output Rated by Factory Mutual for 3000 psi 20 68 MPa operating pressure and 8000 psi 55 MPa peak pressure Operating Pressure Adjustments None Units shipped after 6 1 88 are suitable for
329. steel Bracket internal to head enclosure Machine Ground Head Assembly Grounding Diagram Cable Shield no connection Va Driver Amplifier Signals Return s Module Option Module Bracket Control Module AOM DIB Counter Card or other Signals Return s Power Return Power Supply Figure 3 1 Grounding Shield Ground non current carrying AC Line 4 Digital System Configurations The typical digital system configurations are shown in Figures 4 1 4 2 and 4 3 Figure 4 1 is a full digital sys tem A full digital system includes a Temposonics II LDT with an integrated Digital Personality Module DPM and a Digital Counter Card and supplies either a Binary Coded Decimal BCD or Natural Binary output When ordered as a scaled system the components are matched and factory calibrated and will provide an exact discrete resolution Figures 4 2 and 4 3 illustrate other system configurations which use the output from either the Digital Personality Module DPM or the RS422 Personality Module RPM as direct input into a control system The DPM provides a pulse duration output and the RPM provides an RS422 interface Power Supply Requirements TTL Level e 12 to 15Vde 0 f 150mA bipolar TTL Level Pulse Duration Output e 5Vdc 1 2A req for Counter Card 0 Digital Counter Card Belden YR8105 or equivalent 5 pair Digit
330. supports attached to the active stroke length must be made of non ferrous material with a gage thickness which will permit the permanent magnet to pass without obstruction Transducer supports connected to the dead zone can be any type of material since the permanent magnet should not enter that area The following are descriptions of several types of transducer supports Loop type supports are recommended for straight transducers and are also used with channel supports Loop type supports must be thin enough to permit free movement of the magnet Figure 3 5 illustrates the fabrication of a loop type support Figure 3 6 illustrates a typical channel support NOTE When open magnets are used ensure the transducer rod remains within the inside diameter of the magnet throughout the length of the stroke If the transducer rod is allowed to leave this zone and enter the cut out area of an open magnet the transducer signal will be lost Figure 3 4 shows correct and incorrect transducer rod positions 3 4 up Safe zone Unsafe zone Figure 3 4 Transducer Rod Positions within an Open Magnet FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW Transducer C Rod SM G623 1A Figure 3 5 Loop Support Channel Type Support Channel type supports are typically straight Loop supports are normally required to keep the transducer within the channel Figure 3 6 illustrates the channel support Channel supports are available from various manufacturers linear
331. sure of the Temposonics II trans ducer The Analog Output Module and Analog Output Card are both separate interface devices 14 POWER SUPPLY 13 5 to 15 Vdc 190 mA bipolar USER S CONTROL Output SYSTEM Temposonics Il LDT To be specified Range 10 to 10 Vdc Analog Personality Module Figure 6 1 Analog System Configuration witb Analog Personality Module ANALOG OUTPUT POWER SUPPLY MODULE OPTIONAL AOM 15 Vde 250 mA 24 Vdc 340 mA J2 J 15 Vdc 65 mA Analog Displacement Output Belden YR8105 or equivalent 5 pairs pn e Temposonics Il LDT Figure 6 2 Analog System Configuration witb Analog Output Module AOM ANALOG OUTPUT POWER SUPPLY OPTIONAL s 15 Vdc 65 mA Analog Displacement Output Belden YR8105 or equivalent 5 pairs Temposonics Il LDT Figure 6 5 Analog System Configuration witb Analog Output Card 6 1 Specifications of Analog System Components 6 1a Analog Personality Module APM Parameter Specification Power Requirements 13 5 Vde to 15 Vde at 190 mA maximum 115 mA minimum Output Impedance 10 KQ minimum load for voltage output Output specified by user Range 10 Vdc to 10 Vdc forward or reverse acting Temperature Requirements Storage 40 to 150 F 40 to 70 C Operating 32 to 150 F 30 to 70 C Coefficient 10 ppm F 18 ppm C Maximum Cable Length 150 ft standard Features Field prog
332. t Following noise rejections has been factory set Stroke length up to 150 mm time window 3 1 us ne Pe Pn 5 43 2 Stroke length of 150 300 mm time window 4 6 us e E ae E 5 4 3 2 Stroke length above 300 mm time window 6 2 us mu 5 4 32 5 2 1 Scaling Noise Rejection The position of the single switches 1 5 of S1 is deter mined according to the formula as follows Time Window psec max speed m s x setup stroke length 17 7840 see page 8 item 5 1 Using this calculated time window the required program ming of Switch S1 can read from table below Switch S1 Switch S2 Time window in us 1 No noise rejection 2 1 4 usec 3 1 4 usec 4 Factory preset up to 150 mm 6 3 1 usec 7 Factory preset 150 300 mm 8 4 6 usec 9 Factory preset above 300 mm 10 6 2 usec EH H N BE N H N EO HN 11 8 0 usec B 12 9 6 usec BD 13 11 2 usec BD 14 12 8 usec ATTENTION Switch positions as right are prohibited BD ff W Table 2 If the calculated value is below the lowest table 2
333. t See Figure 4 0 4 2 2 Channel Supports Nee P di e Part No 201553 or Channel supports being typically straight are dc normally used with rigid sensors A channel support consists of a straight channel with loop supports mounted at intervals The loop supports are required to keep the sensor rod within the channel Figure 4 4 shows a channel support Channel supports are available from various manufacturers or may be fabricated Loop Support Figure 4 4 Channel Support 4 2 3 Guide Pipe Supports TUM e Part No 201553 or A guide pipe support is constructed of non SSES ferrous material straight or bent to the desired shape As shown in Figure 4 5 both inside and outside dimensions of the pipe are critical e Because the sensor rod is installed inside the pipe the inside diameter of the pipe must be large enough to clear the rod Guide Pipe e The outside diameter of the pipe must be small enough to clear the magnet Figure 4 5 Guide Pipe Support Refer to pipe manufacturers specifications and dimensions schedule 10 40 etc to select the appropriate size pipe Guide pipe is typically supported at each end of the pipe 4 5 Open Magnets When using an open magnet make sure the rod is positioned at all times within the active zone of the magnet The position sensor cannot operate properly unless the entire stroke of the sensor rod is located within this zone The active zone as shown in Figu
334. t circulations BCD Switch Circulations 4 Circulations 16 S1 4 6 SW SJ S4 55 S6 O O O O OO OOOD 1 Hold the programming switch in Position 2 until the SC LED is flashing 3 sec ADJUST The MK292 is now ready to accept the next parameter Scale Factor SC 7 3 SC Scaling Factor Green LED Each Temposonics position sensor has its own specific scale factor gradient which describes the velocity of the torsional strain pulse through the waveguide medium refer to Principle of Operation The gradient is indicated on the sensor s label Upon initial start up or when replacing sensors this value must be set to recalibrate system IMPORTANT Scale Factor or Gradient For stroke lengths defined in inches Pin c14 set for inches the scale factor or gradient is described in microseconds per inch This value is indicated on the sensor s label see Fig 7 3 For stroke lengths defined in millimeters Pin c14 set for millime ters the scale factor or gradient is described in meters per sec ond The formula to convert us in to m s is as follows Scale in m s 25 400 Scale in ps in Example Scale Gradient 8 94371 us in 25 400 8 94371 ps in 2839 98 meters second E 1 Momentarily tap the programming switch to Position 1 the SC LED will light ADJUST 2 Hold the programming switch in Position 2 until the SC LED begins to flash 3 sec 3 Enter
335. t voltage select desired output step 5 or 11 at setpoint 1 or 2 voltage needed at setpoint 1 SW1 and SW2 setpoint voltage Lock in program step 6 or 12 NOTES 1 Always program setpoint 1 first lock in program then complete the steps to program setpoint 2 2 When adjusting the output voltage step 4 make sure the magnet is in the position of the setpoint 3 Setpoint 1 will always be the setpoint closest to the transducer head 4 If a mistake is made during programming turn off power wait a few seconds turn power on and start over It is necessary to monitor the analog output with a digital voltmeter while performing the following steps 1 Move the permanent magnet to the desired position for Set Point 1 Press the SW1 push button until the APM enters the programming mode 3 seconds and acknowledges by producing an output voltage of about 5 volts Release the SW2 button 2 Press and release the SW2 button to enter the performance mode setup mode The APM will acknowl edge by producing an output voltage which corresponds to the currently stored performance mode see below If the APM has never been programmed the default mode will be resolution preferred that is the output voltage will be O volts e Resolution Preferred Mode 0 volts e Balanced Mode 8 4 volts e Update Preferred Mode 8 4 volts 19 20 10 11 12 At this point repeated presses of the SW2 button will cause the APM to cycle through
336. tage to move in the negative direction If either button is held for more then five seconds the output voltage will begin to change more quickly Release the button when the desired output voltage is displayed on the digital volt meter For testing purposes this step may be skipped completely To complete the setup for Set Point 2 press and release both buttons simultaneously If the transducer was previously programmed it will resume operation with the new voltage assigned to Set Point 2 A P M CAUTION If the APM is being programmed for the first time the analog output at power up will be near zero volts The programming steps are the same in this case but the analog output will return to zero volts until valid information is stored for both Set Point 1 and Set Point 2 When both Set Points have been programmed the transducer will enter normal operating mode and produce an analog output scaled according to the information permanently stored in APM s memory Figure 3 APM Top View V LS a SP1 SP2 FREE SENSORS MTS GROUP WW Pioneers UNITED STATES MTS Systems Corporation Innovators Sensors Division Leaders in 3001 Sheldon Drive Cary NC 27513 Tel 800 633 7609 f Fax 800 498 4442 Sensing Email info temposonics com Web www temposonics com Magnetostrictive Temposonics is a registered trademark of MTS Systems Corporation 2000 M TS Systems Corporation All Temposonics sensors are covered by
337. tches used to set the number of recirculations from hexadecimal num bers 01 to 7F or from 81 to FF refer to Table 2 Table 1 indicates the resolutions that are attainable with a given number of recirculations these numbers assume a standard 27 to 28 MHz crystal is being used 2 SW3 is the switch used to program or set the update time for internal interrogation Update Time is pro grammed using hexadecimal numbers 0 to F refer to Table 3 Follow the steps below to program Update Time Step A Knowing the stroke length the null and the resolution desired use Table 1 to find the corresponding number of recirculation required Step B Find the minimum required update time Umin using the formula below U min 2 5 Null Stroke 01086 ms in x N Where Stroke stroke length in inches 1 to 300 inches N number of recirculations Null null length in inches 2 05 94 550093 REVISION B 5 PAGES Step C Go to Table 3 to select the switch setting SW3 that yields the closest update time which is greater than or equal to Umin Step D Use the following formula to verify the exact update time of the transducer Update Time N 1 SW3 1 0 2 ms Where N number of recirculations SW3 switch setting in decimal EXAMPLE Given Stroke Length 20 inches Null 2 inches Resolution 001 inch SOLUTION a From Table 1 the corresponding recirculation is N 4 b From Step B above the minimum required update time is
338. ternal Start Input permits the timing of the measuring cycle i e the interrogation pulses to originate from an outside source The Master Slave Input see below logic must be HIGH before the sensor can be interrogated normally it is set LOW Start signals must be between 6 to 10 microseconds in duration and repetition period must exceed the minimum cycle time refer to pro gramming section of the manual MR Measuring Range Minimum Cycle Time ES 6 10 us Figure 4 9 External Start 4 5 5 Master Slave Input Features Pin c13 Logic HIGH If an application requires that more than one Temposonics position sensor provide position data simultaneously the Master Slave Input may be used It is essential to identify the longest position sensor as the master device since it possesses the longest cycle time The mas ter start command is switched to output c7 and linked to slave out put c16 External Start Input Figure 4 10 Master Slave 11 5 System Parameters 12 After the MK292 Digital Output Module is installed and connected to the Temposonics position sensor system parameters must be set before start up When setting the system parameters you must be aware which electronics module is installed in the Temposonics position sensor Verify that the sensor has either a start stop or PWM output If the sensor has a PWM output also verify that it is config ured for external interrogation Contact a
339. terrogation 7 Shield Connect extension cable shield at TB2 B or J2 Pin B IWARNING Under no condition connect botb tbe positive and negative interroga tion wires to TB2 E at the same time The unused interrogation lead MUST be connected to DC Ground 31 11 Troubleshooting the Analog Output Module Use the troubleshooting procedures in this section when operational problems are encountered The procedures are listed in order of frequency of occurrence and should be completed in the order shown NOTE The following procedures are for general diagnostic purposes Purchase of replace ment components should not be based solely on these procedures Consult MTS Sensors Division for recommendations and factory service before ordering replacement components 11 1 General Make sure the magnet is positioned to move freely along the LDT rod Trace all wiring from the J1 connector to ensure proper routing 11 2 Power Supply Check Perform the following procedure to check the power supply voltages 1 Remove power and disconnect connector J1 to check open circuit power supply voltages as described in steps 2 and 3 NOTE If voltage is not present in steps 2 and 3 a problem with wiring or the power sup ply is indicated 2 Connect a DVM digital voltmeter to pins A and C of cable connector J1 if you have MS type connectors or TB3 pins H and K if you have strain relief connect
340. the scale factor indicated on the sensor label using the BCD switches S1 S6 Example Gradient 8 94371 BCD Switch Settings S1 1 52 03 94 9D 96 17 18 E Hold the programming switch in Position 2 until the RE LED is lighted 3 sec SETUP The MK292 is now ready to accept the next parameter Resolution RE 7 4 RE Resolution Green LED The resolution that can be achieved by the MK292 is dependent on the input from the Temposonics position sensor The chart below indicates the range of resolutions depending on sensor type Note that sensors with PWM output must be set for the appropriate number of circulations to achieve desired output resolution RESOLUTION Start Stop Output Range 0 1 in to 0 002 in or 2 54 mm to 0 05 mm PWM Output Range 0 1 in to 0 0002 in or 2 54 mm to 0 005 mm Note Refer to Resolution vs Circulation Chart page 16 1 Hold the programming switch in Position 2 until the HE LED begins to flash 3 sec ADJUST 2 Enter the desired resolution using BCD switches S1 S6 Table 7A SWITCH SETTINGS RESOLUTION IN INCHES Switches 0 0002 in 0 0004in 0 002in 0 004in 0 02in 0 039 in S1 0 000X 4 0 0 0 0 92 0 00X 93 0 0X 94 0 X 9D 96 Table 7B SWITCH SETTINGS RESOLUTION IN MILLIMETERS Switches 0 005mm 001mm 0 5mm O0 1mm 05mm 10mm 1 0 000X S2 0 00X 93 0 0X 94 0 X 9D
341. thod of representing decimal numbers The BCD code for a decimal number is a string of four bit binary numbers each of which represents one decimal digit Only the following binary groups are used Decimal No Binary No Decimal No Binary No 0 0000 5 0101 1 0001 6 0110 2 0010 7 0111 J 0011 8 1000 4 0100 9 1001 For example the decimal number 8 74 is encoded in BCD as a 12 bit binary number Decimal No 8 7 4 6 74 BinaryNo 1000 0111 0100 1000 01110100 In many cases the BCD code for a stroke length yields a range of BCD numbers where some bits never change value For example 19 999 inches is represented in BCD by the following 20 bit number 00011001 100110011001 Notice that for all values from 0 up to 19 999 the first three bits will like wise be zero This means that the remaining 17 bits are sufficient to encode a stroke of 19 999 inches that is one 18 bit counter card is sufficient Table 6H below lists the maximum stroke length versus number of significant bits for a resolution of 0 001 inch Table 6H BCD Representations of Stroke X BCD Value of X Required maximum stroke reading Number of Bits 7 999 8 0111 1001 1001 1001 15 9 999 10 1001 1001 1001 1001 16 19 999 20 0001 1001 1001 1001 1001 17 39 999 40 0011 1001 1001 1001 1001 18 79 999 80 0111 1001 1001 1001 1001 19 99 999 100 1001 1001 1001 1001 1001 20 199 999 200 0001 1001 1001
342. tion using the 3 4 inches 19 mm 16 UNF thread of the transducer Allow sufficient area to access the hex head to tighten the transducer assembly Install an O ring type MS28778 8 is recommended in the special groove if a pressure or moisture seal is required Install the permanent magnet over the LDT rod The permanent magnet is mounted to the movable device from which displacement is to be measured To minimize the effect of ferromagnetic materials such as iron nickel steel etc on the magnetic field of the permanent magnet ensure the minimum spacing requirements are met as shown in Figure 3 2 Any non magnetic materials can be in direct contact with the permanent magnet Types of magnets are shown in Figure 3 3 NOTE Clearance between the magnet and the LDT rod is not critical However contact between the components will cause wear over time The installation of supports or readjustment of the supports is recommended if the magnet contacts the LDT rod Move the permanent magnet full scale to determine if support brackets are required If the magnet contacts the LDT mount a support bracket to the end of the LDT Long transducers may need additional supports to be attached to the transducer rod Refer to Subsection 3 2 2 for the procedure for installing transducer supports Mount the digital interface box in a location within reach of the LDT assembly cable Older systems allow the digital interface box to be mounted within
343. tments are factory set and should not require readjustment The velocity output signal represents a static displacement no motion by 0 volts and the maximum velocity of a dynamic displacement by 10 volts The direction of motion is indicated by the polarity of the velocity signal a positive signal normally indicates the permanent magnet is moving away from the transducer head unless otherwise specified for this system The following procedure provides the velocity null adjustment the full scale adjustment requires special equipment Refer to igure 2 2 Velocity Scale Adjustment R41 x tte er rm w See eee LLULLU DO SC LL RT E ee tee eee eee eee J LUES ree ereen Sr tttm tt EE Velocity Null YTA Anea BEBBE RT Adjustment pa R40 Figure 2 2 Velocity Adjustments on the AOM Adjustments NOTE Velocity scale adjustment may be difficult in the field because it requires precision equipment to control and measure the exact velocity Disconnect all power from the system Loosen the four screws securing the AOM cover and remove the cover Note the location of terminal board TB1 on the AOM Refer to Figure 2 2 Connect a peak reading DVM digital voltmeter or oscillos
344. to existing mating connector when replacing a Digital Interface Box with a Temposonics Il LDT with a DPM 8 Shield Connect Extension cable shield at J2 Pin B Table 6C below identifies the cable leads of an original Temposonics transducer Table 6C Original Temposonics Transducer Cable Signal Function Wire Color Code 15 Vdc Green or Gray DC Ground Black Return Pulse from LDT Orange or Brown 15 Vde Blue Interrogation Pulse White 12 Vde Red 23 24 Table 6D below identifies the terminations to make with the positive and negative interrogation lines Pin 9 and 10 depending on the Temposonics II configuration being used in your application It is impor tant note that when using a neuter version Temposonics II DO NOT connect both the positive and neg ative interrogation leads at the same time the unused lead must be tied to ground Table 6D Temposonics II Interrogation Configurations Transducer Pin No Functional Description Personality Module Interrogation Mode g Interrogation Neuter Temposonics II Temposonics Il w RPM 10 Interrogation or Temposonics Il w DPM external interrogation See Note 9 Interrogation Neuter Temposonics II positive interrogation Temposonics Il w RPM 10 DC Common or Temposonics II w DPM external positive interrogation g DC Common Neuter Temposonics II negative interrogation Temposonics Il w RPM 10 Interrogation or Temposonics
345. tons simultaneously If the transducer has been previously programmed it will resume operation with the new voltage assigned to SW1 If it has not been previously programmed it will return to the same voltage it had prior to entering the programming mode near 0 volts Move the permanent magnet to the desired position for Set Point 2 Press the SW1 push button until the APM enters the programming mode 3 seconds and acknowledges by producing an output voltage of approximately 4 2 volts Release the SW1 button Press and release the SW2 button to enter the performance mode setup mode The APM will acknowl edge by producing an output voltage which corresponds to the currently stored performance mode If the APM has never been programmed the default mode will be resolution preferred that is the output voltage will be 0 volts At this point repeated presses of the SW2 button will cause the APM to cycle through the three perfor mance modes Continue to press and release the SW2 button until the voltage output indicates the voltage associated with the correct mode for your application Once the correct voltage is displayed press and release the SW1 button to accept the mode setting The APM acknowledges by producing an output voltage of approximately 4 2 volts Note that the mode chosen in this step should be the same as the one chosen in step 3 If a different mode is chosen it will overwrite the one chosen previously
346. troke Length inches Sensor Stroke Length inches Balanced Mode Resolution Resolution inches per step a wo 0 mm 20 300 0 wo 150 mm 250 30 Sensor Stroke Length inches Sensor Stroke Length inches Updated Preferred Mode Update Tim Resolution e Wiig ee FREMDE T Resolution inches per step 0 006 100 i 200 20 300 Sensor Stroke Length inches Sensor Stroke Length inches It is necessary to monitor the analog output with a digital volt meter while performing the following steps 1 Move the permanent magnet to the desired position for Set Point 1 Press the SP1 push button until the APM enters the programming mode 3 seconds and acknowledges by producing an output voltage of about 5 volts Release the SP1 button A 10 11 PM PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE Press and release the SP2 button to enter the performance mode setup mode The APM will acknowledge by producing an output voltage which corresponds to the currently stored performance mode see below If the APM has never been programmed the default mode will be resolution preferred that is the output voltage will be 0 volts e Resolution Preferred Mode 0 volts e Balanced Mode 10 volts e Updated Preffered Mode 10 volts At this point repeated presses of the SP2 button will cause the APM to cycle through the three performance modes Continue to press and release the SP2 button until the voltage output indicates the v
347. ts Consult the cylinder manufacturer for applicable SAE or military specifica tions lt 2 250 in Minimum Dia 2 250 in Minimum Dia Specifies Surface B Specifies Surface B JA 0 005 in Dia FIM lt 0 875 in Dia 0 015 0 000 3 4 16 UNIF 3B Thread 3 4 16 UNJF 3B Thread See Notes 3 And 4 See Notes 3 and 4 3 mn 0 015 1 40 015 SEI Am BEE Zap TV Z D 1 105 in See Note 7 Minimum en See Detail C see Detail C 15 Thru Thread Design 0 030 in 0 010 R 0 500 gt See Note 8 um 0 094 in REF 1 Key FIM Full Indicator Movement I I 45925 gt PD Pitch Diameter Blind Thread Design 0 020 in R Ki Maximum Detail C NOTES 1 Dimensions and tolerances based on ANSI Y14 5 1982 2 MTS has extracted all pertinent information from MS33649 to Generate this document 3 PD must be square with surface B within 0 005 FIM across 2 250 dia minimum 4 PD must be concentric with 2 250 dia within 0 030 FIM and with 0 769 dia within 0 005 FIM 5 Surface texture ANSI B46 1 1978 6 Use o ring MTS part number 560315 for correct sealing 7 The thread design shall have sufficient threads to meet strength requirements of material used 8 Finish counter bore shall be free from longitudinal and spiral tool marks Annular tool marks up to 32 micro inches maximum will be permissible Figure 2 9 O ring Boss Detail 1 180 in Recommended
348. ts may be assigned to either point the APM will automatically scale the output to the specified range Set Point 1 must be the set point closest to the head electronics In addition the APM can be programmed for one of three performance modes as described earlier During the programming procedure each mode is represented by a particular output voltage They are as follows Resolution Preferred Mode In the programming procedure the Resolution Preferred Mode is indicated by an output of 0 volts Balanced Mode In the programming procedure this mode is indicated by an output of 8 4 volts Update Preferred Mode In the programming procedure this mode is indicated by an output of 8 4 volts The number of recirculations shown will also indicate which mode the APM is programmed see Mode Table below Mode Table Mode Select Voltages Recirculations Resolution Mode 0 0 V 8 recirculations Balance Mode 8 4 V 2 recirculations Update Mode 8 4 V 1 recirculation Voltages are approximate values When programming the APM use the table below as a reference APM Programming Reference Guide Press Approx Output voltage Function Reference SW1 for 3 seconds 4 2 Vdc Start program mode Step 1 SW2 see mode table Select mode Step 2 SW1 4 2 Vdc Locks mode in Step 3 SW1 setpoint 1 2 1 Vdc Select setpoint 1 to program Step 4 or SW2 setpoint 2 2 1 Vde select setpoint 2 to program step 10 SW1 or SW2 Desired outpu
349. ttached to 0 and some other number ranging from 1 to 8 There are 8 possible points 3 Use the chart below to change from 0 to X to get N number of desired re circulations 4 Install U3 74161 for recirculations above 8 Jumper N From 0 to X No of circulations 0 to 1 1 0 to 2 2 0 to 3 0 to 4 8 0 to 5 16 0 to 6 32 0 to 7 64 0 to 8 128 NOTE Any DIB having a high number of circu lations can be changed to a lower num ber without having an effect on the inter rogation pulse timing C 3 Changing Polarity of Interrogation Signal This procedure is used when connecting a negative pulse transducer to a positive pulse DIB or when connecting a positive pulse transducer to a negative pulse DIB NOTE The only transducers with a negative interrogation pulse are original Temposonics I transducers with stroke lengths of 12 inches or less the serial number indicated on the transducer label ends with N to denote a negative interrogation pulse Temposonics II transducers can pro vide either a positive or a negative interrogation pulse The positive pulse is available on Pin 9 of the transducer connector white gray stripe or yellow wire of pigtail connection The negative interrogation pulse is available on Pin 10 of the transducer connector gray white stripe or green wire of pig tail connection 1 Remove the 4 cover screws on the DIB 2 Remove cover wit
350. ucers They may be used alone or with channel supports Figure 2 4 illustrates the fabrication of a loop support Front View Side View v Transducer Rod Figure 2 4 Loop Support NOTE When open magnets are used ensure the transducer rod remains within tbe inside diameter of the magnet throughout the length of the stroke If the transducer rod is allowed to enter the cut out area of an open magnet the transducer signal could attenuate or be lost See Figure 2 7 2 1 2 Channel Supports Channel supports being typically straight are normally used with rigid transducers A channel support consists of a straight channel with loop supports mounted at intervals The loop supports are required to keep the transducer within the channel Figure 2 5 shows a channel support Channel supports are available from various manufacturers or may be fabricated Magnet e Part No 201553 or e Part No 251416 Loop Support Figure 2 5 Channel Support 2 1 3 Guide Pipe Supports Guide pipe supports are normally used for flexible transducers A guide pipe support is construct ed of non ferrous material straight or bent to the desired shape As shown in Figure 2 6 both inside and outside dimensions of the pipe are critical e Because the transducer rod is installed inside the pipe the inside diameter of the pipe must be large enough to clear the rod Magnet e Part No 201553 or e Part No 251416 NC Guide Pipe
351. ue increment or decrement will occur To exit the Offset Adjust Mode press both push buttons simultaneously Release both push buttons as soon as the display goes blank The TDU will respond by returning to its normal operating mode TES 1 Span should not exceed 199 995 in 2 The TDU will display E7 if it receives no input from the Temposonics transducer This could mean either the transducer is incorrectly wired to the TDU the transducer is malfunctioning or that the magnet has exited the active area of the transducer If the E7 code is displayed because the magnet is no longer in the active zone of the transducer when the magnet returns to the active zone the TDU will resume normal operation 9 TDU DIMENSIONS 4 31 in 0 275 in mm 1 89 in 1 78 in FRONT 1 89 in 48 mm 45 21 mm 48 mm 1 78 in 45 21 mm Figure 4 TDU Dimensions ADDENDUM A Subject Installing Optional NEMA 4 Enclosure for TDU Part No for NEMA 4 Enclosure 251188 NEMA 4 Enclosure STEP 1 Insert cable through t located at the rear of the enclosure Complete wiring before mounting the TDU in the enclosure Threaded Rod 1 of 2 Brackets mount one bracket on each side of the TOU then tighten the threaded rod against the mounting plate 1 of 4 Screws Mounting Plate attaches the slide over the back of the TDU mounting plate to the NEMA 4 enclosure until flush wit
352. umber without having an effect on the interrogation pulse timing 4 10 w 2nggmweu CU Y 7 4 SV Ag z AS uv gsi v v sz ASS y p 3 LO0N fn I Geck d e gj ge rx A2 IPNOSN ee MON As II3 dr S p F PKL wFivYIYO Sur Trvouv worry gnm Fa oor Abe s Mt Xe ALE i i s or a i ov g F At A mtd FC Fla oe j d s t voer RE vr on di aa errr p z Af Afe 73 z y 8 gt vo 33 ade A cig T 1 Ee amp e s e Zog i zn x9y ay LU vag Ty d o g r EE AZ 4 12 4 10 Changing Polarity This procedure is used when connecting a negative pulse transducer to a positive pulse DIB or when connecting a positive pulse transducer to a negative pulse DIB The polarity of the interrogation pulse is determined by the type of driver within the transducer head electronics The serial number on the transducer ends in a P positive or N negative The polarity is indicated by the 10th digit in the transducer model number 1 Remove the 4 cover screws on the DIB 2 Remove cover with PCB connected Tum component side up with J1 to the left and J2 to the right as you face the board 3 Make one connection to pin E on the J2 6 pin connector w
353. unting rack The module version left provides a thermal shield against other electronic components and mechanical protection Connections to the MK292 from the position sensor and other sources are made via a 64 pin DIN edge con nector an optional 64 pin card holder is also avail able The format of the input sig nal from the Temposonics position sensor and attain able system resolution is determined by the type of position sensor selected 1 Temposonics Il e w Digital Personality Module Qutput Pulse width modulated Resolution 0 0002 in 0 005 mm e w RS422 Personality Module Output Start Stop Resolution 0 002 in 0 05 mm 2 Temposonics LP Output Start Stop Resolution 0 002 in 0 05 mm specifications Temposonics Digital Output Module Model MK292 Parameter Specifications Supply Voltage e 24 Vdc 15 20 Input Requirement e Temposonics II with integrated Digital Personality Module DPM Pulse width modulated PWM e Temposonics II with integrated RS422 Personality Module RPM Start Stop output e Temposonics LP with Start Stop output Output Format e Selectable BCD Binary or Gray Code 24 bits data output and 1 parity bit Resolution e 0 002 in 0 05 mm when using Temposonics II position sensor with RS422 Personality Module RPM or Temposonics LP position sensor e 0 0002 in 0 005 mm when using Temposonics Il position sensor with Digital Persona
354. urers specifications and dimensions schedule 10 40 etc to select the appropriate size pipe Guide pipe is typically supported at each end of the pipe 2 2 Open Magnets When using an open magnet make sure the rod is positioned at all times within the active zone of the magnet The transducer cannot operate properly unless the entire stroke of the transducer rod is located within this zone The active zone as shown in Figure 2 7 lies within the inside diameter of the magnet Magnet x Active Zone Figure 2 7 Active Zone for Open Magnets 2 3 Spring Loading or Tensioning The transducer rod can be spring loaded or tensioned using a stationary weight Attach a spring mechanism or weight to the dead zone of the transducer rod with a clamping device which will not deform the transducer rod The maximum weight or spring tension is 5 to 7 Ibs 2 amp Cylinder Installation lt Dead Zone 2 50 in 63 5 mm Null as specified for stroke lengths Minimum 2 in 50mm up to 179 9 in for stroke lengths 3 95 lt Active Stroke gt 3 in 76 2 mm x gt 180 in Minimum 5 in 127 mm v O D gt s B 0 5 in 12 7 mm Bore DA y NE Odi Pipe 0 0 0 38 in Va i Ei O ring MS 28778 8 or equivalent 2 Part No 560315 Figure 2 8 Typical Cylinder Installation UU L NON ferrous Spacer Part No 400633 Magnet Type SR 12 P
355. value switch S1 is set for a time window 1 4 us as follows nmm 5 4 3 2 IMPORTANT Sliding switch No 5 of S1 and switch No 0 of S2 are connected with one other Both sliding switches must be switched ON or OFF 5 3 Scaling Measuring Direction The measuring direction is determined or changed on the analog card using the 3 pin code bridge BR 1 see page 7 Measuring direction End Position Start Position SP1 p SP2 Code bridge BR 1 Start Position Fig 10 End Position 5 4 Setpoint Adjustment Independent of measuring direction Setpoint SP 1 is always at sensor head Setpoint SP 2 is always at sensor rod end For calibration of the Start and End position you need 2 decimal resistors or multispeed helical pot Setups are done using the resistors R32 and R34 see page 7 fig 7 as following 1 Turn potentiometers NULL N and SPAN S page 7 fig 7 to the middle position 2 For R32 and R34 connect compensating resistors in the form of decimal resistors or helical potentiometers Start Position Setup H 32 Fig 11 R 34 End Position Setup 3 Attention It is imperative that R 34 is wired with a re sistor average value appx 10 KOhms as the power stages otherwise work without feedback 4 Connect a Digitalmultimeter to the output of the analog board 5 Bring the position magnet to the Start Position SP1 or SP2 and set the desired output using the decimal
356. ways or may be fabricated 3 5 Guide Pipe Supports ER Figure 3 6 Channel Support Guide pipe supports are sections of thin walled pipe normally used to support flexible transducers A guide pipe support is constructed of non ferrous material to maintain the desired shape The transducer rod is installed into the pipe therefore the inside diameter of the pipe must allow proper clearance to install the rod and the outside diameter must allow for magnet clearance Refer to the pipe manufacturer s specifications and dimensions schedule 10 40 etc to select pipe in accordance with transducer and magnet specifications and dimensions Guide pipe is typically supported at each end of the pipe Figure 3 7 illustrates a guide pipe support Figure 3 7 Guide Pipe Support 3 6 Spring Loading The transducer rod flexible or rigid can be spring loaded or or Tensioning tensioned using a stationary weight Attach a spring mechanism or weight to the dead zone of the transducer rod with a cl device which will not deform the transducer rod The m amping aximum weight or spring tension is 5 to 7 lbs Spring loading or tensioning is recommended for installations that do not permit loop type supports and are subject to vibration or abuse 3 2 3 Flexible Transducer Installation This subsection provides the installation procedure for flexible transducers It is necessary to know the null position stroke length full sc
357. zing for Natural Binary Output Special Clock Frequency Procedure I above is for 95 of all applications and provides a scaled output with best possible manufacturing lead time For applications requiring a shorter update time or a non standard reso lution use the following procedure to determine an approximate crystal frequency number of circulations and update time Note that systems requiring a special clock frequency can add 2 4 weeks to manufacturing time and slight additional cost The crystal frequency versus circulations for a given resolution is approximated by the following formula FORMULA where fc 0 11 x D R inches x N or fe Counter Card clock frequency in MHz f 2 8 x D R mm x N maximum 56 MHz R Resolution inches or millimeters N Number of circulations D Counter Card divider 1 2 or 4 only Take the following steps 1 Divide the stroke length by the resolution This number gives the minimum number of counts required Use Table 1A to determine how many bits are required to accommodate this number NOTE The following additional steps are pre ferred to increase output stability a Divide the required resolution by 2 b Select the number of bits from Table 1A using the new resolution c Discard or do not connect to the least significant bit d Do not exceed 18 bits to avoid using an additional counter card 2 Use the above formula to determine the clock frequ

MTS Temposonic II

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents